Home

ZyXEL EMG5324-D10A User's Manual

image

Contents

1. EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 89 Chapter 5 Broadband The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 8 Network Setting gt Broadband gt 3G Backup LABEL DESCRIPTION 3G Backup Select Enable 3G Backup to have the Device use the 3G connection as your WAN or a backup when the wired WAN connection fails Card This field displays the manufacturer and model name of your 3G card if you inserted one in Description the Device Otherwise it displays N A Username Type the user name of up to 64 ASCII printable characters given to you by your service provider Type the password of up to 64 ASCII printable characters associated with the user name above PIN A PIN Personal Identification Number code is a key to a 3G card Without the PIN code you cannot use the 3G card If your ISP enabled PIN code authentication enter the 4 digit PIN code 0000 for example provided by your ISP If you enter the PIN code incorrectly the 3G card may be blocked by your ISP and you cannot use the account to access the Internet If your ISP disabled PIN code authentication leave this field blank Dial String Enter the phone number dial string used to dial up a connection to your service provider s base station Your ISP should provide the phone number For example 99 is the dial string to establish a GPRS or 3G connection in Taiwan APN Code Enter the APN Access Point Name provided by your service provider Connections with
2. Appendix C Pop up Windows JavaScript and Java Permissions 5 Click OK to close the window Figure 213 Security Jeu Java Security Settings Settings O Disable Enable Eat Font download O Disable Enable Prompt Microsoft wml B Java permissions O Custam High Teo Low safety Reset custom settings Reset to Medium Reset JAVA Sun 1 From Internet Explorer click Tools I nternet Options and then the Advanced tab 2 Make sure that Use Java 2 for lt applet gt under Java Sun is selected EMG5324 D10A Users Guide 329 Appendix C Pop up Windows JavaScript and Java Permissions 3 Click OK to close the window Figure 214 Java Sun General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Settings C Use inline AutoComplete C Use Passive FTP for firewall and DSL modem compatibility Use smooth scrolling HTTP 1 1 settings Use HTTP 1 1 C Use HTTP 1 1 through proxy connections Java console enabled requires restart C Java logging enabled JIT compiler for virtual machine enabled requires restart Multimedia C Always show Internet Explorer 5 0 or later Radio toolbar C Cor t display online media content in the media bar Enable Automatic Image Resizing an Restore Defaults Mozilla Firefox Mozilla Firefox 2 0 screens are used here Screens for other versions may vary You can enable Java JavaScript and pop ups in one screen Cl
3. EMG5324 D10A Users Guide Chapter 6 Wireless 6 2 3 More Secure WPA 2 PSK The WPA PSK security mode provides both improved data encryption and user authentication over WEP Using a Pre Shared Key PSK both the Device and the connecting client share a common password in order to validate the connection This type of encryption while robust is not as strong as WPA WPA2 or even WPA2 PSK The WPA2 PSK security mode is a newer more robust version of the WPA encryption standard It offers slightly better security although the use of PSK makes it less robust than it could be Click Network Settings gt Wireless to display the General screen Select More Secure as the security level Then select WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK from the Security Mode list Figure 23 Wireless gt General More Secure WPA 2 PSK security Level More Secure Recommended Security Mode WPA2 PSK gt Enter 8 63 characters fa z A Z and 0 9 or 64 hexadecimal digits fa f A F and 0 9 Pre Shared Key IREWIENKNM4 SV hide mare WPA PSK Compatible f Enable Disable Encryption TKIPAES Mils The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 13 Wireless gt General WPA 2 PSK LABEL DESCRIPTION Security Level Select More Secure to enable WPA 2 PSK data encryption Security Mode Select WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK from the drop down list box Pre Shared Key The encryption mechanisms used for WPA WPA2 and WPA PSK WPA2
4. Encryption Type WPA PSK EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 5 This screen varies depending on the encryption method you selected in the previous screen Enter the pre shared key and leave the encryption type at the default setting Encryption Type TKIP Pre Shared Key 1 2MyWPAPSKpresharedkey34 6 Inthe next screen leave both boxes selected 802 11b 802 119 Next 7 Verify the profile settings in the read only screen Click Save to save and go to the next screen Network Name SSID SSID Examples Network Type Infrastructure Network Mode B02 11bfg gt Channel Autoa Security wWPA PSK 8 Click Activate Now to use the new profile immediately Otherwise click the Activate Later button If you clicked Activate Later you can select the profile from the list in the Profile screen and click Connect to activate it EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials Note Only one profile can be activated and used at any given time Your network has been configured successfully Acivate NOW Activate Later 9 When you activate the new profile the ZyXEL utility returns to the Link Info screen while it connects to the AP using your settings When the wireless link is established the ZyXEL utility icon in the system tray turns green and the Link I nfo screen displays details of the active connection 10 Open your Internet
5. HTTPS LAN or WLAN LAN or WLAN Interface Local Ether Type IP Protocol ICMP Ether Type IP Protocol TOP Destination FP Ether Type IP Protocol TOP Destination P Ether Type IP Protocol TOP Destination FP Ether Type IP Protocol TOP Destination P Ether Type IP Protocol UDP Destination P Unchange Unchange Unchange Unchange Unchange Unchange Unchange Unchange Unchange Unchange Unchange Unchange Unchange Unchange Unchange Unchange Unchange Unchange Unchange Unchange Unchange Unchange Fast Unchange Unchange Unchange Unchange Unchange Unchange Fast Active user Active user Active user Slow Slow Chapter 9 Quality of Service QoS The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 36 Network Setting gt QoS gt Class Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Add new Click this to create a new classifier Classifier Order This field displays the order number of the classifier Status This indicates whether the classifier is active or not A yellow bulb signifies that this classifier is active A gray bulb signifies that this classifier is not active Class Name This is the name of the classifier Classification This shows criteria specified in this classifier for example the interface from which traffic of Criteria this class should come and the source MAC address of traffic that matches
6. WAN Interface This shows the WAN interface through which the service is forwarded Start Port This is the first external port number that identifies a service End Port This is the last external port number that identifies a service Translation This is the first internal port number that identifies a service Start Port Translation End This is the last internal port number that identifies a service Port Server IP This is the server s IP address Address This shows the IP protocol supported by this virtual server whether it is TCP UDP or TCP UDP Click the Edit icon to edit the port forwarding rule Click the Delete icon to delete an existing port forwarding rule Note that subsequent address mapping rules move up by one when you take this action Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 10 Network Address Translation NAT 10 2 2 The Port Forwarding Edit Screen This screen lets you create or edit a port forwarding rule Click Add new rule in the Port Forwarding screen or the Edit icon next to an existing rule to open the following screen Figure 73 Port Forwarding Add Edit M Enable service Name User Defined WAN Interface EthernWAN 1 start Port End Port Translation Start Port Translation End Port Server IP Address Protacol The following table describes the labels in this
7. 03 35 27 192 168 4970 Jan 13 E 7 Za 09 35 97 notice Receive DHCP DISCOVER fram 00 24 21 7E 2 4970 Jan 13 EEE erik notice Send DHCP NACK to 00 24 21 7E 2 4970 Jan 13 09 35 99 notice Receive DHCP REQUEST from 00 24 21 7E 2 The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 89 System Monitor gt Log gt System Log LABEL DESCRIPTION Level Select a severity level from the drop down list box This filters search results according to the severity level you have selected When you select a severity the Device searches through all logs of that severity or higher Click this to renew the log screen Clear Log Click this to delete all the logs This field is a sequential value and is not associated with a specific entry This field displays the time the log was recorded This field displays the severity level of the logs that the device is to send to this syslog server This field states the reason for the log EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 19 Logs 19 3 The Phone Log Screen Click System Monitor gt Log to open the Phone Log screen Use this screen to view phone logs and alert messages You can select the type of log and level of severity to display Figure 129 System Monitor gt Log gt Phone Log Aug 20 07 37 17 SIP Registration SIP 12875 Register Fail error_cause 43 Aug 20 07 37 40 ChangeMe FXS2 Phone Event OFFHOOK Aug 20 07 37 43 ChangeMe FXS2 Phone Event ONHOOK Aug 20
8. Address the ISP assigns you a different one each time you connect to the Internet Select this if you want to get a dynamic IP address from the ISP IP Address Enter the static IP address provided by your ISP Dial on demand Select this when you don t want the connection up all the time andspecify an idle time out in the Inactivity Timeout field Inactivity Specify an idle time out when you select Dial on Demand Timeout Enter the MTU Maximum Transfer Unit size for this traffic Routing Feature NAT Enable Select this option to activate NAT on this connection IGMP Proxy Internet Group Multicast Protocol IGMP is a network layer protocol used to establish Enable membership in a Multicast group it is not used to carry user data Select this option to have the Device act as an IGMP proxy on this connection This allows the Device to get subscribing information and maintain a joined member list for each multicast group It can reduce multicast traffic significantly Apply as Select this option to have the Device use the WAN interface of this connection as the system Default default gateway Gateway DNS Server Obtain DNS info Select this to have the Device get the DNS server addresses from the ISP automatically Automatically Use the Select this to have the Device use the DNS server addresses you configure manually following Static DNS IP Address Primary DNS Enter the first DNS server address assigned by the ISP
9. Ce produit est con u pour les bandes de fr quences 2 4 GHz et ou 5 GHz conform ment a la l gislation Europ enne En France m tropolitaine suivant les d cisions n 03 908 et 03 909 de l ARCEP la puissance d mission ne devra pas d passer 10 mW 10 dB dans le cadre d une installation WiFi en ext rieur pour les fr quences comprises entre 2454 MHz et 2483 5 MHz This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian CES 003 Cet appareil num rique de la classe B est conforme a la norme NMB 003 du Canada Viewing Certifications 1 Go to http www zyxel com 2 Select your product on the ZyXEL home page to go to that product s page 3 Select the certification you wish to view from this page ZyXEL Limited Warranty ZyXEL warrants to the original end user purchaser that this product is free from any defects in material or workmanship for a specific period the Warranty Period from the date of purchase The Warranty Period varies by region Check with your vendor and or the authorized ZyXEL local distributor for details about the Warranty Period of this product During the warranty period and upon proof of purchase should the product have indications of failure due to faulty workmanship and or materials ZyXEL will at its discretion repair or replace the defective products or components without charge for either parts or labor and to whatever extent it shall deem necessary to restore the product or components to proper operating
10. Certificate Directory Servers Certification authorities maintain directory servers with databases of valid and revoked certificates A directory of certificates that have been revoked before the scheduled expiration is called a CRL Certificate Revocation List The Device can check a peer s certificate against a directory server s list of revoked certificates The framework of servers software procedures and policies that handles keys is called PKI public key infrastructure Advantages of Certificates Certificates offer the following benefits e The Device only has to store the certificates of the certification authorities that you decide to trust no matter how many devices you need to authenticate e Key distribution is simple and very secure since you can freely distribute public keys and you never need to transmit private keys Certificate File Formats The certification authority certificate that you want to import has to be in one of these file formats e Binary X 509 This is an ITU T recommendation that defines the formats for X 509 certificates e PEM Base 64 encoded X 509 This Privacy Enhanced Mail format uses 64 ASCII characters to convert a binary X 509 certificate into a printable form e Binary PKCS 7 This is a standard that defines the general syntax for data including digital signatures that may be encrypted The Device currently allows the importation of a PKS 7 file that contains a single certificate e
11. Key caching allows a wireless client to store the PMK it derived through a successful authentication with an AP The wireless client uses the PMK when it tries to connect to the same AP and does not need to go with the authentication process again Pre authentication enables fast roaming by allowing the wireless client already connecting to an AP to perform IEEE 802 1x authentication with another AP before connecting to it Wireless Client WPA Supplicants A wireless client supplicant is the software that runs on an operating system instructing the wireless client how to use WPA At the time of writing the most widely available supplicant is the WPA patch for Windows XP Funk Software s Odyssey client The Windows XP patch is a free download that adds WPA capability to Windows XP s built in Zero Configuration wireless client However you must run Windows XP to use it 342 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs WPA 2 with RADIUS Application Example To set up WPA 2 you need the IP address of the RADIUS server its port number default is 1812 and the RADIUS shared secret A WPA 2 application example with an external RADIUS server looks as follows A is the RADIUS server DS is the distribution system 1 The AP passes the wireless client s authentication request to the RADIUS server 2 The RADIUS server then checks the user s identification against its database and grants or denies network access accordin
12. PIN WPS 114 example 115 ports 20 PPP over Ethernet see PPPoE PPPoE 82 91 Benefits 91 preamble 110 preamble mode 337 prefix delegation 84 pre shared key 217 Printer Server 131 printer sharing and LAN 131 configuration 50 requirements 131 TCP IP port 50 product registration 372 profile 35 protocol 82 PSK 342 PSTN call setup signaling 237 pulse dialing 237 Push Button Configuration see PBC push button WPS 114 Q QoS 149 150 160 238 Quality of Service see QoS Quick Start Guide 2 23 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide R RADIUS 338 message types 339 messages 339 Shared secret key 339 RADIUS server 111 Real time Transport Protocol see RTP registration product 372 related documentation 2 Request To Send see RTS reset 269 RESET button 22 restart 269 restoring configuration 268 RFC 1631 161 RFC 1889 236 RFC 3164 243 router advertisements 84 RTP 236 RTS Request To Send 336 threshold 335 336 RTS threshold 110 S scan 98 scheduling wireless LAN 108 secure gateway address 202 security wireless LAN 110 security associations see VPN security network 184 service access control 256 Service Set 98 105 Session Initiation Protocol see SIP setup firewalls 178 silence suppression 222 SIP 233 account 233 EMG5324 D10A Users Guide Index call progression 236 client 234 identities 233 INVITE request 237 number 233 proxy server 235 redirect server 23
13. So o ETHERNET e USBI USB2 None of the LEDs are on if the Device is not receiving power Table 1 LED Descriptions LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION C ae On The Device recognizes a USB connection but there is no traffic a The Device is sending receiving data to from the USB device connected to it Off The Device does not detect a USB connection 20 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 1 Introduction Table 1 LED Descriptions continued Leo coror status DESCRIPTION PHONE1 2 Green son A SIP account is A SIP account is registered for the phone port for the phone port ae A Felten estilo S connected to the phone port has its receiver off of the hook or there is an incoming call Orange A SIP account is registered for the phone port and there is a message in the corresponding SIP account Blinking A telephone connected to the phone port has its receiver off of the hook and there is a voice message in the corresponding SIP account The phone port does not have a SIP account registered INTERNET Green On The Device has an IP connection but no traffic Your device has a WAN IP address either static or assigned by a DHCP server PPP negotiation was successfully completed if used Blinking The Device is sending or receiving IP traffic CR The Device does not have an IP connection The Device attempted to make an IP connection but failed Possible causes are no response from a DHCP server
14. Storage Printer Account Status In Active In Active Status Rate Down N A Down N A Up 1000Mbps Down N A Down N A Up 300Mbps Disabled N A 2 min Sat Jan 1 01 02 20 CET 2000 p 47 0 Status N A N A URI ChangeMe ChangeMe ChangeMe ChangeMe As illustrated above the main screen is divided into these parts e A title bar e B main window e C navigation panel 2 2 1 Title Bar The title bar shows the following icon in the upper right corner E bhat Click this icon to log out of the web configurator EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator 2 2 2 Main Window The main window displays information and configuration fields It is discussed in the rest of this document After you click System Info on the Connection Status screen the System Info screen is displayed See Chapter 4 on page 77 for more information about the System Info screen If you click LAN Device on the System Info screen a in Figure 8 on page 25 the Connection Status screen appears See Chapter 4 on page 75 for more information about the Connection Status screen If you click Virtual Device on the System Info screen b in Figure 8 on page 25 a visual graphic appears showing the connection status of the Device s ports The connected ports are in color and disconnected ports are gray Figure 9 Virtual Device Virtual Device Refresh Interval None 2 2 3 Navigation Panel
15. Table 10 Network gt Wireless LAN gt General LABEL DESCRIPTION Wireless Network Setup Select the Enable Wireless LAN check box to activate the wireless LAN Wireless Network Settings Wireless Network The SSID Service Set Dentity identifies the service set with which a wireless device is Name SSID associated Wireless devices associating to the access point AP must have the same SSID Enter a descriptive name up to 32 English keyboard characters for the wireless LAN Hide SSID Select this check box to hide the SSID in the outgoing beacon frame so a station cannot obtain the SSID through scanning using a site survey tool BSSID This shows the MAC address of the wireless interface on the Device when wireless LAN is enabled Mode Select This makes sure that only compliant WLAN devices can associate with the Device Select 802 11b g n to allow EEE802 11b EEE802 11g and EEE802 11n compliant WLAN devices to associate with the Device The transmission rate of your Device might be reduced Select 802 11b g to allow both EEE802 11b and EEE802 11g compliant WLAN devices to associate with the Device The transmission rate of your Device might be reduced Select 802 11g Only to allow only IEEE 802 11g compliant WLAN devices to associate with the Device Channel Set the channel depending on your particular region Selection Select a channel or use Auto to have the Device automatically determine a channel to u
16. This column displays each SIP account in the Device Registration This field displays the current registration status of the SIP account You can change this in the Status screen Registered The SIP account is registered with a SIP server Not Registered The last time the Device tried to register the SIP account with the SIP server the attempt failed The Device automatically tries to register the SIP account when you turn on the Device or when you activate it Inactive The SIP account is not active You can activate it in Vol P gt SIP gt SIP Account Last This field displays the last time you successfully registered the SIP account The field is Registration blank if you never successfully registered this account URI This field displays the account number and service domain of the SIP account You can change these in the VoIP gt SIP screens This field indicates whether or not there are any messages waiting for the SIP account Waiting Last Incoming This field displays the last number that called the SIP account The field is blank if no Number number has ever dialed the SIP account Last Outgoing This field displays the last number the SIP account called The field is blank if the SIP Number account has never dialed a number Call Status Account This column displays each SIP account in the Device This field displays how long the current call has lasted EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 20 Traffic Status T
17. s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 1 Click K Menu gt Computer gt Administrator Settings YaST Figure 199 openSUSE 10 3 K Menu gt Computer Menu eart A Applications Administrator Settings Te s L Install Software a System Information System Folders A Home Folder yo a My Documents YW r meizyxel Do ment CP Network Folders ma Media GP 2 4G Media 2 0 GB available S m ed Favorites Applications Computer History Leave User zyxel on linux h2o0z openSUSE 2 When the Run as Root KDE su dialog opens enter the admin password and click OK Figure 200 openSUSE 10 3 K Menu gt Computer Menu Run asroot KDEsu Please enter the Administrator root password to continue Command sbinfyast2 Password EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 31 T Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 3 When the YaST Control Center window opens select Network Devices and then click the Network Card icon Figure 201 openSUSE 10 3 YaST Control Center YaST Control Center linux h207 Rei File Edit Help E System Search When the Network Settings window opens click the Overview tab select the appropriate connection Name from the list and then click the Configure button Figure 202 openSUSE 10 3 Network Settings YaStT2 linux h20z Network Card Network Settings Overview Obtain an overview of installed network card
18. s Guide 127 Chapter 7 Home Networking The following figure is an overview of the Device s file server feature Computers A and B can access files on a USB device C which is connected to the Device Figure 41 File Sharing Overview The Device will not be able to join the workgroup if your local area network has restrictions set up that do not allow devices to join a workgroup In this case contact your network administrator 7 5 1 Before You Begin Make sure the Device is connected to your network and turned on 1 Connect the USB device to one of the Device s USB ports Make sure the Device is connected to your network 2 The Device detects the USB device and makes its contents available for browsing If you are connecting a USB hard drive that comes with an external power supply make Sure it is connected to an appropriate power source that Is on Note If your USB device cannot be detected by the Device see the troubleshooting for Suggestions Use this screen to set up file sharing using the Device To access this screen click Network Setting gt Home Networking gt File Sharing Figure 42 Network Setting gt Home Networking gt File Sharing Server Configuration File Sharing Services SMB Enable Disable Share Directory List Add new share __ ____ USB_Storage GENERIC_USB USB Storage 4 sein cn 128 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 7 Home Networking Each
19. s edit icon in the Address Mapping screen to display the screen shown next Figure 77 Address Mapping Add Edit Service Name One to One WAN Interface EtherwANt Local Start IF Local End IP Global Start IP Global End IF Mapping Set The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 45 Address Mapping Add Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Type Choose the IP port mapping type from one of the following One to One This mode maps one local IP address to one global IP address Note that port numbers do not change for the One to one NAT mapping type Many to One This mode maps multiple local IP addresses to one global IP address This is equivalent to SUA i e PAT port address translation the Device s Single User Account feature that previous routers supported only Many to Many This mode maps multiple local IP addresses to shared global IP addresses WAN Interface Select the WAN interface Local Start IP Enter the starting Inside Local IP Address ILA Local End IP Enter the ending Inside Local IP Address ILA If the rule is for all local IP addresses then this field displays 0 0 0 0 as the Local Start IP address and 255 255 255 255 as the Local End IP address This field is blank for One to One mapping types EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 1 67 Chapter 10 Network Address Translation NAT Table 45 Address Mapping Add Edit continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Global Start IP Enter the starting Ins
20. Address provider You can use up to 95 printable ASCII characters It does not matter whether the SIP server is a proxy redirect or register server SIP Server Port Enter the SIP server s listening port number if your VoIP service provider gave you one Otherwise keep the default value REGISTER Enter the IP address or domain name of the SIP register server if your VolP service provider Server Address gave you one Otherwise enter the same address you entered in the SIP Server Address field You can use up to 95 printable ASCII characters REGISTER Enter the SIP register server s listening port number if your VoIP service provider gave you Server Port one Otherwise enter the same port number you entered in the SIP Server Port field SIP Service Enter the SIP service domain name In the full SIP URI this is the part after the symbol Domain You can use up to 127 printable ASCII Extended set characters Bound Interface Name Bound If you select AnyWAN the Device automatically activates the VolP service when any LAN or Interface Name WAN connection is up RFC Support PRACK PRACK RFC 3262 defines a mechanism to provide reliable transmission of SIP provisional response messages which convey information on the processing progress of the request This uses the option tag 100rel and the Provisional Response ACKnowledgement PRACK method Select Supported or Required to have the Device include a SIP Requ
21. Bon VBAMTB1p5WEVMOQ0EwQgEIMA0GCSgGSibsDQEBAGQUAAIBDWAwggEKAoIBAQDS OoNQHPVE DaVeXWGN4prKCY3eHpT z5X18rlCBOxQFGHBOTTkptkGlevkrPass Qui gBMf2 Nsrluzoyl OiQQ60RKBGVFesSEGsRruLBUUKAHBTXSxtVWvyhysexbeU SiTSpsBesbxXNOZkWYiRELTBEXoistikKTASpnZzRTvxT FPOOMAGIWegP 11Yay4yx baBPZSdGresVOKOVANR1195SK4Ni24d0OLn3BuHigsO3pSH3029z0gmcR3UBU3g haDeWeT 2P 1sjYiyP 1jm 4r32QqVHg9as T ErqcCUjL1ksCatnw4Ag63xXg4 C1skCkN O9p lY sCBgkDgjvJIBkKPlAgMBAAGjggFhMIIBXTATBakrBgEEAYI3FAIEBH4EAEMA MQTALBONVHOQSEBAMCALUYwDwyYDVROTAGH BAUWAWEB ZAdBoNVHO4EF gQU2vbv HJ OMCBN3Dw3OxUXkatg2 Qwofy GA1UdHwSB7jCB6zCBEKCB5aCB4oaBrwxkYXAGLyav The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 64 Trusted CA View LABEL DESCRIPTION Certificate This field displays the identifying name of this certificate If you want to change the name Name type up to 31 characters to identify this key certificate You may use any character not including spaces Certificate This read only text box displays the certificate or certification request in Privacy Enhanced Detail Mail PEM format PEM uses 64 ASCII characters to convert the binary certificate into a printable form You can copy and paste the certificate into an e mail to send to friends or colleagues or you can copy and paste the certificate into a text editor and save the file on a management computer for later distribution via floppy disk for example Click this to return to the previous screen 16 6 VPN Cert
22. I g 0 i I B O E a I E 192 168 1 33 j t 5 Conflicting Router IP Addresses Example Since a router connects different networks it must have interfaces using different network numbers For example if a router is set between a LAN and the Internet WAN the router s LAN and WAN addresses must be on different subnets In the following example the LAN and WAN are on the same subnet The LAN computers cannot access the Internet because the router cannot route between networks Figure 160 Conflicting Computer IP Addresses Example 2 BREE ES LAN WAN E it 192 168 1 88 V N Internet a EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 291 Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting Conflicting Computer and Router IP Addresses Example More than one device can not use the same IP address In the following example the computer and the router s LAN port both use 192 168 1 1 as the IP address The computer cannot access the Internet This problem can be solved by assigning a different IP address to the computer or the router s LAN port Figure 161 Conflicting Computer and Router IP Addresses Example BaSE ERE BEE r p 192 168 1 1 WAN N i i m i i a R i i a o i 192 168 1 1 Internet i F Rem e eee eee 292 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address Note Your specific Device may not support all of the operating systems described in this appe
23. The device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 369 Appendix G Legal Information 370 e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operations This device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This device generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this device does cause harmful interference to radio television reception which can be determined by turning the device off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help FCC Caution Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by t
24. The screen appears as shown Figure 70 Network Setting gt QoS gt Monitor Monitor Refresh Interval No Refresh Status Interface Monitor eth1 3900 2 bro 466624 Queue Monitor WAN _Default_Queue 0 LAN Default_Queue 267120 Fast 0 Active user 0 Passive user 0 Slow 0 B Note The rate field is empty may be caused by following cases 1 The interface is notup 2 The rate related information maybe not avaiable EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 9 Quality of Service QoS The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 38 Network Setting gt QoS gt Monitor LABEL DESCRIPTION Refresh Select how often you want the Device to update this screen Select No Refresh to stop Interval refreshing statistics This is the index number of the entry Name This shows the name of the WAN interface on the Device Pass Rate bps This shows how much traffic bps forwarded to this interface are transmitted successfully Queue Monitor This is the index number of the entry Name This shows the name of the queue Pass Rate bps This shows how much traffic bps assigned to this queue are transmitted successfully Drop Rate bps This shows how much traffic bps assigned to this queue are dropped 9 6 QoS Technical Reference This section provides some technical background information about the topics covered in this chapter 9 6 1 IEEE 802 1Q Tag The IEEE 802 1Q stan
25. This applies to wired and wireless connections 14 1 1 What You Need to Know Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC Media Access Control address The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters for example 00 A0 C5 00 00 02 You need to know the MAC address of the devices to configure this screen 14 2 The MAC Filter Screen Use the MAC Filter screen to allow wireless and LAN clients access to the Device To change your Device s MAC filter settings click Security gt MAC Filter The screen appears as shown Figure 92 Security gt MAC Filter MAC Address Filter Enable Disable 00 24 21 7E 20 96 29 E 30 O 31 E 32 E E Note Only devices listed here are granted access to the network EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 185 Chapter 14 MAC Filter The following table describes the labels in this menu Table 58 Security gt MAC Filter LABEL DESCRIPTION MAC Address Select Enable to activate MAC address filtering Filter This is the index number of the MAC address Allow Select Allow to permit access to the Device MAC addresses not listed will be denied access to the Device If you clear this the MAC Address field for this set clears that is six hexadecimal character pairs for example 12 34 56 78 9a bc Apply Click Apply to save your changes Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings MAC Address Enter the MAC addresses
26. different APNs may provide different services such as Internet access or MMS Multi Media Messaging Service and charge method You can enter up to 32 ASCII printable characters Spaces are allowed Connection Select Nailed UP if you do not want the connection to time out Select On Demand if you do not want the connection up all the time and specify an idle time out in the Max Idle Timeout field Max Idle This value specifies the time in minutes that elapses before the Device automatically Timeout disconnects from the ISP Obtain an IP Select this option If your ISP did not assign you a fixed IP address Address Automatically Use the Select this option If the ISP assigned a fixed IP address following static IP address IP Address Enter your WAN IP address in this field if you selected Use the following static IP address Obtain DNS info Select this to have the Device get the DNS server addresses from the ISP automatically dynamically Use the Select this to have the Device use the DNS server addresses you configure manually following static DNS IP address Primary DNS Enter the first DNS server address assigned by the ISP server Secondary DNS Enter the second DNS server address assigned by the ISP server Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Device Click Cancel to return to the previous configuration EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 5 Broadband 5 4 Technical Reference The fol
27. example 117 limitations 118 PIN 114 example 115 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 379 Index 380 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Index EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 381 Index 382 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide
28. no PPPoE response PPPoE authentication failed WAN Green ie light applies when the Device is in Ethernet WAN mode The tee has an Ethernet connection with a device on the WAN Blinking The Device is sending or receiving data to from the Ethernet WAN Cae The Device does not have an Ethernet connection with the WAN ETHERNET1 4 Green ae The Device has a successful 1000 Mbps Ethernet connection with Giga a device on the Local Area Network LAN Ecce Blinking The Device is sending or receiving data to from the LAN at 1000 Mbps Orange The Device has a successful 10 100 Mbps Ethernet connection Fast with a device on the Local Area Network LAN Ernerngt Blinking The Device is sending or receiving data to from the LAN at 10 100 Mbps The Device does not have an Ethernet connection with the LAN On The Device is receiving power and ready for use ee The Device is self testing The Device detected an error while self testing or there is a device malfunction Off The Device is not The Device is not receiving power n The Device is not receiving power n WLAN WPS aa ae wireless network is activated and is operating in IEEE 802 11 tae g or n mode POWER u The Device is communicating with other wireless clients Orange On The WPS is configured CD The Device is setting up a WPS connection The wireless network is not activated Refer to the Quick Start Guide for information
29. the outside world These computers will have access to Internet services such as e mail FTP and the World Wide Web However inbound access is not allowed by default unless the remote host is authorized to use a specific service DoS Denials of Service DoS attacks are aimed at devices and networks with a connection to the Internet Their goal is not to steal information but to disable a device or network so users no longer have access to network resources The ZyXEL Device is pre configured to automatically detect and thwart all Known DoS attacks ICMP Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP is a message control and error reporting protocol between a host server and a gateway to the Internet ICMP uses Internet Protocol IP datagrams but the messages are processed by the TCP IP software and directly apparent to the application user Finding Out More See Section 13 6 on page 183 for advanced technical information on firewall 13 2 The General Screen Use this screen to set the security level of the firewall on the Device Firewall rules are grouped based on the direction of travel of packets to which they apply 1 18 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 13 Firewall Click Security gt Firewall to display the General screen Figure 86 Security gt Firewall gt General Firewall Enable Disable Medium Recommended WO LAN to WAN WAN to LAN B Note 1 LAN to WAN Allow access to all Interne
30. the wireless devices must sometimes get permission to send information to the Device The lower the value the more often the devices must get permission If this value is greater than the fragmentation threshold value see below then wireless devices never have to get permission to send information to the Device Preamble A preamble affects the timing in your wireless network There are two preamble modes long and short If a device uses a different preamble mode than the Device does it cannot communicate with the Device Authentication The process of verifying whether a wireless device is allowed to use the wireless network Fragmentation A small fragmentation threshold is recommended for busy networks while a larger Threshold threshold provides faster performance if the network is not very busy 6 8 2 Wireless Security Overview By their nature radio communications are simple to intercept For wireless data networks this means that anyone within range of a wireless network without security can not only read the data passing over the airwaves but also join the network Once an unauthorized person has access to the network he or she can steal information or introduce malware malicious software intended to compromise the network For these reasons a variety of security systems have been developed to ensure that only authorized people can use a wireless data network or understand the data carried on it These security standar
31. 0 and you must enable the Network Address Translation NAT feature of the Device The Internet Assigned Number Authority IANA reserved this block of addresses specifically for private use please do not use any other number unless you are told otherwise Let s say you select 192 168 1 0 as the network number which covers 254 individual addresses from 192 168 1 1 to 192 168 1 254 zero and 255 are reserved In other words the first three numbers specify the network number while the last number identifies an individual computer on that network Once you have decided on the network number pick an IP address that is easy to remember for instance 192 168 1 1 for your Device but make sure that no other device on your network is using that IP address The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address Your Device will compute the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address that you entered You don t need to change the subnet mask computed by the Device unless you are instructed to do otherwise Private IP Addresses Every machine on the Internet must have a unique address If your networks are isolated from the Internet for example only between your two branch offices you can assign any IP addresses to the hosts without problems However the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority IANA has reserved the following three blocks of IP addresses specifically for private networks e 10 0 0 0 10 255 255 255 e 172 16 0
32. 123 VoIP gt Call Rule Speed Dial eal 1 Phone Book 01 02 Each field is described in the following table Table 85 VolP gt Call Rule Speed Dial Use this section to create or edit speed dial entries Select the speed dial number you want to use for this phone number Number Enter the SIP number you want the Device to call when you dial the speed dial number Description Enter a short description to identify the party you call when you dial the speed dial number You can use up to 127 printable ASCII characters Add Click this to use the information in the Speed Dial section to update the Speed Dial Phone Book section Phone Book Use this section to look at all the speed dial entries and to erase them This field displays the speed dial number you should dial to use this entry Number This field displays the SIP number the Device calls when you dial the speed dial number Description This field displays a short description of the party you call when you dial the speed dial number EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 18 VoIP Table 85 VolP gt Call Rule continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Modify Use this field to edit or erase the speed dial entry Click the Edit icon to copy the information for this speed dial entry into the Speed Dial section where you can change it Click Add when you finish editing to change the configurations Click the Delete icon to erase this speed dial entry Click this t
33. 2 1 1 Accessing the Web Configurator 1 Make sure your Device hardware is properly connected refer to the Quick Start Guide 2 Launch your web browser 3 Type 192 168 1 1 as the URL 4 A password screen displays Type admin as the default Username and 1234 as the default password to access the device s Web Configurator Click Login If you have changed the password enter your password and click Login Figure 5 Password Screen Welcome Welcome to configuration interface Please enter username and password to login Username Password M Login EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 23 Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator Note For security reasons the Device automatically logs you out if you do not use the web configurator for five minutes default If this happens log in again 5 The following screen displays if you have not yet changed your password It is strongly recommended you change the default password Enter a new password retype it to confirm and click Apply alternatively click Skip to proceed to the main menu if you do not want to change the password now Figure 6 Change Password Screen Change Password Itis highly recommended to setup a new password instead of using the default one for security concern New Password P Verify New Password pE 6 The Connection Status screen appears Figure 7 Connection Status 74 5 Language English tC Logout LAN Device Viewing mode R
34. 25 to one FTP Telnet and SMTP server A in the example port 80 to another B in the example and assign a default server IP address of 10 0 0 35 to a third C in the example You assign the LAN IP addresses and the ISP assigns the WAN IP address The NAT network appears as a single host on the Internet Figure 71 Multiple Servers Behind NAT Example A 10 0 0 33 LAN WAN rey B 10 0 0 34 IP Address assigned by ISP 162 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 10 Network Address Translation NAT 10 2 1 The Port Forwarding Screen Click Network Setting gt NAT to open the Port Forwarding screen See Appendix E on page 353 for port numbers commonly used for particular services Figure 72 Network Setting gt NAT gt Port Forwarding Add new rule User EtherWAN41 2 192 168 1 6 TCP Defined B Note The TCP port 30005 is reserved for TRO69 connection request port The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 40 Network Setting gt NAT gt Port Forwarding LABEL DESCRIPTION Add new rule Click this to add a new port forwarding rule This is the index number of the entry Status This field indicates whether the rule is active or not A yellow bulb signifies that this rule is active A gray bulb signifies that this rule is not active Service Name This is the service s name This shows User Defined if you manually added a service You can change this by clicking the edit icon
35. 55 Internet Connection Properties Advanced Settings Advanced Settings DECE Select ihe services unining an pour ralek hat Intent ugeie cai apa Jeice m msme BER IES pia BBB 1 EEDA TEP GA mernege 192 167 65 9859 27717 UDP mange 192 1681 91 7261 Shoe OP fe mmeg 192 768 1220 P10 S111 TCR service Settings Description of service Test Name or F address for example 192 168 0 12 of the computer hosting this Service OF pour network 192 165 1 1 External Port number for this service 143 f TCP C UDP Internal Port number for this service a Cancel 5 When the UPnP enabled device is disconnected from your computer all port mappings will be deleted automatically EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 141 Chapter 7 Home Networking 6 Select Show icon in notification area when connected option and click OK An icon displays in the system tray Figure 57 System Tray Icon ij Internet Connection is now connected Click here For more information E a pa BE 643PM 7 Double click on the icon to display your current Internet connection status Figure 58 Internet Connection Status Y internet Connection Status General lntemnet Gateway Status Connected Duration 00 00 56 Speed 100 0 Mbps Activity Internet Intermet Gateway My Computer g k Packets Sent E Receed A 43 Web Configurator Easy Access With UPnP you can access the web based configurator on the Device without
36. Chapter 9 Quality of Service QoS QoS versus Cos QoS is used to prioritize source to destination traffic flows All packets in the same flow are given the same priority CoS class of service is a way of managing traffic in a network by grouping similar types of traffic together and treating each type as a class You can use CoS to give different priorities to different packet types CoS technologies include IEEE 802 1p layer 2 tagging and DiffServ Differentiated Services or DS IEEE 802 1p tagging makes use of three bits in the packet header while DiffServ is a new protocol and defines a new DS field which replaces the eight bit ToS Type of Service field in the IP header Tagging and Marking In a QoS class you can configure whether to add or change the DSCP DiffServ Code Point value IEEE 802 1p priority level and VLAN ID number in a matched packet When the packet passes through a compatible network the networking device such as a backbone switch can provide specific treatment or service based on the tag or marker 9 2 The QoS General Screen Use this screen to enable or disable QoS set the bandwidth and select to have the Device automatically assign priority to upstream traffic according to the IEEE 802 1p priority level IP precedence or packet length Click Network Setting gt QoS to open the General screen Figure 65 Network Setting gt QoS gt General M Active QoS WAN Managed Upstream Bandwidth kbps Traf
37. Click Unregister to delete the SIP account s registration in the SIP server This does not cancel your SIP account but it deletes the mapping between your SIP identity and your IP address or domain name e The second field displays Registered If the SIP account is not registered with the SIP server e Click Register to have the Device attempt to register the SIP account with the SIP server e The second field displays the reason the account is not registered Inactive The SIP account is not active You can activate it in VoIP gt SIP gt SIP Settings Register Fail The last time the Device tried to register the SIP account with the SIP server the attempt failed The Device automatically tries to register the SIP account when you turn on the Device or when you activate it Account This shows Active when the SIP account has been registered and ready for use or In Status Active when the SIP account is not yet registered URI This field displays the account number and service domain of the SIP account You can change these in VoIP gt SIP gt SIP Settings EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 19 Chapter 4 Connection Status and System Info 80 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Broadband 5 1 Overview This chapter discusses the Device s Broadband screens Use these screens to configure your Device for Internet access A WAN Wide Area Network connection is an outside connection to another network or the Internet It
38. D10A User s Guide 1 13 Chapter 11 DNS Route 174 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Interface Group 12 1 Overview By default all LAN and WAN interfaces on the Device are in the same group and can communicate with each other Create interface groups to have the Device assign the IP addresses in different domains to different groups Each group acts as an independent network on the Device This lets devices connected to an interface group s LAN interfaces communicate through the interface group s WAN or LAN interfaces but not other WAN or LAN interfaces 12 2 The Interface Group Screen You can manually add a LAN interface to a new group Alternatively you can have the Device automatically add the incoming traffic and the LAN interface on which traffic is received to an interface group when its DHCP Vendor ID option information matches one listed for the interface group Use the LAN screen to configure the private IP addresses the DHCP Server on the Device assigns to the clients in the default and or user defined groups If you set the Device to assign IP addresses based on the client s DHCP Vendor ID option information you must enable DHCP server and configure LAN TCP IP settings for both the default and user defined groups See Chapter 7 on page 121 for more information Click Network Setting gt Interface Group to open the following screen Figure 83 Network Setting gt Interface Group Add New Interface Group Ethem A
39. EAP MD5 cannot be used with Dynamic WEP Key Exchange For added security certificate based authentications EAP TLS EAP TTLS and PEAP use dynamic keys for data encryption They are often deployed in corporate environments but for public deployment a simple user name and password pair is more practical The following table is a comparison of the features of authentication types Table 119 Comparison of EAP Authentication Types O eews_ leens ems reap iee WPA and WPA2 Wi Fi Protected Access WPA is a subset of the IEEE 802 11i standard WPA2 IEEE 802 11i is a wireless security standard that defines stronger encryption authentication and key management than WPA Key differences between WPA or WPA2 and WEP are improved data encryption and user authentication If both an AP and the wireless clients support WPA2 and you have an external RADIUS server use WPA2 for stronger data encryption If you don t have an external RADIUS server you should use WPA2 PSK WPA2 Pre Shared Key that only requires a single identical password entered into each access point wireless gateway and wireless client As long as the passwords match a wireless client will be granted access to a WLAN If the AP or the wireless clients do not support WPA2 just use WPA or WPA PSK depending on whether you have an external RADIUS server or not Select WEP only when the AP and or wireless clients do not support WPA or WPA2 WEP is less secure than WPA or WPA
40. Home Networking Supported OSs Your operating system must support TCP IP ports for printing and be compatible with the RAW port 9100 protocol The following OSs support Device s printer sharing feature e Microsoft Windows 95 Windows 98 SE Second Edition Windows Me Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 Windows XP or Macintosh OS X 7 2 The LAN Setup Screen Click Network Setting gt Home Networking to open the LAN Setup screen Use this screen to set the Local Area Network IP address and subnet mask of your Device and configure the DNS server information that the Device sends to the DHCP client devices on the LAN Figure 37 Network Setting gt Home Networking gt LAN Setup LAN Default LAN IP Setup IP Address f 92 168 1 1 Subnet Mask DHCP Server State DHCP Enable Disable IP Addressing Values IP Pool Starting Address fi g2 168 1 33 Pool Size 32 DNS Values DNS Server 1 FromISP DNS Server 2 FromiSP DNS Server 3 None sf The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 22 Network Setting gt Home Networking gt LAN Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION LAN IP Setup IP Address Enter the LAN IP address you want to assign to your Device in dotted decimal notation for example 192 168 1 1 factory default IP Subnet Mask Type the subnet mask of your network in dotted decimal notation for example 255 255 255 0 factory default Your Device automatically computes the su
41. IEEE 802 1p defines up to 8 separate traffic types by inserting a tag into a MAC layer frame Priority that contains bits to define class of service Type the IEEE 802 1 priority level from O to 7 to add to traffic through this connection The greater the number the higher the priority level Enter 802 1Q Type the VLAN ID number from 1 to 4094 for traffic through this connection VLAN ID Apply Click Apply to save your changes Click Back to return to the previous screen 5 3 The 3G Backup Screen Use this screen to configure your 3G settings Click Broadband gt 3G Backup Note The actual data rate you obtain varies depending the 3G card you use the signal strength to the service provider s base station and so on If the signal strength of a 3G network is too low the 3G card may switch to an available 2 5G or 2 75G network Refer to Section 5 4 on page 91 for a comparison between 2G 2 5G 2 75G and 3G wireless technologies Figure 18 Network Setting gt Broadband gt 3G Backup 3G Backup I Enable 3G Backup Card Description NVA Username ss Optional Password o Optional PIN O Optional Only for unlock PIN next time PIN remaining authentication times M A Dial String APN Connection Nailed UP Obtion an IP Address Automatically Use the following static IP address Obtain DNS info dynamically Use the following static DNS IP address Primary DNS Server Secondary DNS Server
42. Mac OS X 10 4 System Preferences 4 aon System Preferences Show All al Personal O amp M g Q Q Appearance Dashboard amp Desktop amp Dock Intemational Security Spotlight Expos Screen Saver Hardware Q P s g amp Bluetooth CDs amp DVDs Displays Energy Keyboard amp Print amp Fax Sound Saver Mouse Internet amp Ne a Q G Mac Quir kTime Sharing System u G Be u Accounts Date amp Time Software Speech Startup Disk Universal Update ACCESS 3 When the Network preferences pane opens select Built in Ethernet from the network connection type list and then click Configure Figure 183 Mac OS X 10 4 Network Preferences 66o Network Show All Q Location Automatic Show l Network Status H Built in Erhernet is currently active and has the IP address 10 0 1 2 You are connected to the internet via Built in Ethernet Built in Ethernet Internet Sharing 5 on and is using AirPort to share the connection AirPort Configure Q sconnect E Click the lock to prevent further changes Assist me Apply Now EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 4 For dynamically assigned settings select Using DHCP from the Configure I Pv4 list in the TCP IP tab Figure 184 Mac OS X 10 4 Network Preferences gt TCP IP Tab e an Network 1 a Show All Q Location
43. Media Server feature is enabled by default To use your Device as a media server click Network Setting gt Home Networking gt Media Server M Enable Media Server Check Enable Media Server and click Apply This enables DLNA compliant media clients to play the video music and image files in your USB storage device 3 6 2 Using Windows Media Player This section shows you how to play the media files on the USB storage device connected to your Device using Windows Media Player USB Storage Device Computer with Windows Media Player ZyXEL Device EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 45 Chapter 3 Tutorials Windows Vista 1 Open Windows Media Player and click Library gt Media Sharing as follows F Windows Media Player inn ae a b Now Playing ibr i tl Burn Ja Music Library Songs Create Playlist Create Auto Playlist El Playlists Album E Create Playlist Aaron Goldberg Music El J Library SSS Pictures a on ane Worlds GA Artist Video 2 Album Paty Aaron Goldberg Recorded TV J Songs Ao Jazz Genre 2006 Year Ly Rating Add Favorites to List When Dragging Quiet Songs More Options Aisha Duo Help with Using the Library 2 Check Find media that others are sharing in the following screen and click OK Media Sharing a Find and share music pictures and video on your network Leam about sharing Online Networking How does sharing change firewall set
44. Static DHCP Add continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes Click Back to exit this screen without saving 7 4 The UPnP Screen Universal Plug and Play UPnP is a distributed open networking standard that uses TCP IP for simple peer to peer network connectivity between devices A UPnP device can dynamically join a network obtain an IP address convey its capabilities and learn about other devices on the network In turn a device can leave a network smoothly and automatically when it is no longer in use See page 136 for more information on UPnP Use the following screen to configure the UPnP settings on your Device Click Network Setting gt Home Networking gt Static DHCP gt UPnP to display the screen shown next Figure 40 Network Setting gt Home Networking gt UPnP UPnP State UPnP Enable Disable E The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 25 Network Settings gt Home Networking gt UPnP LABEL DESCRIPTION Select Enable to activate UPnP Be aware that anyone could use a UPnP application to open the web configurator s login screen without entering the Device s IP address although you must still enter the password to access the web configurator Apply Click Apply to save your changes 7 5 The File Sharing Screen You can share files on a USB memory stick or hard drive connected to your Device with users on your network EMG5324 D10A User
45. System a third Optimized originally 1x Evolution Data generation 3G wireless standard Only also referred to as EV DO EVDO or 3 5G EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Wireless 6 1 Overview This chapter describes the Device s Network Setting gt Wireless screens Use these screens to set up your Device s wireless connection 6 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the General screen to enable the Wireless LAN enter the SSID and select the wireless security mode Section 6 2 on page 97 Use the More AP screen to set up multiple wireless networks on your Device Section 6 3 on page 103 Use the WPS screen to enable or disable WPS view or generate a security PIN Personal Identification Number Section 6 4 on page 105 Use the WMM screen to enable Wi Fi MultiMedia WMM to ensure quality of service in wireless networks for multimedia applications Section 6 5 on page 107 Use the Scheduling screen to schedule a time period for the wireless LAN to operate each day Section 6 6 on page 108 Use the Channel Status screen to scan wireless LAN channel noises and view the results Section 6 7 on page 109 You don t necessarily need to use all these screens to set up your wireless connection For example you may just want to set up a network name a wireless radio channel and some security in the General screen 6 1 2 Wireless Network Overview Wireless networks consist of wireless clients access points a
46. TCP IP configuration at start up from a server You can configure the Device as a DHCP server or disable it When configured as a server the Device provides the TCP IP configuration for the clients If you turn DHCP service off you must have another DHCP server on your LAN or else the computer must be manually configured IP Pool Setup The Device is pre configured with a pool of IP addresses for the DHCP clients DHCP Pool See the product specifications in the appendices Do not assign static IP addresses from the DHCP pool to your LAN computers 132 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 7 Home Networking LAN TCP IP The Device has built in DHCP server capability that assigns IP addresses and DNS servers to systems that support DHCP client capability IP Address and Subnet Mask Similar to the way houses on a street share a common street name so too do computers on a LAN share one common network number Where you obtain your network number depends on your particular situation If the ISP or your network administrator assigns you a block of registered IP addresses follow their instructions in selecting the IP addresses and the subnet mask If the ISP did not explicitly give you an IP network number then most likely you have a single user account and the ISP will assign you a dynamic IP address when the connection is established If this is the case it is recommended that you select a network number from 192 168 0 0 to 192 168 255
47. VolP Call 1 Make sure you connect a telephone to the first phone port on the Device 2 Make sure the Device is on and connected to the Internet 3 Pick up the phone receiver 4 Dialthe VolP phone number you want to call 3 5 Using the File Sharing Feature In this section you can e Set up file sharing of your USB device from the Device a EMG5324 D10A Users Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials e Access the shared files of your USB device from a computer 3 5 1 Set Up File Sharing To set up file sharing you need to connect your USB device enable file sharing and set up your Share s 3 5 1 1 Activate File Sharing 1 Connect your USB device to one of the USB ports at the back panel of the Device 2 Click Network Setting gt Home Networking gt File Sharing Select Enable and click Apply to activate the file sharing function The Device automatically adds your USB device to the Share Directory List Server Configuration File Sharing Services SMB Enable Disable Share Directory List USB_Storage GENERIC_USB_Mass_Storage_100_1 3 5 1 2 Set up File Sharing on Your Device You also need to set up file sharing on your Device in order to share files 1 Click Add new share in the File Sharing screen to configure a new share Select your USB device from the Volume drop down list box 2 Click Browse to browse through all the files on your USB device Select the folder that you want to add as a share In this example sele
48. Weight 15 gt Rate Limit 000 kbps sony son EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 69 Chapter 3 Tutorials 3 Go to Network Setting gt QoS gt Class Setup Click Add new Classifier to create a new class Check Active and follow the settings as shown in the screen below Then click Apply Class Configuration Active Class Name Classification Order Unchange xf Unchane A aaa oe Emaii x Forward To Interface DSCP Mark 802 1P Mark To Queue Criteria Configuration Use the configurations below to specify the characteristics of a data flow need to be managed by this QoS rule Basic J From Interface Lan v M Ether Type Source V MAC Address V IP Address IP 0x0800 AA FFAA FFAA FF 192 168 1 23 MAC Mask IP Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Exclude Exclude 1 65535 M PortRange Exclude Destination Exclude 7 MAC Address MAC Mask Poo DO o y o IPSubnetMask 1 65535 IP Address Exclude M PortRange Exclude Others M 802 1P 0 BE v Exclude Userde nea E Ps 646 1504 I IP Protocol Exclude IP Packet Length Exclude l DSCP Exclude M TCP ACK Exclude l DHCP Exclude VendorClassID DHCP Option 60 String FTF Class ID Exclude son ox Class Name Give a class name to this traffic such as Email in this example To Queue Link this to a queue created in the QoS gt Queue Setup screen which is the Em
49. access the computers on the remote network EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 17 VPN 17 6 8 ID Type and Content With aggressive negotiation mode seeSection 17 6 6 on page 215 the Device identifies incoming SAs by ID type and content since this identifying information is not encrypted This enables the Device to distinguish between multiple rules for SAs that connect from remote IPSec routers that have dynamic WAN IP addresses Telecommuters can use separate passwords to simultaneously connect to the Device from IPSec routers with dynamic IP addresses seeSection 17 6 11 on page 217 for a telecommuter configuration example Regardless of the ID type and content configuration the Device does not allow you to save multiple active rules with overlapping local and remote IP addresses With main mode seeSection 17 6 6 on page 215 the ID type and content are encrypted to provide identity protection In this case the Device can only distinguish between up to 12 different incoming SAs that connect from remote IPSec routers that have dynamic WAN IP addresses The Device can distinguish up to 12 incoming SAs because you can select between three encryption algorithms DES 3DES and AES two authentication algorithms MD5 and SHA1 and two key groups DH1 and DH2 when you configure a VPN rule SseeSection 17 4 on page 208 The ID type and content act as an extra level of identification for incoming SAs The type of ID can be a domain name
50. address Name ceneri check whether to get a hostname via DHCP The hostname of your o host which can be _ Update DNS data via DHCP seen by issuing the hostname command will be set automatically by the DHCP client You may want to disable this option if you connect to different networks 9 Click Finish to save your settings and close the window Verifying Settings Click the KNetwork Manager icon on the Task bar to check your TCP IP properties From the Options sub menu select Show Connection Information Figure 205 openSUSE 10 3 KNetwork Manager il Disable Wireless amp KNetworkManager A Wired Devices J Switch to Offline Mode Wired Network T Show Connection Information E Dial Up Connections Configure 2 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address When the Connection Status KNetwork Manager window opens click the Statistics tab to see if your connection is working properly Figure 206 openSUSE Connection Status KNetwork Manager Connection Status KNetworkManager Bytes MBytes Packets Errors Dropped KBytes s th Addresse Received 2317441 EAF 3621 0 0 0 0 Transmitted 841875 0 8 3140 0 0 0 0 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 32 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 322 EMG5324 D10A Users Guide C Pop up Windows JavaScript and Java Permissions In order to use the w
51. address for the Device 1 The default IP address is 192 168 1 1 2 Ifyou changed the IP address and have forgotten it you might get the IP address of the Device by looking up the IP address of the default gateway for your computer To do this in most Windows computers click Start gt Run enter cmd and then enter ipconfig The IP address of the Default Gateway might be the IP address of the Device it depends on the network so enter this IP address in your Internet browser 3 If this does not work you have to reset the device to its factory defaults See Section 1 7 on page 22 forgot the password 1 The default admin password is 1234 and the default user password is 1234 2 If you can t remember the password you have to reset the device to its factory defaults See Section 1 7 on page 22 cannot see or access the Login screen in the web configurator 1 Make sure you are using the correct IP address e The default IP address is 192 168 1 1 e If you changed the IP address Section on page 133 use the new IP address e If you changed the IP address and have forgotten it see the troubleshooting suggestions for forgot the IP address for the Device 2 Check the hardware connections and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected See the Quick Start Guide 3 Make sure your Internet browser does not block pop up windows and has JavaScript and Java enabled See Appendix C on page 323 2 4 EMG5324 D10A
52. an IP address or an e mail address The content is the IP address domain name or e mail address Table 73 Local ID Type and Content Fields LOCAL ID TYPE TYPE CONTENT a a eee IP address of your computer or leave the field blank to have the Device automatically use its own IP address Type a domain name up to 31 characters by which to identify this Device E mail Type an e mail address up to 31 characters by which to identify this Device The domain name or e mail address that you use in the Content field is used for identification purposes only and does not need to be a real domain name or e mail address Table 74 Peer ID Type and Content Fields PEER ID TYPE CONTENT Type the IP address of the computer with which you will make the VPN connection or leave the field blank to have the Device automatically use the address in the Secure Gateway Address field Type a domain name up to 31 characters by which to identify the remote IPSec router Type an e mail address up to 31 characters by which to identify the remote IPSec router The domain name or e mail address that you use in the Content field is used for identification purposes only and does not need to be a real domain name or e mail address The domain name also does not have to match the remote router s IP address or what you configure in the Secure Gateway Address field below 17 6 8 1 ID Type and Content Examples Two IPSec routers must have match
53. an existing VPN configuration Apply Click this to save your changes and apply them to the Device Cancel Click this return your settings to their last saved values EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 17 VPN 17 3 The VPN Edit Screen Click on Add New Tunnel in the VPN Setup screen or click on the Edit icon to edit VPN policies Both commands share the same screen Figure 107 Security gt VPN gt Setup gt Edit IPSEC Setup Active NAT Traversal Tunnel Name test 1 Mode net net Local Local Address Type Single IP Address Start 192 168 1 2 End Subnet Mask 255 255 255 255 Remote Remote Address Type Single IP Address Start 192 168 2 2 End Subnet Mask Address Information WAN Interface ADSLYVAN1 My IP Address Secure Gateway Address Local ID IP Content 192 168 1 2 Remote ID IP Content 10 1 2 3 Securite Protocol Pre share Key 12345678 certificate ZyXEL w Advanced Setting Ap ply Back The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 68 Security gt VPN gt Setup gt Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION IPSec Setup Active Select this check box to activate this VPN policy This option determines whether a VPN rule is applied before a packet leaves the firewall NAT Traversal Select this check box if you want to set up a VPN tunnel when there are NAT routers between the Device and remote IPSec router The remote IPSec router must also enable NAT traversal and the NAT routers have to
54. and is a full implementation the security protocol Use this security option for maximum protection of your network However it is the least backwards compatible with older devices The WPA security mode is a security subset of WPAZ2 It requires the presence of a RADIUS server on your network in order to validate user credentials This encryption standard is slightly older than WPA2 and therefore is more compatible with older devices Click Network Settings gt Wireless to display the General screen Select More Secure as the security level Then select WPA or WPA2 from the Security Mode list Figure 24 Wireless gt General More Secure WPA 2 Security Level More Secure Recommended gm Security Mode WPA2 l Authentication Server IF Address Port Number fat2 Shared Secret hide more WPA Compatible Enable Disable Group Key Update Timer Encryption 102 EMG5324 D10A Users Guide Chapter 6 Wireless The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 14 Wireless gt General More Secure WPA 2 LABEL DESCRIPTION Security Level Select More Secure to enable WPA 2 PSK data encryption Security Mode Choose WPA or WPA2 from the drop down list box Authentication Server IP Address Enter the IP address of the external authentication server in dotted decimal notation Port Enter the port number of the external authentication server The default port number is Number 1812 Y
55. and the transmitter each compute and then compare the MIC If they do not match it is assumed that the data has been tampered with and the packet is dropped By generating unique data encryption keys for every data packet and by creating an integrity checking mechanism MIC with TKIP and AES it is more difficult to decrypt data on a Wi Fi network than WEP and difficult for an intruder to break into the network The encryption mechanisms used for WPA 2 and WPA 2 PSK are the same The only difference between the two is that WPA 2 PSK uses a simple common password instead of user specific credentials The common password approach makes WPA 2 PSK susceptible to brute force password guessing attacks but it s still an improvement over WEP as it employs a consistent single alphanumeric password to derive a PMK which is used to generate unique temporal encryption keys This prevent all wireless devices sharing the same encryption keys a weakness of WEP User Authentication WPA and WPA2 apply IEEE 802 1x and Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP to authenticate wireless clients using an external RADIUS database WPA2 reduces the number of key exchange messages from six to four CCMP 4 way handshake and shortens the time required to connect to a network Other WPA2 authentication features that are different from WPA include key caching and pre authentication These two features are optional and may not be supported in all wireless devices
56. block packets for the services at specific interfaces 6 Keep the firewall in a secured locked room 13 6 2 Security Considerations Note Incorrectly configuring the firewall may block valid access or introduce security risks to the Device and your protected network Use caution when creating or deleting firewall rules and test your rules after you configure them Consider these security ramifications before creating a rule 1 Does this rule stop LAN users from accessing critical resources on the Internet For example if IRC is blocked are there users that require this service 2 Is it possible to modify the rule to be more specific For example if IRC is blocked for all users will a rule that blocks just certain users be more effective 3 Does a rule that allows Internet users access to resources on the LAN create a security vulnerability For example if FTP ports TCP 20 21 are allowed from the Internet to the LAN Internet users may be able to connect to computers with running FTP servers 4 Does this rule conflict with any existing rules Once these questions have been answered adding rules is simply a matter of entering the information into the correct fields in the web configurator screens 184 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide MAC Filter 14 1 Overview This chapter discusses MAC address filtering You can configure the Device to permit access to clients based on their MAC addresses in the MAC Filter screen
57. call Press the flash key and then press 0 e Disconnect the first call and answer the second call Either press the flash key and press 1 or just hang up the phone and then answer the phone after it rings e Put the first call on hold and answer the second call Press the flash key and then 2 240 EMG5324 D10A Users Guide Chapter 18 VoIP European Call Transfer Do the following to transfer a call that you have answered to another phone number 1 Press the flash key to put the caller on hold 2 When you hear the dial tone dial 98 followed by the number to which you want to transfer the call to operate the Intercom 3 After you hear the ring signal or the second party answers it hang up the phone European Three Way Conference Use the following steps to make three way conference calls 1 When you are on the phone talking to someone press the flash key to put the call on hold and get a dial tone 2 Diala phone number directly to make another call 3 When the second call is answered press the flash key and press 3 to create a three way conversation 4 Hang up the phone to drop the connection 5 If you want to separate the activated three way conference into two individual connections one is on line the other is on hold press the flash key and press 2 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 241 Chapter 18 VoIP 242 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Logs 19 1 Over
58. cannot edit the account if it is not activated Go to VoIP gt SIP gt SIP Account gt Edit to activate a SIP account see Section 18 3 on page 226 for more information Figure 121 Phone Device Edit SIF Account to Make Outgoing Call ChangeMe W SIP 4 IP ChangeMe soo 230 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 18 VoIP The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 83 Phone Device Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION SIP Account to Make Outgoing Call SIP Account Select the SIP account you want to use when making outgoing calls with the analog phone connected to this phone port SIP Number This shows the SIP account number SIP Account s to Receive Incoming Call SIP Account Select a SIP account if you want to receive phone calls for the selected SIP account on this phone port If you select more than one SIP account for incoming calls there is no way to distinguish between them when you receive phone calls If you do not select a source for incoming calls you cannot receive any calls on this phone port SIP Number This shows the SIP account number Apply Click Apply to save your changes Click Back to return to the previous screen without saving 18 6 The Phone Region Screen Use this screen to maintain settings that depend on which region of the world the Device is in To access this screen click Vol P gt Phone gt Region Figure 122 VoIP gt P
59. condition Any replacement will consist of a new or re manufactured functionally equivalent product of equal or higher value and will be solely at the discretion of ZyXEL This warranty shall not apply if the product has been modified misused tampered with damaged by an act of God or subjected to abnormal working conditions Note Repair or replacement as provided under this warranty is the exclusive remedy of the purchaser This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties express or implied including any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular use or purpose ZyXEL shall in no event be held liable for indirect or consequential damages of any kind to the purchaser To obtain the services of this warranty contact your vendor You may also refer to the warranty policy for the region in which you bought the device at http www zyxel com web support_warranty_ info php EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 3 1 Appendix G Legal Information Registration Register your product online to receive e mail notices of firmware upgrades and information at www zyxel com Safety Warnings Do NOT use this product near water for example in a wet basement or near a swimming pool Do NOT expose your device to dampness dust or corrosive liquids Do NOT store things on the device Do NOT install use or service this device during a thunderstorm There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning Connect ONLY suitable a
60. connects your private networks such as a LAN Local Area Network and other networks so that a computer in one location can communicate with computers in other locations Figure 13 LAN and WAN 3G third generation standards for the sending and receiving of voice video and data in a mobile environment You can attach a 3G wireless adapter to the USB port and set the Device to use this 3G connection as your WAN or a backup when the wired WAN connection fails Figure 14 3G WAN Connection EMG5324 D10A User s Guide at Chapter 5 Broadband 5 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter e Use the Broadband screen to view remove or add a WAN interface You can also configure the WAN settings on the Device for Internet access Section 5 2 on page 84 e Use the 3G Backup screen to configure 3G WAN connection Section 5 3 on page 89 5 1 2 What You Need to Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter Encapsulation Method Encapsulation is used to include data from an upper layer protocol into a lower layer protocol To set up a WAN connection to the Internet you need to use the same encapsulation method used by your ISP Internet Service Provider If your ISP offers a dial up Internet connection using PPPoE PPP over Ethernet they should also provide a username and password and service name for user authentication WAN IP Address The WAN IP address is an IP address for the Device which makes
61. discover Your UPnP enabled Network Device 1 Click Start and Control Panel Double click Network Connections An icon displays under Internet Gateway 2 Right click the icon and select Properties Figure 53 Network Connections F Network Connections Fie Edit wiew Favorites Tools Advanced Help Back ira i E Search gt Folders x ws wis H EB Address ie Network Connections _ sey _ Internet Gateway Network Tasks Winternet Connection Create a mew nabled CORAECKION Winternet Connection Set up a home or small office network Disable this network device Rename this connection ED view status of this connection Change settings of this Disable LaNorH Status Create Shortcuk aera bar M D ar a a wat of Rename Properties EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 139 Chapter 7 Home Networking 3 Inthe Internet Connection Properties window click Settings to see the port mappings there were automatically created Figure 54 Internet Connection Properties Y Internet Connection Properties General Connect to the Intermet using Internet Connection This connection allows you to connect to the Internet through a shared connection on another computer Settings Show icon in nobhicaton area when connected 140 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 7 Home Networking 4 You may edit or delete the port mappings or click Add to manually add port mappings Figure
62. field is described in the following table Table 26 Network Setting gt Home Networking gt File Sharing LABEL DESCRIPTION Server Configuration File Sharing Select Enable to activate file sharing through the Device Services SMB Add new share Click this to set up a new Share on the Device HO Select the check box to make the share available to the network Otherwise clear this This shows whether or not the share is available for sharing This field displays the share name on the Device Share Path This field displays the path for the share directories folders on the Device These are the directories folders on your USB storage device Share This field displays information about the share Description Modify Click the Edit icon to change the settings of an existing share Click the Delete icon to delete this share in the list Apply Click Apply to save your changes Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings 7 5 2 Add Edit File Sharing Use this screen to set up a new share or edit an existing share on the Device Click Add new share in the File Sharing screen or click the Edit icon next to an existing share Figure 43 File Sharing Add Edit Volume GENERIC_USB Mass Storage_100_1 Share Path Browse Description Each field is described in the following table Table 27 File Sharing Add Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Volume Select the volume in the USB storage device that you wa
63. for authentication each host has two keys One key is public and can be made openly available the other key is private and must be kept secure Public key encryption in general works as follows 1 Tim wants to send a private message to Jenny Tim generates a public private key pair What is encrypted with one key can only be decrypted using the other 2 Tim keeps the private key and makes the public key openly available 3 Tim uses his private key to encrypt the message and sends it to J enny 4 Jenny receives the message and uses Tim s public key to decrypt it 5 Additionally Jenny uses her own private key to encrypt a message and Tim uses J enny s public key to decrypt the message EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 191 Chapter 16 Certificates The Device uses certificates based on public key cryptology to authenticate users attempting to establish a connection The method used to secure the data that you send through an established connection depends on the type of connection For example a VPN tunnel might use the triple DES encryption algorithm The certification authority uses its private key to sign certificates Anyone can then use the certification authority s public key to verify the certificates Certification Path A certification path is the hierarchy of certification authority certificates that validate a certificate The Device does not trust a certificate if any certificate on its path has expired or been revoked
64. forward UDP port 4500 packets to the remote IPSec router behind the NAT router Tunnel Name Type up to 32 characters to identify this VPN policy You may use any character including spaces but the Device drops trailing spaces Mode Select net net or Roadwarrior from the drop down list box Multiple SAs connecting through a secure gateway must have the same negotiation mode EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 17 VPN Table 68 Security gt VPN gt Setup gt Edit continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Local Specify the IP addresses of the devices behind the Device that can use the VPN tunnel The local IP addresses must correspond to the remote IPSec router s configured remote IP addresses Two active SAs cannot have the local and remote IP address es both the same Two active SAs can have the same local or remote IP address but not both You can configure multiple SAs between the same local and remote IP addresses as long as only one is active at any time Local Address Type Use the drop down menu to choose Single or Subnet Select Single for a single IP address Select Subnet to specify IP addresses based on the subnet mask IP Address Start When the Local Address Type field is configured to Single enter a static IP address on the LAN behind your Device When the Local Address Type field is configured to Subnet enter an IP address on the LAN behind your Device End Subnet Mask When the Local Address Type field is configu
65. generated Once a WPS enabled device has connected to another device using WPS it becomes configured A configured wireless client can still act as enrollee or registrar in subsequent WPS connections but a configured access point can no longer act as enrollee It will be the registrar in all subsequent WPS 116 EMG5324 D10A Users Guide Chapter 6 Wireless connections in which it is involved If you want a configured AP to act as an enrollee you must reset it to its factory defaults 6 8 5 4 Example WPS Network Setup This section shows how security settings are distributed in an example WPS setup The following figure shows an example network In step 1 both AP1 and Client 1 are unconfigured When WPS is activated on both they perform the handshake In this example AP1 is the registrar and Client 1 is the enrollee The registrar randomly generates the security information to set up the network since it is unconfigured and has no existing information Figure 34 WPS Example Network Step 1 ENROLLEE REGISTRAR A uan ame rE ae SECURITY INFO CLIENT 1 AP1 In step 2 you add another wireless client to the network You know that Client 1 supports registrar mode but it is better to use AP1 for the WPS handshake with the new client since you must connect to the access point anyway in order to use the network In this case AP1 must be the registrar since it is configured it already has security information for the
66. in two phases 201 IPSec 201 security associations SA 201 see also IKE SA IPSec SA W WAN Wide Area Network see WAN 81 warranty 371 note 371 Web Configurator 23 web configurator passwords 23 WEP 100 112 WEP Encryption 101 Wi Fi Protected Access see WPA wireless client configuration 33 profile 35 security 337 tutorial 31 wireless client WPA supplicants 342 wireless LAN 95 authentication 110 111 BSS 113 example 113 channel 96 encryption 112 example 96 fragmentation threshold 110 limitations 112 MAC address filter 111 preamble 110 EMG5324 D10A Users Guide Index RADIUS server 111 push button 114 RTS CTS threshold 110 scheduling 108 security 110 SSID 111 activation 104 WEP 112 WPA 112 WPA PSK 112 WPS 113 116 example 117 limitations 118 PIN 114 push button 114 wireless network example 95 wireless security 337 WLAN 95 auto scan channel 98 interference 335 passphrase 100 scheduling 108 security parameters 344 see also wireless WEP 100 WLAN button 19 WPA 112 341 key caching 342 pre authentication 342 user authentication 342 vs WPA PSK 342 wireless client supplicant 342 with RADIUS application example 343 WPA2 341 user authentication 342 vs WPA2 PSK 342 wireless client supplicant 342 with RADIUS application example 343 WPA2 Pre Shared Key see WPA2 PSK WPA2 PSK 341 342 application example 343 WPA PSK 112 341 342 application example 343 WPS 113 116
67. j eted Configure Manually FireWire ip IP Address 0 0 0 0 Not Connected Subnet Mask AirPort es Off Router p aa DNS Server E Search Domains 802 1X WPA ZyXEL04 tn i E EO a Click the lock to prevent further changes Apply 6 Click Apply and close the window EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address Verifying Settings Check your TCP IP properties by clicking Applications gt Utilities gt Network Utilities and then selecting the appropriate Network interface from the Info tab Figure 191 Mac OS X 10 5 Network Utility e00 Network Utility Netstat AppleTalk Ping Lookup Traceroute Whois Finger Port Scan l erface for information Transfer Statistics Hardware Address 00 30 65 25 6a b3 Sent Packets 1230 IP Address es 10 0 2 2 Send Errors 0 Link Speed 11 Mbit s Recv Packets 1197 Link Status Active Recv Errors 0 Vendor Apple Collisions 0 Model Wireless Network Adapter 802 11 Linux Ubuntu 8 GNOME This section shows you how to configure your computer s TCP IP settings in the GNU Object Model Environment GNOME using the Ubuntu 8 Linux distribution The procedure screens and file locations may vary depending on your specific distribution release version and individual configuration The following screens use the default Ubuntu 8 installation Note Make sure you are logg
68. l Automatic ac Show Built in Ethernet ac TCP IP PPPoE AppleTalk Proxies Ethernet Configure IPv4 Using DHCP IP Address 0 0 0 0 Renew DHCP Lease Subnet Mask DHCP Client ID ilf required Router DNS Servers Search Domains Optional IPv6 Address Configure IPv6 a p i Click the lock to prevent further changes Assist me Apply Now 5 For statically assigned settings do the following e From the Configure I Pv4 list select Manually e In the IP Address field type your IP address e In the Subnet Mask field type your subnet mask EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 307 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address e In the Router field type the IP address of your device Figure 185 Mac OS X 10 4 Network Preferences gt Ethernet 8600 o Network a Showa Q Location Automatic E Show Built in Ethernet TCP IP PPPoE AppleTalk Proxies Ethernet gt Configure IPv4 Manually A IP Address 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 Router 0 0 0 0 DNS Servers Search Domains Optional IPv6 Address F Configure IPv6 U Click the lock to prevent further changes Assist me Apply Now 6 Click Apply Now and close the window Verifying Settings Check your TCP IP properties by clicking Applications gt Utilities gt Network Utilities and then selecting the appropriate Network I nterface from the I nfo tab Figu
69. network AP1 supplies the existing security information to Client 2 Figure 35 WPS Example Network Step 2 REGISTRAR EXISTING CONNECTION CLIENT 1 o ENROLLEE CLIENT 2 EMG5324 D10A Users Guide 117 Chapter 6 Wireless In step 3 you add another access point AP2 to your network AP2 is out of range of AP1 so you cannot use AP1 for the WPS handshake with the new access point However you know that Client 2 supports the registrar function so you use it to perform the WPS handshake instead Figure 36 WPS Example Network Step 3 EXISTING CONNECTION CLIENT 1 REGISTRAR ENROLLEE 6 8 5 5 Limitations of WPS WPS has some limitations of which you should be aware e WPS works in Infrastructure networks only where an AP and a wireless client communicate It does not work in Ad Hoc networks where there is no AP e When you use WPS it works between two devices only You cannot enroll multiple devices simultaneously you must enroll one after the other For instance if you have two enrollees and one registrar you must set up the first enrollee by pressing the WPS button on the registrar and the first enrollee for example then check that it successfully enrolled then set up the second device in the same way e WPS works only with other WPS enabled devices However you can still add non WPS devices to a network you already set up using WPS WPS works by automatically issuing a randomly generate
70. network place ee WEL Prestige 650R 31 Internet Ney Sharing Gateway g aA View network connections Invoke Set up a home or small office network Pa View workgroup computers Create Shortcut jeter m f Pan Se Renane Properties 6 Right click on the icon for your Device and select Properties A properties window displays with basic information about the Device Figure 61 Network Connections My Network Places Properties Example YAEL Internet Sharing Gateway General USEL Internet Sharing Gateway Manubacturer EL Model Mame WHEL Intermet Sharing Gateway Model Number Description AWHEL ntemnet Sharing Gateway Device Address Http 192 166 17 1 Close Cancel EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Routing 8 1 Overview The Device usually uses the default gateway to route outbound traffic from computers on the LAN to the Internet To have the Device send data to devices not reachable through the default gateway use Static routes For example the next figure shows a computer A connected to the Device s LAN interface The Device routes most traffic from A to the Internet through the Device s default gateway R1 You create one static route to connect to services offered by your ISP behind router R2 You create another static route to communicate with a separate network behind a router R3 connected to the LAN Figure 62 Example of Static Routing Topology EMG5324 D10A U
71. new DS Differentiated Services field to replace the Type of Service TOS field in the IP header The DS field contains a 2 bit unused field and a 6 bit DSCP field which can define up to 64 service levels The following figure illustrates the DS field DSCP is backward compatible with the three precedence bits in the ToS octet so that non DiffServ compliant ToS enabled network device will not conflict with the DSCP mapping DSCP 6 bits Unused 2 bits The DSCP value determines the forwarding behavior the PHB Per Hop Behavior that each packet gets across the DiffServ network Based on the marking rule different kinds of traffic can be marked for different kinds of forwarding Resources can then be allocated according to the DSCP values and the configured policies 160 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Network Address Translation NAT 10 1 Overview NAT Network Address Translation NAT RFC 1631 is the translation of the IP address of a host in a packet for example the source address of an outgoing packet used within one network to a different IP address known within another network 10 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter e Use the Port Forwarding screen to configure forward incoming service requests to the server s on your local network Section 10 2 on page 162 e Use the DMZ screen to configure a default server Section 10 3 on page 165 e Use the Sessions screen to limit the number of concurrent NAT sessions eac
72. o eee IP address Interface Group Use this screen to map a port to a PVC or bridge group Group Security Firewall General Use this screen to Use this screen to activate deactivate the firewall the firewall Use ee eee ee screen to set the default action to take on outgoing network traffic Access Control Use this screen to enable specific traffic directions for network services Use this screen to activate protection against Denial of Service DoS attacks EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 21 Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator Table 2 Navigation Panel Summary continued MAC Filter MAC Filter Use this screen to allow specific devices to access the Device Use this screen to define time periods and days during which the Device performs parental control and or block web sites with the Parental Parental Control Control specific URL Certificates Use this screen to generate and export self signed certificates or certification requests and import the Device s CA signed certificates VPN Use this screen to manage VPN settings Use this screen to view the active VPN tunnel s status VoIP SIP SIP Service Use this screen to configure your Device s Voice over IP settings Provider SIP Account Use this screen to set up information about your SIP account and configure audio settings such as volume levels for the phones connected to the Device m Use this screen to set which phone ports use which SIP
73. on hardware connections EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 1 Introduction 1 7 The RESET Button If you forget your password or cannot access the web configurator you will need to use the RESET button at the back of the device to reload the factory default configuration file This means that you will lose all configurations that you had previously and the passwords will be reset to the defaults 1 Make sure the POWER LED is on not blinking 2 To set the device back to the factory default settings press the RESET button for 5 seconds or until the POWER LED begins to blink and then release it When the POWER LED begins to blink the defaults have been restored and the device restarts 22 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Introducing the Web Configurator 2 1 Overview The web configurator is an HTML based management interface that allows easy device setup and management via Internet browser Use Internet Explorer 6 0 and later versions Mozilla Firefox 3 and later versions or Safari 2 0 and later versions The recommended screen resolution is 1024 by 768 pixels In order to use the web configurator you need to allow e Web browser pop up windows from your device Web pop up blocking is enabled by default in Windows XP SP Service Pack 2 e JavaScript enabled by default e Java permissions enabled by default See Appendix C on page 323 if you need to make sure these functions are allowed in Internet Explorer
74. part in the call SIP Accounts A SIP account is a type of VoIP account It is an arrangement with a service provider that lets you make phone calls over the Internet When you set the Device to use your SIP account to make calls the Device is able to send all the information about the phone call to your service provider on the Internet Strictly speaking you don t need a SIP account It is possible for one SIP device like the Device to call another without involving a SIP service provider However the networking difficulties involved in doing this make it tremendously impractical under normal circumstances Your SIP account provider removes these difficulties by taking care of the call routing and setup figuring out how to get your call to the right place in a way that you and the other person can talk to one another Voice Activity Detection Silence Suppression Voice Activity Detection VAD detects whether or not speech is present This lets the Device reduce the bandwidth that a call uses by not transmitting silent packets when you are not speaking Comfort Noise Generation When using VAD the Device generates comfort noise when the other party is not speaking The comfort noise lets you know that the line is still connected as total silence could easily be mistaken for a lost connection Echo Cancellation G 168 is an ITU T standard for eliminating the echo caused by the sound of your voice reverberating in the teleph
75. ports e enter the port number at the beginning of the range in the Start Port field e enter the port number at the end of the range in the End Port field DTMF Mode Control how the Device handles the tones that your telephone makes when you push its buttons You should use the same mode your VoIP service provider uses RFC2833 send the DTMF tones in RTP packets PCM send the DTMF tones in the voice data stream This method works best when you are using a codec that does not use compression like G 711 Codecs that use compression like G 729 and G 726 can distort the tones SIP INFO send the DTMF tones in SIP messages Transport Type Transport Type Select the transport layer protocol UDP or TCP usually UDP used for SIP FAX Option This field controls how the Device handles fax messages G711 Fax Select this if the Device should use G 711 to send fax messages The peer devices must also Passthrough use G 711 T38 Fax Relay Select this if the Device should send fax messages as UDP or TCP IP packets through IP networks This provides better quality but it may have inter operability problems The peer devices must also use T 38 Outbound Proxy Enable Select this if your VoIP service provider has a SIP outbound server to handle voice calls This allows the Device to work with any type of NAT router and eliminates the need for STUN or a SIP ALG Turn off any SIP ALG on a NAT router in front of the Device to keep it from r
76. possible Printer name HF DeskJet 12200 Do vou want to use this printer as the default printer Yes C No EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 18 The Device is a print server itself and you do not need to have your computer act as a print server by sharing the printer with other users in the same network just select Do not share this printer and click Next to proceed to the following screen Add Printer Wizard Printer Sharing fou can share this printer with other network users IF You want bo share this printer you must provide a share name ou can use the suggested name or type a new one The share name will be visible to other network O Share name 19 Select Yes and then click the Next button if you want to print a test page A pop up screen displays to ask if the test page printed correctly Otherwise select No and then click Next to continue Add Printer Wizard Print Test Page To confirm that the printer is installed properly You can print a test page Do you want to print a test page EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 20 The following screen shows your current printer settings Select Finish to complete adding a new printer Add Printer Wizard Completing the Add Printer Wizard You have successfully completed the Add Printer Wizard You specified the following printer settings Marne HP DeskJet 12200 Share name lt Not Shared Port IP
77. replaces the VLAN ID of the frames If you select Remove the Device deletes the VLAN ID of the frames before forwarding them out If you select Add the Device treat all matched traffic untagged and add a second VLAN ID If you select Unchange the Device keep the VLAN ID in the packets To Queue Select a queue that applies to this class hl You should have configured a queue in the Queue Setup screen already Criteria Configuration Use the following fields to configure the criteria for traffic classification Basic From Interface Select whether the traffic class comes from the LAN or a wireless interface Ether Type Select a predefined application to configure a class for the matched traffic If you select IP you need to configure source or destination MAC address IP address DHCP options DSCP value or the protocol type If you select I Pv6 you need to configure the source or destination Pv6 addres and prefix length If you select ARP you need to configure the source s MAC address and MAC Mask If you select 8021Q you can configure an 802 1p priority level and VLAN ID in the Others section Source Select the check box and enter the source MAC address of the packet Address MAC Mask Type the mask for the specified MAC address to determine which bits a packet s MAC address should match Enter f for each bit of the specified source MAC address that the traffic s MAC address Should match Enter 0 f
78. routers Figure 111 NAT Router Between IPSec Routers Normally you cannot set up an IKE SA with a NAT router between the two IPSec routers because the NAT router changes the header of the IPSec packet NAT traversal solves the problem by adding a UDP port 500 header to the IPSec packet The NAT router forwards the IPSec packet with the UDP port 500 header unchanged In Figure 111 on page 212 when IPSec router A tries to establish an IKE SA IPSec router B checks the UDP port 500 header and IPSec routers A and B build the IKE SA For NAT traversal to work you must 2 2 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 17 VPN e Use ESP security protocol in either transport or tunnel mode e Use IKE keying mode e Enable NAT traversal on both IPSec endpoints e Set the NAT router to forward UDP port 500 to IPSec router A Finally NAT is compatible with ESP in tunnel mode because integrity checks are performed over the combination of the original header plus original payload which is unchanged by a NAT device The compatibility of AH and ESP with NAT in tunnel and transport modes is summarized in the following table Table 72 VPN and NAT SECURITY PROTOCOL MODE NAT Y This is supported in the Device if you enable NAT traversal 17 6 4 Encapsulation The two modes of operation for IPSec VPNs are Transport mode and Tunnel mode Figure 112 Transport and Tunnel Mode IPSec Encapsulation Original IP TCP Data IP Packet Header Head
79. service provider must have a messaging system that sends message waiting status SIP packets as defined in RFC 3842 18 8 3 Quality of Service QoS Quality of Service QoS refers to both a network s ability to deliver data with minimum delay and the networking methods used to provide bandwidth for real time multimedia applications Type of Service ToS Network traffic can be classified by setting the ToS Type of Service values at the data source for example at the Device so a server can decide the best method of delivery that is the least cost fastest route and so on DiffServ DiffServ is a class of service CoS model that marks packets so that they receive specific per hop treatment at DiffServ compliant network devices along the route based on the application types and traffic flow Packets are marked with DiffServ Code Points DSCP indicating the level of service desired This allows the intermediary DiffServ compliant network devices to handle the packets differently depending on the code points without the need to negotiate paths or remember state information for every flow In addition applications do not have to request a particular service or give advanced notice of where the traffic is going DSCP and Per Hop Behavior DiffServ defines a new DS Differentiated Services field to replace the Type of Service TOS field in the IP header The DS field contains a 2 bit unused field and a 6 bit DSCP field which can define
80. severity level The syslog facility identifies a file in the syslog server Refer to the documentation of your syslog program for details The following table describes the syslog severity levels Table 88 Syslog Severity Levels CODE SEVERITY oO Emergency The system is unusable Alert Action must be taken immediately Critical The system condition is critical EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 243 Chapter 19 Logs Table 88 Syslog Severity Levels CODE SEVERITY Error There is an error condition on the system 4 Warning There is a warning condition on the system Notice There is a normal but significant condition on the system e Informational The syslog contains an informational message Debug The message is intended for debug level purposes 19 2 The System Log Screen Click System Monitor gt Log to open the System Log screen Use the System Log screen to see the system logs for the categories that you select in the upper left drop down list box Figure 128 System Monitor gt Log gt System Log Remote Management Level An Refresh Clear Logs 4970 Jan 13 ae Send DHCP ACK to 00 24 21 7E 20 96 with IP 03 35 32 192 168 1970 Jan 13 notice Receive DHCP REQUEST from 00 24 21 7E 2 03 35 32 4970 Jan 13 se Send DHCP ACK to 00 24 21 7E 20 96 with IP 03 35 27 192 168 1970 Jan 13 notice Receive DHCP REQUEST from 00 24 21 7E 2 03 35 27 4970 Jan 13 PeF 3end DHCP OFFER to 00 24 21 7E 20 96 with IP
81. shows the company network after subnetting There are now two sub networks A and B Figure 158 Subnetting Example After Subnetting A 1i N Internet A 1 192 168 1 0 25 E t192 168 1 128 25 48 7 Se ee eee ee E4 Teneeneeeeseses hs In a 25 bit subnet the host ID has 7 bits so each sub network has a maximum of 2 2 or 126 possible hosts a host ID of all zeroes is the subnet s address itself all ones is the subnet s broadcast address 192 168 1 0 with mask 255 255 255 128 is subnet A itself and 192 168 1 127 with mask 255 255 255 128 is its broadcast address Therefore the lowest IP address that can be assigned to an actual host for subnet A is 192 168 1 1 and the highest is 192 168 1 126 Similarly the host ID range for subnet B is 192 168 1 129 to 192 168 1 254 Example Four Subnets The previous example illustrated using a 25 bit subnet mask to divide a 24 bit address into two subnets Similarly to divide a 24 bit address into four subnets you need to borrow two host ID bits to give four possible combinations 00 01 10 and 11 The subnet mask Is 26 bits 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 or 255 255 255 192 Each subnet contains 6 host ID bits giving 2 2 or 62 hosts for each subnet a host ID of all zeroes Is the subnet itself all ones is the subnet s broadcast address Table 110 Subnet 1 IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER TA BIT IP Address Decimal 192 168 1 IP Address Bina
82. shows the day s and time on which parental control is enabled Schedule EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 1 87 Chapter 15 Parental Control Table 59 Parental Control gt Parental Control continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Network This shows whether the network service is configured If not None will be shown Service Website Block This shows whether the website block is configured If not None will be shown Modify Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the rule Click the Delete icon to delete an existing rule Add Click Add to create a new schedule Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Device 15 2 1 Add Edit a Parental Control Rule Click Add new PCP in the Parental Control screen to add a new rule or click the Edit icon next to an existing rule to edit it Use this screen to configure a restricted access schedule and or URL filtering settings to block the users on your network from accessing certain web sites Figure 94 Add Edit Parental Control Rule General l Active Parental Control Profile Name Home Network User All Internet Access Schedule Day M Everyday M Monday M Tuesday M Wednesday M Thursday M Friday M Saturday M Sunday Time Start End pa 24 00 q 00 00 No access F Authorized access Network Service Network Service Setting Block selected service s Add new service Blocked Site URL Keyword at oot Apply Back The following table describ
83. specific IP addresses to individual MAC addresses UPnP Use Use this screen to enable the UPnP function screen to enable the UPnP function oa Sharing Use Sea ee ee screen to enable file sharing via the Device Media Server Use this screen to enable or disable the sharing of media files Use this screen to enable or disable sharing of a USB printer via your Device Static Route Static Route Use this screen to view and set up static routes on the Device DNS Route DNS Route Use this screen to view and configure DNS routes QoS Use this screen to enable QoS and decide allowable bandwidth using Qos Queue Setup Use this screen to configure QoS queue assignment Class Setup Use this screen to set up classifiers to sort traffic into different flows and assign priority and define actions to be performed for a classified traffic flow Monitor Use Use this screen to view each queue s statistics screen to view each Use this screen to view each queue s statistics s Statistics NAT Port ee Use this screen to make your local servers visible to the outside world Use this screen to limit the number of NAT sessions a single client can establish Address Mapping Use this screen to change your Device s address mapping settings ALG Use Use this screen to enable or disable SIP ALG screen to enable or disable SIP ALG Dynamic DNS E DNS Use this screen to allow a static hostname alias for a ae
84. station and a wired network client go through one access point AP ntra BSS traffic is traffic between wireless stations in the BSS When Intra BSS traffic blocking is disabled wireless station A and B can access the wired network and communicate with each other When Intra BSS traffic blocking is enabled wireless station A and B can still access the wired network but cannot communicate with each other Figure 31 Basic Service set a BSS 6 8 5 WiFi Protected Setup WPS Your Device supports WiFi Protected Setup WPS which is an easy way to set up a secure wireless network WPS is an industry standard specification defined by the WiFi Alliance WPS allows you to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security without having to configure security settings manually Each WPS connection works between two devices Both devices must support WPS check each device s documentation to make Sure Depending on the devices you have you can either press a button on the device itself or in its configuration utility or enter a PIN a unique Personal Identification Number that allows one device to authenticate the other in each of the two devices When WPS is activated on a device it has two minutes to find another device that also has WPS activated Then the two devices connect and set up a secure network by themselves EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 3 Chapter 6 Wireless 6 8 5 1 Push Button Configuration WPS Push Butt
85. the users below is required to perform this action a EEA chris gt Details aj Authenticate D EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 4 Inthe Network Settings window select the connection that you want to configure then click Properties Figure 195 Ubuntu 8 Network Settings gt Connections ra Network Settings Location Wired connection Roaming mode enabled Point to point connec This network interface is not c Pzd Close 5 The Properties dialog box opens Figure 196 Ubuntu 8 Network Set tings gt Properties AE r X r E a IE Tar Connection Settings IP address Subnet mask Gateway address e In the Configuration list select Automatic Configuration DHCP if you have a dynamic IP address e In the Configuration list select Static IP address if you have a static IP address Fill in the IP address Subnet mask and Gateway address fields 6 Click OK to save the changes and close the Properties dialog box and return to the Network Settings screen 314 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 7 Ifyou know your DNS server IP address es click the DNS tab in the Network Settings window and then enter the DNS server information in the fields provided Ligue 197 Ubuntu 8 Network Sele gt DNS Search Domains mm 8 Click the Close button to apply the ch
86. the Wireless LAN Scheduling screen Use this screen to configure when the Device enables or disables the wireless LAN Figure 29 Network Setting gt Wireless gt Scheduling Wireless LAN Scheduling Enable Disable 3 L Everyday 00 F hour 00 7 imin 00 inour 00 min Mon 00 hour 99 min 00 7 ihour 00 min Tue 00 hour 00 7 min 00 hour 00 min Wed 00 hour 99 min 00 hour 00 min l Thu 00 7 hour 00 min 00 inour 00 F min l Fri 00 7 hour 00 7 min 00 ihour 00 F min Sat 00 hour 00 7 min 00 hour 00 min C Sun 00 7 hour 00 7 min 00 hour 00 min OJ 0O O ea ae a 9 7 7 BE BE 3 B Note Specify the same begin time and end time means the whole day schedule The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 19 Network Setting gt Wireless gt Scheduling LABEL DESCRIPTION Wireless LAN Select Enable to activate wireless LAN scheduling on your Device Scheduling WLAN status Select On or Off to enable or disable the wireless LAN Day Select the day s you want to turn the wireless LAN on or off Between the Specify the time period during which to apply the schedule following times For example you want the wireless network to be only available during work hours Check Mon Fri in the day column and specify 8 00 18 00 in the time table EMG5324 D10A Us
87. the wireless client The wireless client proves that it knows the password by encrypting the password with the challenge and sends back the information Password is not sent in plain text However MD5 authentication has some weaknesses Since the authentication server needs to get the plaintext passwords the passwords must be stored Thus someone other than the authentication server may access the password file In addition it is possible to impersonate an authentication server as MD5 authentication method does not perform mutual authentication Finally MD5 authentication method does not support data encryption with dynamic session key You must configure WEP encryption keys for data encryption EAP TLS Transport Layer Security With EAP TLS digital certifications are needed by both the server and the wireless clients for mutual authentication The server presents a certificate to the client After validating the identity of the server the client sends a different certificate to the server The exchange of certificates is done in the open before a secured tunnel is created This makes user identity vulnerable to passive attacks A digital certificate is an electronic ID card that authenticates the sender s identity However to implement EAP TLS you need a Certificate Authority CA to handle certificates which imposes a management overhead EAP TTLS Tunneled Transport Layer Service EAP TTLS is an extension of the EAP TLS authen
88. the wireless network it still has to have the correct information SSID channel and security If a device is not allowed to use the wireless network it does not matter if it has the correct information This type of security does not protect the information that is sent in the wireless network Furthermore there are ways for unauthorized wireless devices to get the MAC address of an authorized device Then they can use that MAC address to use the wireless network 6 8 2 3 User Authentication Authentication is the process of verifying whether a wireless device is allowed to use the wireless network You can make every user log in to the wireless network before using it However every device in the wireless network has to support IEEE 802 1x to do this For wireless networks you can store the user names and passwords for each user in a RADIUS server This is a server used in businesses more than in homes If you do not have a RADIUS server you cannot set up user names and passwords for your users Unauthorized wireless devices can still see the information that is sent in the wireless network even if they cannot use the wireless network Furthermore there are ways for unauthorized wireless users to get a valid user name and password Then they can use that user name and password to use the wireless network 1 Some wireless devices such as scanners can detect wireless networks but cannot use wireless networks These kinds of wireles
89. this procedure click Continue whenever Windows displays a screen saying that it needs your permission to continue EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 6 Select Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP 1Pv4 and then select Properties Figure 172 Windows Vista Local Area Connection Properties Local Area Conmection Properties Networking Connect using E Intel R PR01000 MT Desktop Connection Configure Thi connection uses the following items IE Client for Microsoft Networks m Network Monitors Driver File and Printer Sharing for Microsott Networks Inteme apology Discovery Ww oa Link Layer a Link Layer Topology Discover Responder Mapper lO Driver Install Uninstall C Properties gt Description Transmision Control Protocol lntemet Protocol The default wide area network protocol that provides communication across diverse interconnected networks EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 299 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 7 The Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP I Pv4 Properties window opens Figure 173 Windows Vista Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 Properties Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP TPy43 Properties F ES General Alternate Configuration You can get IP settings assigned automatically iF your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator For the appr
90. this screen Table 62 Security gt Certificates gt Trusted CA LABEL DESCRIPTION Import Click this button to open a screen where you can save the certificate of a certification Certificate authority that you trust to the Device This field displays the name used to identify this certificate Subject This field displays information that identifies the owner of the certificate such as Common Name CN OU Organizational Unit or department Organization O State ST and Country C It is recommended that each certificate have unique subject information Type This field displays general information about the certificate ca means that a Certification Authority signed the certificate Action Click the View icon to open a screen with an in depth list of information about the certificate or certification request Click the Delete icon to delete the certificate or certification request You cannot delete a certificate that one or more features is configured to use 16 4 Trusted CA Import Click Import Certificate in the Trusted CA screen to open the Import Certificate screen You can save a trusted certification authority s certificate to the Device EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 195 Chapter 16 Certificates Note You must remove any spaces from the certificate s filename before you can import the certificate Figure 99 Trusted CA gt Import The certificate is in one of the following formats Binary X 509 PEM B
91. up to 30 characters You can use letters numbers hyphens and underscores _ Spaces are not allowed WAN Interface Select the WAN interface this group uses used in the grouping Grouped LAN Select one or more LAN interfaces Ethernet LAN HPNA or wireless LAN in the Available Interfaces LAN Interfaces list and use the left arrow to move them to the Grouped LAN Interfaces list to add the interfaces to this group Available LAN Interfaces To remove a LAN or wireless LAN interface from the Grouped LAN Interfaces use the right facing arrow 1 16 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Firewall 13 1 Overview Use the Device firewall screens to enable and configure the firewall that protects your Device and network from attacks by hackers on the Internet and control access to it By default the firewall e Allows traffic that originates from your LAN and WLAN computers to go to all other networks Blocks traffic that originates on other networks from going to the LAN and WLAN The following figure illustrates the default firewall action User A can initiate an IM Instant Messaging session from the LAN to the WAN 1 Return traffic for this session is also allowed 2 However other traffic initiated from the WAN is blocked 3 and 4 Figure 85 Default Firewall Action LAN WAN 13 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the General screen to enable or disable the Device s firewall Section 13 2 on page 178 Us
92. written as eight 16 bit hexadecimal blocks separated by colons This is an example IPv6 address 2001 0db8 14265 20015 20000 200002 1427 0000 Pv6 addresses can be abbreviated in two ways e Leading zeros in a block can be omitted So 2001 0db8 1a2b 0015 0000 0000 1a2 0000 Can be written as Z0U0U LF dbe lazbs 1570204 lazi v e Any number of consecutive blocks of zeros can be replaced by a double colon A double colon can only appear once in an Pv6 address So 2001 0db8 0000 0000 1a2 0000 0000 0015 can be written as 20012 00b8 ba2t 20000700002 0015 2001 lt 0dbS 00007 0000 s1a2F 20015 ZO00Lt0be silazi 020215 OF 2001 dbo eC 204 lazi eso Prefix and Prefix Length EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Similar to an IPv4 subnet mask IPv6 uses an address prefix to represent the network address An IPv6 prefix length specifies how many most significant bits start from the left in the address compose the network address The prefix length is written as x where x is a number For example 2001 db8 1a2b 15 1a2 0 32 means that the first 32 bits 2001 db8 is the subnet prefix 357 Appendix F IPv6 Link local Address A link local address uniquely identifies a device on the local network the LAN It is similar to a private IP address in IPv4 You can have the same link local address on multiple interfaces on a device A link local unicast address has a predefined prefix of fe80 10 The link local unicast addr
93. you want to configure Gateway IP Address enter the IP address of the next hop gateway The gateway is a router or switch on the same network segment as the device s LAN or WAN port The gateway helps forward packets to their destinations Bound You can decide if you want to forward packets to a gateway IP address or a bound interface Interface If you want to configure Bound Interface select the check box and choose an interface through which the traffic is sent You must have the WAN interface s already configured in the Broadband screen Apply Click Apply to save your changes Click Back to exit this screen without saving EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 147 Chapter 8 Routing 148 EMG5324 D10A Users Guide Quality of Service QoS 9 1 Overview This chapter discusses the Device s QoS screens Use these screens to set up your Device to use QoS for traffic management Quality of Service QoS refers to both a network s ability to deliver data with minimum delay and the networking methods used to control the use of bandwidth QoS allows the Device to group and prioritize application traffic and fine tune network performance Without QoS all traffic data is equally likely to be dropped when the network is congested This can cause a reduction in network performance and make the network inadequate for time critical application such as video on demand The Device assigns each packet a priority and then queues th
94. your devices support WPS and some do not you can use WPS to set up your network and then add the non WPS devices manually although this is somewhat more complicated to do e What advanced options do you want to configure if any If you want to configure advanced options ensure that you know precisely what you want to do If you do not want to configure advanced options leave them alone 6 2 The Wireless General Screen Use this screen to enable the Wireless LAN enter the SSID and select the wireless security mode Note If you are configuring the Device from a computer connected to the wireless LAN and you change the Device s SSID or security settings you will lose your wireless connection when you press Apply to confirm You must then change the wireless settings of your computer to match the Device s new settings Click Network Setting gt Wireless to open the General screen Select the Enable Wireless LAN checkbox to show the Wireless configurations Figure 20 Network Setting gt Wireless gt General Wireless Network Setup Wireless M Enable Wireless LAN Wireless Network Settings Wireless Network Name SSID yxEL 6686 Hide SSID BSSID 02 13 49 11 66 8c Mode Select 802 41b gin gt Channel Selection Channel 11 Scan Operating Channel 11 Security Level No Security Apply Cancel EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 6 Wireless The following table describes the labels in this screen
95. 0 172 31 255 255 e 192 168 0 0 192 168 255 255 You can obtain your IP address from the IANA from an ISP or it can be assigned from a private network If you belong to a small organization and your Internet access is through an ISP the ISP can provide you with the Internet addresses for your local networks On the other hand if you are part of a much larger organization you should consult your network administrator for the appropriate IP addresses Note Regardless of your particular situation do not create an arbitrary IP address always follow the guidelines above For more information on address assignment please refer to RFC 1597 Address Allocation for Private Internets and RFC 1466 Guidelines for Management of IP Address Space EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 133 Chapter 7 Home Networking Device Print Server Compatible USB Printers The following is a list of USB printer models compatible with the Device print server Table 30 Compatible USB Printers EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 7 Home Networking Table 30 Compatible USB Printers continued MODEL on ee si e i E p EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 7 Home Networking 7 9 Installing UPnP in Windows Example This section shows how to install UPnP in Windows Me and Windows XP Installing UPnP in Windows Me Follow the steps below to install the UPnP in Windows Me 1 Click Start and Control Panel Double click Add Remove Pro
96. 00 60 Add Patt Delete Port Configure Patt MV Enable bidirectional support Enable printer pooling 13 Repeat steps 1 to 12 to add this printer to other computers on your network Add a New Printer Using Windows This example shows how to connect a printer to your Device using the Windows XP Professional operating system Some menu items may look different on your operating system EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 1 Click Start gt Control Panel gt Printers and Faxes to open the Printers and Faxes screen Click Add a Printer e Printers and Faxes File Edit View Favorites Tools Help amp E Address Printers and Faxes a iz A iz iz GA A Acrobat Adobe PIF Microsoft Microsoft XPS FPRT402 on FOF Writer Office Doc Document ayty pil See Also PE T405 on Web Works aytyptil Rasterizer Troubleshoot printing Get help with printing Other Places g Control Panel Ss Scanners and Cameras H My Documents Moy Pictures yl My Computer 2 The Add Printer Wizard screen displays Click Next Add Printer Wizard Welcome to the Add Printer Wizard This wizard helps you install a printer or make printer connections IF You have a Plug and Play printer that connects i 1 through a USB port for any other hot pluggable port such as IEEE 1394 infrared and so on you do not need to use this wizard Click Cancel to
97. 07 37 43 ChangeMe FXS2 Phone Event idle Aug 20 07 39 05 ChangeMe FXS2 Phone Event OFFHOOK Aug 20 07 39 28 ChangeMe FXS2 Phone Event ONHOOK Aug 20 07 39 28 ChangeMe FXS2 Phone Event idle Aug 20 07 41 14 SIP Registration SIP 128752 Register Success Aug 20 07 41 49 ChangeMe FXS2 Phone Event OFFHOOK Aug 20 07 41 56 ChangeMe FXS2 Phone Event ONHOOK o 9 ont O A A OQ N The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 90 System Monitor gt Log gt Phone Log LABEL DESCRIPTION ee Select a category of logs to view from the drop down list box select All Logs to view all logs This field displays the severity level of the logs that the device is to send to this syslog server This field states the reason for the log 19 4 The VoIP Call History Screen Click System Monitor gt Log gt VolP Call History to open the VolP Call History screen Use this screen to see the details of the calls performed on the Device Figure 130 System Monitor gt Log gt VoIP Call History Mican ston ic Local Number s Peer Number Interface Duration 08 20 2010 09 43 52 128752 1353699 08 20 2010 09 43 07 128752 1353699 08 20 2010 09 42 11 128752 1353699 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 19 Logs The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 91 System Monitor gt Log gt VolP Call History LABEL DESCRIPTION Select a category of call records to view from th
98. 1 P en A E E E A E T T 145 CA O T a E 149 Network Address eter eee eee 161 Et dieu as tet E A E 171 pps Bone eRe eed mene cere ree en eaeee E eee Mae Remy etny wee Nee Meare nny peer e nT 175 E A S 177 R PE se E A E E E E N sieaiciancnaciene 185 EA EE e a ie OSSEE AEE EE EE E S E EE E A TOE EE EA E E TA ENE EEE E 187 T a E T ciasounrenrcceernets 191 OUT E AEA 201 E a EE EET E L EE E E E T PE E E A A E E pi ee 221 EA EAE E AEAEE TA EEA AAEE E EET E T A A 243 T E a A E EAEE 247 Ue E ra T A E E EA EAEN EO T S 253 Po ETARE oea A A A E NE 255 Te SNMP GOGEN ciciosssiseisreriseatecsaasnisassssusdaaseiseianeiisasccidhsnses tepaiiobisinsanlacidsnenatateniasabecioscsbeibesinsasianiassios 257 E E E A EO T E N EA AAA E 259 Ei E ET EE EEEN E I E PEE E A E E EE 261 Wels Recs E E E E ee ee eterna ane mee 263 Fre I aaccpiccra vies veinict tele nrassi sic E ne awiiaieenasnnteede ier 265 SiS AUS 1g cc 19 d eee nea eee ee eee nEe ae eee MeN ene eee E N ne yl mene 267 BG A tie anv eae anti ant seared ent Aneel RA Seas 271 TR sarsaran tse pert pene terse passes R EAE 273 Wall mounting Instructions caiiisies tieiarsaiceransesacnanccshaveennebecresieoimnskusisinuadausiveaaneaserckeneedwuseiaideastdsinenesnasicxenaidaneae 281 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Contents Overview EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Table of Contents Table of Contents Contents Overview cis cntcordcgrersaraiectsiayerinieeretenieneanenoetomienareesistaidenighierinane em easrinaon an
99. 1 The Port Number is automatically configured as 9100 Click OK Tonfigure Standard TCP IP Port Monitor Port Settings Port Hame IF_192 168 1 1 Printer Name or IP Address fi 92 168 1 1 Protocol cm 2 mra D ala Port Number 9700 LPR Settings Giyeue Hame D LFR Byte Counting Enabled SNMF Status Enabled Eommenitt Hame pubiic SNME Deyice Inder fi Cancel EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials Chapter 3 Tutorials 12 Continue through the wizard apply your settings and close the wizard window Mdd Standard TCP IP Printer Port Wizard 3 Fuddlrornal Pool nloomaleon Hequaed a The derr could nol ha ierdie kt The deroa m nel loud on the relra he pue hat 1 he dama n lued or 2 The reer is d he dence r euerly omhaal d Tha adira om ha previous pige Bemet ng the Add Standard Printer Port Wizard Il you think thee aiden bone coment cick Back In inium bo thes previous page Them comet Ihe ddai and pelo broha peetch on the maiaa Ul pure cute he badai it camasi eed Whee hears ype kore Dena Ippe C S fad lan Ajai f Custom Sisters 2 x Version Information Advanced ted a port with the following characteristics No LPR Ip1 192 168 1 2 IP_192 168 1 2 cto wots cma Port Name Adapter Type To complete this wizard click Finish HP LaserJet 8000 Canon iR50
100. 11 11111111 11111111 00000000 255 255 255 0 29 bit mask 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111000 255 255 255 248 Network Size The size of the network number determines the maximum number of possible hosts you can have on your network The larger the number of network number bits the smaller the number of remaining host ID bits An IP address with host IDs of all zeros is the IP address of the network 192 168 1 0 with a 24 bit Subnet mask for example An IP address with host IDs of all ones is the broadcast address for that network 192 168 1 255 with a 24 bit subnet mask for example As these two IP addresses cannot be used for individual hosts calculate the maximum number of possible hosts in a network as follows Table 108 Maximum Host Numbers MAXIMUM NUMBER OF SUBNET MASK HOST ID SIZE i HOSTS 255 0 0 0 24 bits 224 _ 2 16777214 16 bits 255 255 0 0 16 bits 216 _ 2 65534 24 bits 255 255 255 0 28_ 2 254 Notation Since the mask is always a continuous number of ones beginning from the left followed by a continuous number of zeros for the remainder of the 32 bit mask you can simply specify the number of ones instead of writing the value of each octet This is usually specified by writing a followed by the number of bits in the mask after the address For example 192 1 1 0 25 is equivalent to saying 192 1 1 0 with subnet mask 255 255 255 128 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 285 Appendix A IP Addresses and Subne
101. 17 1 Overview A virtual private network VPN provides secure communications between sites without the expense of leased site to site lines A secure VPN is a combination of tunneling encryption authentication access control and auditing It is used to transport traffic over the Internet or any insecure network that uses TCP IP for communication Internet Protocol Security IPSec is a standards based VPN that offers flexible solutions for secure data communications across a public network like the Internet IPSec is built around a number of Standardized cryptographic techniques to provide confidentiality data integrity and authentication at the IP layer The following figure is an example of an IPSec VPN tunnel Figure 103 VPN Example m E E E E E E E E w m m e e e e e m 17 1 1 What You Can Do in the VPN Screens e Use the Setup screen Section 17 2 on page 203 to view the configured VPN policies and add edit or remove a VPN policy e Use the Monitor screen Section 17 5 on page 210 to display and manage the current active VPN connections 17 1 2 What You Need to Know About IPSec VPN A VPN tunnel is usually established in two phases Each phase establishes a security association SA a contract indicating what security parameters the Device and the remote IPSec router will use The first phase establishes an Internet Key Exchange IKE SA between the Device and remote IPSec router The second phase uses the IKE SA to secure
102. 2 Encryption Both WPA and WPA2 improve data encryption by using Temporal Key Integrity Protocol TKIP Message Integrity Check MIC and IEEE 802 1x WPA and WPA2 use Advanced Encryption Standard AES in the Counter mode with Cipher block chaining Message authentication code Protocol CCMP to offer stronger encryption than TKIP TKIP uses 128 bit keys that are dynamically generated and distributed by the authentication server AES Advanced Encryption Standard is a block cipher that uses a 256 bit mathematical algorithm EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 341 Appendix D Wireless LANs called Rijndael They both include a per packet key mixing function a Message Integrity Check MIC named Michael an extended initialization vector IV with sequencing rules and a re keying mechanism WPA and WPA2 regularly change and rotate the encryption keys so that the same encryption key is never used twice The RADIUS server distributes a Pairwise Master Key PMK key to the AP that then sets up a key hierarchy and management system using the PMK to dynamically generate unique data encryption keys to encrypt every data packet that is wirelessly communicated between the AP and the wireless clients This all happens in the background automatically The Message Integrity Check MIC is designed to prevent an attacker from capturing data packets altering them and resending them The MIC provides a strong mathematical function in which the receiver
103. 2 Pen a DHCP Relay Agent A DHCP relay agent is on the same network as the DHCP clients and helps forward messages between the DHCP server and clients When a client cannot use its link local address and a well known multicast address to locate a DHCP server on its network it then needs a DHCP relay agent to send a message to a DHCP Server that is not attached to the same network The DHCP relay agent can add the remote identification remote D option and the interface D option to the Relay Forward DHCPv6 messages The remote ID option carries a user defined string such as the system name The interface ID option provides slot number port information and the VLAN ID to the DHCPv6 server The remote ID option if any is stripped from the Relay Reply messages before the relay agent sends the packets to the clients The DHCP server copies the interface D option from the Relay Forward message into the Relay Reply message and sends it to the relay agent The interface D should not change even after the relay agent restarts Prefix Delegation Prefix delegation enables an Pv6 router to use the Pv6 prefix network address received from the ISP or a connected uplink router for its LAN The Device uses the received IPv6 prefix for example 2001 db2 48 to generate its LAN IP address Through sending Router Advertisements RAs regularly by multicast the Device passes the Pv6 prefix information to its LAN hosts The hosts then ca
104. 4 D10A User s Guide Time Setting 25 1 Overview You can configure the system s time and date in the Time Setting screen 25 2 The Time Setting Screen To change your Device s time and date click Maintenance gt Time The screen appears as shown Use this screen to configure the Device s time based on your local time zone Figure 141 Maintenance gt Time Setting Current Date Time Current Time 03 34 19 Current Date 2000 04 04 Time and Date Setup Time Protocal NTP Time Server Address europe pool ntp org Time Zone Time Zone GMT 01 00 Berlin Stockholm Rome Bern Brussels Vienna I Daylight Savings StatDate Last Sun of March 2000 03 26 at M o clock EndDate Last Sun of October 2000 10 29 at A o clock The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 101 Maintenance gt System gt Time Setting Current Date Time Current Time This field displays the time of your Device Current Date This field displays the date of your Device Time and Date Setup Time Protocol This shows the time service protocol that your time server sends when you turn on the Device Time Server Enter the IP address or URL up to 31 extended ASCII characters in length of your time Address server Check with your SP network administrator if you are unsure of this information Time Zone Choose the time zone of your location This will set the time difference between your time zone
105. 4 EMG5324 D10A Users Guide Chapter 5 Broadband Table 5 Network Setting gt Broadband continued LABEL DESCRIPTION IGMP Proxy This shows whether IGMP Internet Group Multicast Protocol is activated or not for this connection IGMP is not available when the connection uses the bridging service NAT This shows whether NAT is activated or not for this connection NAT is not available when the connection uses the bridging service Default This shows whether the Device uses the interface of this connection as the system default Gateway gateway Modify Click the Edit icon to configure the connection Click the Delete icon to delete this connection from the Device A window displays asking you to confirm that you want to delete the connection 5 2 1 Add Edit Internet Connection Use this screen to configure a WAN connection The screen varies depending on the interface type encapsulation and WAN service type you select 5 2 1 1 Routing Click the Add new WAN Interface in the Network Setting gt Broadband screen or the Edit icon next to the connection you want to configure Select Routing as the encapsulation mode Figure 16 Broadband Add Edit Routing General Routing Feature Name NAT Enable Type EtherwAN z Address Mapping Enable Mode Routing 7 Address Mapping Set WANServiceType PPP over Ethernet PPPoE gt IGMP Proxy Enable PPPoE Passthrough a Apply as Default Gateway IPv6 IPv4 Mode IPv6 IPv4 Dua
106. 5 register server 236 servers 234 service domain 234 URI 233 user agent 234 SIP ALG 168 activation 168 speed dial 232 SSID 111 activation 104 static route 145 static VLAN status 75 status indicators 20 subnet 283 subnet mask 133 284 subnetting 286 supplementary services 239 syslog protocol 243 severity levels 243 system firmware 265 passwords 23 status 75 System Info 77 system name 77 260 T Tag Control Information See TCI Tag Protocol Identifier See TPID TCI TCP IP port 50 Temporal Key Integrity Protocol see TKIP The 82 three way conference 241 377 thresholds data fragment 110 RTS CTS 110 TKIP 341 ToS 238 TPID 92 trademarks 369 trusted CAs and certificates 195 tunnel mode 213 tutorial VoIP 39 wireless 31 Type of Service see ToS U unicast 92 Uniform Resource Identifier 233 Universal Plug and Play see UPnP upgrading firmware 265 UPnP 127 forum 122 security issues 122 V VAD 222 version firmware version 77 VID Virtual Local Area Network See VLAN Virtual Local Area Network see VLAN Virtual Private Network see VPN VLAN 91 239 group 239 ID 239 ID tags 239 Introduction 91 number of possible VIDs priority frame Static VLAN ID 92 378 Index VLAN Identifier See VID VLAN tag 92 voice activity detection 222 voice coding 237 VoIP 233 features 18 peer to peer calls 232 tutorial 39 VoIP features 18 VoIP status 251 VPN 201 established
107. 6 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol version six which is used in IPv6 stateful autoconfiguration the owner and status of addresses don t need to be maintained by a DHCP server Every IPv6 device is able to generate its own and unique IP address automatically when Pv6 is initiated on its interface It combines the prefix and the interface ID generated from its own Ethernet MAC address see Interface ID and EUI 64 to form a complete Pv6 address When Pv6 is enabled on a device its interface automatically generates a link local address beginning with fe80 When the interface is connected to a network with a router and the Device is set to automatically obtain an Pv6 network prefix from the router for the interface it generates gt another address which combines its interface ID and global and subnet information advertised from the router This is a routable global IP address DHCPv6 The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol for Pv6 DHCPv6 RFC 3315 isa server client protocol that allows a DHCP server to assign and pass IPv6 network addresses prefixes and other configuration information to DHCP clients DHCPv6 servers and clients exchange DHCP messages using UDP Each DHCP client and server has a unique DHCP Unique Dentifier DUID which is used for identification when they are exchanging DHCPv6 messages The DUID is generated from the MAC address time vendor assigned ID and or the vendor s private enterprise number regist
108. 7 Chapter 24 EA PRAETEREA PE A T A A E TE TAN AIE E EA I end A E EEE 259 E TO N oi E R E A A 259 24 1 1 What You Need to KNOW sdunnsicssavceexiaciaiceatiniaracesdceusuednanivsbannescatabenrs bien dusaleavarssanuatialesmereseressnet 259 Se T T E a S 259 Chapter 25 E S a A 261 BA a E E E E T E E TT E meee tees 261 Coe me hme SSG EE ennaa EE 261 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Table of Contents Chapter 26 BR EA aAA 263 so eee enn eRe E E nT ter Meee ere ee ee ea 263 ia ec ee 8 Rew E eE 263 Chapter 27 Fre LIE sly s PR A EE E A E T E A E E EA 265 Ege Rc AAAA 265 era NAVE FE WIS S01 GST sioa eaaa NEn EAEE REA 265 Chapter 28 BACKUP OS TOTE a E E 267 NES a EIEEE EAA E AIEE sina in ee een 267 26 2 The Backup Restore SGO ee en ce eee aoe eee oe eter eter eee eee ee oe a aa 267 ana O TE certarinterctraercdsenrs pve TEE EEEE 269 Chapter 29 O a AA 271 e E a A R ren nt eet a rer ee et 271 ens TUS a og els 9 0 cate of lt lt be eae ent on ne et eee te ee er On eee eee 271 Pole al tg a BB ego eee ene eee E ene een eee ee ee Teen A PE eee errr eee ee re arene 272 Chapter 30 Bge A A a p E A E T st Ene Sates he mer hae A rent rna mene iii er ie E S E irl ent Men Other eeenene Sonn re 273 A rinse eases aes cates eee pees ine ee 273 30 2 Power Hardware Connections and LEDS 000 cece ceccecceececceeceeceececeeeeeceeeeeceeaeeneenesaeeneeeeseeneeneees 273 30 3 Device Access and Login aicncacennensisoreeccnnidasiveanaidesse
109. AT traversal applications in establishing their own services and opening firewall ports may present network security issues Network information and configuration may also be obtained and modified by users in some network environments When a UPnP device joins a network it announces its presence with a multicast message For security reasons the Device allows multicast messages on the LAN only All UPnP enabled devices may communicate freely with each other without additional configuration Disable UPnP if this is not your intention UPnP and ZyXEL ZyXEL has achieved UPnP certification from the Universal Plug and Play Forum UPnP Implementers Corp UIC ZyXEL s UPnP implementation supports Internet Gateway Device IGD 1 0 See Section 7 9 on page 136 for examples of installing and using UPnP 122 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 7 Home Networking 7 1 2 3 About File Sharing Workgroup name This is the name given to a set of computers that are connected on a network and share resources such as a printer or files Windows automatically assigns the workgroup name when you set up a network Shares When settings are set to default each USB device connected to the Device is given a folder called a share If a USB hard drive connected to the Device has more than one partition then each partition will be allocated a share You can also configure a share to be a sub folder or file on the USB device File System
110. Access type Internet Work network Connections Local Area Connection EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 4 Double click Local Area Connection and then select Properties Figure 177 Windows 7 Local Area Connection Status G w T Ei t Control Panel Network and Internet Network Connections Organize Disable this network device Diagnose this connection Rename this Bk Local Area Connection Bk Wireless Network Connection Unidentified network ae LYAEL_RT3062_AP1 4 af Broadcom NetXtreme Gigabit Eth fii 802 11n Wireless USB Adapter il Local Area Connection Status General Connection IPv4 Connectivity Mo network access IPve Connectivity Mo network access Media State Enabled Duration 00 04 36 Speed 100 0 Mbps Details Activity oor Au Received Packets 432 Pi Properties Ay Disable Diagnose Note During this procedure click Continue whenever Windows displays a screen saying that it needs your permission to continue EMG5324 D10A Users Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 5 Select Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP I Pv4 and then select Properties Figure 178 Windows 7 Local Area Connection Properties i Local Area Connection Properties Networking Connect using at Broadcom NetXtreme Gigabit Ethemet This connection uses the following items Ea Client for Microsoft Networks m G05 Packet Schedule
111. Blocker Prevent most pop up windows from appearing Block pop ups Settings 3 Type the IP address of your device the web page that you do not want to have blocked with the prefix http For example http 192 168 167 1 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Appendix C Pop up Windows JavaScript and Java Permissions 4 Click Add to move the IP address to the list of Allowed sites Figure 210 Pop up Blocker Settings Pop up Blocker Settings Exceptions Pop up are curently blocked fou can allow pop ups trom specific Web sites by adding the site to the list below Address of heb site to allow Http 192 168 1 1 Allowed sites Notifications and Filter Level Play a sound when a pop up i blocked Show Information Bar when a pop up i blocked Filter Level Medium Block most automatic pop ups Pop up Blocker FAG 5 Click Close to return to the Privacy screen 6 Click Apply to save this setting JavaScript If pages of the web configurator do not display properly in Internet Explorer check that JavaScript are allowed EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Appendix C Pop up Windows JavaScript and Java Permissions 1 In Internet Explorer click Tools Internet Options and then the Security tab Figure 211 Internet Options Security General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Select a Web content zone to specify its security settings 2 0 Inter
112. CII characters including spaces although trailing Spaces are truncated The domain name or e mail address is for identification purposes only and can be any string Remote ID Select IP to identify the remote IPSec router by its IP address Select DNS to identify the remote IPSec router by a domain name Select E mail to identify the remote IPSec router by an e mail address Content The configuration of the peer content depends on the peer ID type For IP type the IP address of the computer with which you will make the VPN connection If you configure this field to 0 0 0 0 or leave it blank the Device will use the address in the Secure Gateway Address field refer to the Secure Gateway Address field description For DNS or E mail type a domain name or e mail address by which to identify the remote IPSec router Use up to 31 ASCII characters including spaces although trailing Spaces are truncated The domain name or e mail address is for identification purposes only and can be any string It is recommended that you type an IP address other than 0 0 0 0 or use the DNS or E mail ID type in the following situations e When there is a NAT router between the two IPSec routers e When you want the Device to distinguish between VPN connection requests that come in from remote IPSec routers with dynamic WAN IP addresses Pre Shared Key Click the button to use a pre shared key for authentication and type in your pre shared key A pre shared key iden
113. Click the Delete icon to delete an existing rule Click Add to show a screen to enter the URL of web site or URL keyword to which the URL Keyword Device blocks access Click Delete to remove it EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 15 Parental Control 190 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Certificates 16 1 Overview The Device can use certificates also called digital IDs to authenticate users Certificates are based on public private key pairs A certificate contains the certificate owner s identity and public key Certificates provide a way to exchange public keys for use in authentication 16 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter e Use the Local Certificates screen to view and import the Device s CA signed certificates Section 16 2 on page 193 e Use the Trusted CA screen to save the certificates of trusted CAs to the Device You can also export the certificates to a computer Section 16 3 on page 195 e Use the VPN Certificates screen to view and import the Device s VPN certificates Section 16 6 on page 197 16 1 2 What You Need to Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter Certification Authorities A Certification Authority CA issues certificates and guarantees the identity of each certificate owner There are commercial certification authorities like CyberTrust or VeriSign and government certification authorities Public and Private Keys When using public key cryptology
114. Disabled N A This finishes the configuration of the AP 3 2 3 Configuring the Wireless Client This section describes how to connect the wireless client to a network 3 2 3 1 Connecting to a Wireless LAN The following sections show you how to join a wireless network using the ZyXEL utility as in the following diagram The wireless client is labeled C and the access point is labeled AP There are three ways to connect the client to an access point e Configure nothing and leave the wireless client to automatically scan for and connect to any available network that has no wireless security configured e Manually connect to a network e Configure a profile to have the wireless client automatically connect to a specific network or peer computer This example illustrates how to manually connect your wireless client to an access point AP which is configured for WPA PSK security and connected to the Internet Before you connect to the access EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials point you must know its Service Set Dentity SSID and WPA PSK pre shared key In this example the SSID is SSID_Example3 and the pre shared key is l12MyWPAPSKpresharedkey34 After you install the ZyXEL utility and then insert the wireless client follow the steps below to connect to a network using the Site Survey screen 1 Open the ZyXEL utility and click the Site Survey tab to open the screen shown next Site Informa
115. Disconnected D Local Area Connection joa N etwork cable unplugged After two minutes log in again and check your new firmware version in the Status screen If the upload was not successful an error screen will appear Click OK to go back to the Firmware Upgrade screen Figure 146 Error Message Software Upload Error The uploaded file was not accepted by the router Please return to the previous page and select a valid upgrade file EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Backup Restore 28 1 Overview The Backup Restore screen allows you to backup and restore device configurations You can also reset your device settings back to the factory default 28 2 The Backup Restore Screen Click Maintenance gt Backup Restore Information related to factory defaults backup configuration and restoring configuration appears in this screen as shown next Figure 147 Maintenance gt Backup Restore Backup Configuration Click Backup to save the current configuration of your system to your computer Backup Restore Configuration To restore a previously saved configuration file to your system browse to the location of the configuration file and click Upload FilePath Browse Upload Back to Factory Defaults Click Resetto clear all user entered configuration information and return to factory defaults After resetting the LAN IP address will be 192 168 1 1 DHCP will be reset to server Reset Backup Configurat
116. E E A AAA NA N EAEAN A PEN AE E E 145 II aA E A EEE 145 Oe Bp a Fe a A E 146 Pei reae a RUO se ae et reed ene Tea ene aoe rant PME erate mene fete w 147 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Table of Contents Chapter 9 RE of Sorne Q05 haa SEA aaa i ieee 149 ST a A eee Mere Nee Core Mee ee ene eer ee mee 149 SLI Wilt VOU a Domina SDI sesinin ai REEERE 149 Ake te o e e A A E E E E A T ees 149 72 me Goo General SGEE sessar a eee eee 150 STE GUE U ae ee are e a eai 151 gaT AU Edla COS I poseda cee eee eens 152 2a Ine Lone I Se agerira E EAE i 153 OA FR GOS Ce seice a S aE OE SS 155 9 5 The Q05 Montor Screg eeractarssrincasvaverixerveteadentamisauenneeasdupermerasnrcevanetoniatucnsetenersebiasavereccnnseneboasayents 158 AO T a FG EE naan 159 e EER eB aT T 159 E E E AT 160 T R E a E E SEEE E A 160 Chapter 10 Network Address Translation NAT cccccsecssseeceseeeesseeceneeeeaseseaneecesesoassecenseneassecenseoeasesonsesees 161 tM Ss 2 See er een eee nee eee rent Metre any Eert ne enema eer he ent riaeRs Tete eed orev vers i ete ee peer eer et ereeene erent Tetra 161 Bed Vere VOU Can Do MN NE cacti ER 161 10 1 2 What YoU Need TO KNOW csecesecapcdncsunsanaaainetionnctneioteseersisecicesieatiencionrtesee etacsacetee tiene 161 Te Te Fonran ee a ee eae eee 162 eee AR ee iriiria a a a 163 10 22 Tho Forn Forwarding Edit Gh s ersssiisiensaiedisnsrn ni a eaa 164 o ae Oe E T E E A 165 10A The Sessions SOOO ce a ee eee ene ee mee a eee eR sane ean
117. EMG5324 D10A Wireless N GbE VoIP IAD with USB User s Guide fault Login Details LAN IP https 192 168 1 1 Address User Admin account admin Name User account user Password Admin password 1234 User password 1234 Version 3 00 Edition 1 4 2012 www zyxel com Copyright 2012 ZyXEL Communications Corporation IMPORTANT READ CAREFULLY BEFORE USE KEEP THIS GUIDE FOR FUTURE REFERENCE Graphics in this book may differ slightly from the product due to differences in operating systems operating system versions or if you installed updated firmware software for your device Every effort has been made to ensure that the information in this manual is accurate Related Documentation e Quick Start Guide The Quick Start Guid shows how to connect the EMG5324 D10A and access the Web Configurator It information on setting up and configuring the EMG5324 D10A 2 EMG5324 D10A Users Guide Contents Overview Contents Overview WEE EE e AEAN saints eed NNE N ipa IAT E EE EE A N A EAN E A A A T ETTA 15 iglip sli ai g NAPE EEE AE EE EEEE bias E TAT ARIAT E AT A SE E A E E N 17 PN Me Tep C Onno seisine EEA 23 POOE A A AE AAA A E T 31 TEMIA FEIEIENCe inira A 73 BV Satus I spss a E EaR ASES 75 e E e E E A E A 81 C a a N E A EE alte Go aaicrmneniamtaatiormiesmereice 95 Home Networking c ccsccccsssccceescccsessccseucecseseecceueeecseeceeuseeseseeseaeecsaneesseaeeessaeeecsueeeesseeeeeseseeensasensanees 12
118. Guide 309 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 3 When the Network preferences pane opens select Ethernet from the list of available connection types Figure 189 Mac OS X 10 5 Network Preferences gt Ethernet 6 00O Network Location Automatic Status Not Connected The cable for Ethernet is connected but Internal Modem a L Not Connected P Prae boa your computer does not have an IF address Not Connected R Can gt e UsingDHCP Not Connected Configure Using DHCP FireWire Not Connected e AirPort gt Off x DNS Server Search Domains 802 1X WPA ZyXELO4 a fN rT Click the lock to prevent further changes Assistme Revert Apply 4 From the Configure list select Using DHCP for dynamically assigned settings 5 For statically assigned settings do the following e From the Configure list select Manually e In the IP Address field enter your IP address e In the Subnet Mask field enter your subnet mask 310 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address e In the Router field enter the IP address of your Device Figure 190 Mac OS X 10 5 Network Preferences gt Ethernet Location Automatic KH internal Modem a Not Connected Status Not Connected The cable for Ethernet is connected but PPPoE Gasp your computer does not have an IP address Not Connected _ Ethernet 4a l
119. H SCP SFTP Maximum key length supported is up to 4096 bits default is 2048 bits and the initialization time is proportional to key length You need to adjust your application timeout settings to adapt this variation Replace Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 61 Security gt Certificates gt Local Certificates LABEL DESCRIPTION Click Browse to find the certificate file you want to upload Current File This field displays the name used to identify this certificate It is recommended that you give each certificate a unique name Subject This field displays identifying information about the certificate s owner such as CN Common Name OU Organizational Unit or department O Organization or company and C Country It is recommended that each certificate have unique subject information Issuer This field displays identifying information about the certificate s issuing certification authority such as a common name organizational unit or department organization or company and country Valid From This field displays the date that the certificate becomes applicable The text displays in red and includes a Not Yet Valid message if the certificate has not yet become applicable Valid To This field displays the date that the certificate expires The text displays in red and includes an Expiring or Expired message if the certificate is about to expire or has already expired Cert Cl
120. HA1 SHA2 256 or SHA2 512 from the drop down list box MD5 Algorithm Message Digest 5 and SHA1 Secure Hash Algorithm and SHA2 are hash algorithms used to authenticate packet data The SHA1 algorithm is generally considered stronger than MD5 but is slower Select MD5 for minimal security and SHA 1 for more security SHA2 256 or SHA2 512 are part of the SHA2 set of cryptographic functions and they are considered even more secure than MD5 and SHAI1 You must choose a key group for phase 1 setup DH2 refers to Diffie Hellman Group 2 a 1024 bit random number DHS5 refers to Diffie Hellman Group5 a 1536 bit random number and DH14 refers to Diffie Hellman Group 14 providing 2048 bits of key strength SA Life Time Define the length of time before an IPSec SA automatically renegotiates in this field It Seconds may range from 60 to 3 000 000 seconds almost 35 days A short SA Life Time increases security by forcing the two VPN gateways to update the encryption and authentication keys However every time the VPN tunnel renegotiates all users accessing remote resources are temporarily disconnected Phase 2 Encryption Select 3DES AES 128 or AES 256 from the drop down list box Algorithm When you use one of these encryption algorithms for data communications both the sending device and the receiving device must use the same secret key which can be used to encrypt and decrypt the message or to generate and verify a message authentic
121. IP either A or B can act as a SIP user agent client to initiate a call A and B can also both act as a SIP user agent to receive the call Figure 124 SIP User Agent SIP Proxy Server A SIP proxy server receives requests from clients and forwards them to another server In the following example you want to use client device A to call someone who is using client device C 1 The client device A in the figure sends a call invitation to the SIP proxy server B 2 The SIP proxy server forwards the call invitation to C Figure 125 SIP Proxy Server B SIP Redirect Server A SIP redirect server accepts SIP requests translates the destination address to an IP address and sends the translated IP address back to the device that sent the request Then the client device that Originally sent the request can send requests to the IP address that it received back from the redirect server Redirect servers do not initiate SIP requests In the following example you want to use client device A to call someone who is using client device a EMG5324 D10A Users Guide Chapter 18 VoIP 1 Client device A sends a call invitation for C to the SIP redirect server B 2 The SIP redirect server sends the invitation back to A with C s IP address or domain name 3 Client device A then sends the call invitation to client device C Figure 126 SIP Redirect Server SIP Register Server A SIP register server maintains a database of SIP id
122. IP address 0 0 0 0 With this IP address only Address the telecommuter can initiate the IPSec tunnel Local IP Address Telecommuter A 192 168 2 12 192 168 1 10 Telecommuter B 192 168 3 2 Telecommuter C 192 168 4 15 Remote IP 192 168 1 10 0 0 0 0 N A Address 17 6 11 2 Telecommuters Using Unique VPN Rules Example In this example the telecommuters A B and C in the figure use IPSec routers with domain names that are mapped to their dynamic WAN IP addresses use Dynamic DNS to do this With aggressive negotiation mode see Section 17 6 6 on page 215 the Device can use the ID types and contents to distinguish between VPN rules Telecommuters can each use a separate VPN rule to simultaneously access a Device at headquarters They can use different IPSec parameters The local IP addresses or ranges of addresses of the rules configured on the Device at headquarters can overlap The local IP addresses of the rules configured on the telecommuters IPSec routers should not overlap See the following table and figure for an example where three telecommuters each use a different VPN rule for a VPN connection with a Device located at headquarters The Device at headquarters HQ in the figure identifies each incoming SA by its ID type and content and uses the appropriate VPN rule to establish the VPN connection 218 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 17 VPN The Device at headquarters can also initiate VPN connections to th
123. IP address of the Device the default IP address of the Device is 192 168 1 1 and press ENTER The share folder Bob s_ Share is available Address 4 was2ae811 O S Comments Network Tasks G Bob s_Share Bob s Share a Add or af USE Storage USB Storage a network place z a p T Printers and Faxes Shows installed printers and fax printers and lt _ lt View network connections Set up a wireless network For a home or small office Ear Search Active Directory ia Show icons For networked UPnP devices Once you access Bob s_ Share via your Device you do not have to relogin unless you restart your computer 3 6 Using the Media Server Feature Use the media server feature to play files on a computer or on your television using DMA 2500 44 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials This section shows you how the media server feature works using the following media clients e Microsoft MS Windows Media Player Media Server works with Windows Vista and Windows 7 Make sure your computer is able to play media files music videos and pictures e ZyXEL DMA 2500 a digital media adapter You need to set up the DMA 2500 to work with your television TV Refer to the DMA 2500 Quick Start Guide for the correct hardware connections Before you begin connect the USB storage device containing the media files you want to play to the USB port of your Device 3 6 1 Configuring the Device Note The
124. MAC Address The MAC Media Access Control or Ethernet address on a LAN Local Area Network is unique to your computer six pairs of hexadecimal notation A network interface card such as an Ethernet adapter has a hardwired address that is assigned at the factory This address follows an industry standard that ensures no other adapter has a similar address IP Address This field displays the IP address relative to the field listed above Reserve Select the check box in the heading row to automatically select all check boxes or select the check box es in each entry to have the Device always assign the selected entry ies s IP address es to the corresponding MAC address es and host name s You can select up to 128 entries in this table Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings Refresh Click Refresh to reload the DHCP table If you click Add new static lease in the Static DHCP screen the following screen displays Figure 39 Static DHCP Add MAC Address IP Address soon Ea The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 24 Static DHCP Add LABEL DESCRIPTION MAC Address Enter the MAC address of a computer on your LAN IP Address Enter the IP address that you want to assign to the computer on your LAN with the MAC address that you will also specify 126 EMG5324 D10A Users Guide Chapter 7 Home Networking Table 24
125. MTP enables you to move messages from one e mail server to another SNMP TCP UDP Simple Network Management Program SNMP TRAPS TCP UDP Traps for use with the SNMP RFC 1215 SQL NET TCP 1521 Structured Query Language is an interface to access data on many different types of database systems including mainframes midrange systems UNIX systems and network servers TCP UDP Secure Shell Remote Login Program STRM WORKS 1558 Stream Works Protocol UDP SYSLOG 514 Syslog allows you to send system logs to a UNIX server TACACS UDP Login Host Protocol used for Terminal Access Controller Access Control System TELNET TCP 23 Telnet is the login and terminal emulation protocol common on the Internet and in UNIX environments It operates over TCP IP networks Its primary function is to allow users to log into remote host systems TFTP UDP Trivial File Transfer Protocol is an Internet file transfer protocol similar to FTP but uses the UDP User Datagram Protocol rather than TCP Transmission Control Protocol VDOLI VE 7000 Another videoconferencing solution EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Appendix E Common Services 356 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide IPv6 Overview IPv6 Internet Protocol version 6 is designed to enhance IP address size and features The increase in Pv6 address size to 128 bits from the 32 bit Pv4 address allows up to 3 4 x 1028 IP addresses IPv6 Addressing The 128 bit Pv6 address is
126. N gt Setup gt Edit gt Advanced Setup Securite Protocol Pre share Key Ocertificate Encrption Algorithm Authentication Algorithm DH of Lite Timerseconds Phase Encriptian Algorithm Authentication Algorithm 5A Lite Timefseconds Perfect Forward Serec PFS DPD DPD Active 12345678 Zy EL Advanced Setting Phase SDES MDS m Diffie Hellman Group w 56400 3DES MDS 3600 MONE The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 69 Security gt VPN gt Setup gt Edit gt Advanced Setup LABEL Phase 1 Encryption Algorithm DESCRIPTION Select 3DES AES128 or AES256 from the drop down list box When you use one of these encryption algorithms for data communications both the sending device and the receiving device must use the same secret key which can be used to encrypt and decrypt the message or to generate and verify a message authentication code The DES encryption algorithm uses a 56 bit key Triple DES 3DES is a variation on DES that uses a 168 bit key As a result 3DES is more secure than DES It also requires more processing power resulting in increased latency and decreased throughput This implementation of AES uses a 128 bit key and a 256 bit key AES is faster than 3DES EMG5324 D10A Users Guide Chapter 17 VPN Table 69 Security gt VPN gt Setup gt Edit gt Advanced Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Authentication Select MD5 S
127. N servers for example web or FTP that you can make visible to the outside world even though NAT makes your whole inside network appear as a single computer to the outside world Finding Out More See Section 10 7 on page 168 for advanced technical information on NAT 10 2 The Port Forwarding Screen Use the Port Forwarding screen to forward incoming service requests to the server s on your local network You may enter a single port number or a range of port numbers to be forwarded and the local IP address of the desired server The port number identifies a service for example web service is on port 80 and FTP on port 21 In some cases such as for unknown services or where one server can Support more than one service for example both FTP and web service it might be better to specify a range of port numbers You can allocate a server IP address that corresponds to a port or a range of ports The most often used port numbers and services are shown in Appendix E on page 353 Please refer to RFC 1700 for further information about port numbers Note Many residential broadband ISP accounts do not allow you to run any server processes such as a Web or FTP server from your location Your ISP may periodically check for servers and may suspend your account if it discovers any active services at your location If you are unsure refer to your ISP Configuring Servers Behind Port Forwarding Example Let s say you want to assign ports 21
128. N LAN1 LAN2 LANS LAN4 ZyAEL_ 1824 ZyXEL_1825 The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 50 Network Setting gt Interface Group LABEL DESCRIPTION Add New Click this button to create a new interface group Interface Group This shows the descriptive name of the group WAN Interface This shows the WAN interfaces in the group LAN LAN Interfaces This shows the LAN interfaces in the group N Click the Edit icon to modify the settings Click the Delete icon to remove the group EMG5324 D10A Users Guide 1 75 Chapter 12 Interface Group 12 2 1 Interface Group Configuration Click the Add New Interface Group button in the Interface Group screen to open the following screen Use this screen to create a new interface group Note An interface can belong to only one group at a time Figure 84 Interface Group Configuration Group Name WAN Interfaces used in the grouping ETH type EtherWaAN1 ee ees LAN LAN2 LAN LAN4 YAEL_1624 ZyXEL_1825 yAEL_1826 OO O O O O 0 0 yAEL_1827 Note if a vendor ID is configured for a specific client device please REBOOT the client device attached to the modem to allow itto obtain an appropriate IP address Apply Back The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 51 Interface Group Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Group Name Enter a name to identify this group You can enter
129. NEW ICQ wer SSS 5190 An Internet chat program NEWS ae sd A protocol for news groups NFS UDP 2049 Network File System NFS is a client server distributed file service that provides transparent file sharing for network environments NNTP TCP 119 Network News Transport Protocol is the delivery mechanism for the USENET newsgroup service PING User Defined 1 Packet INternet Groper is a protocol that sends out ICMP echo requests to test whether or not a remote host is reachable POP3 TCP Post Office Protocol version 3 lets a client computer get e mail from a POP3 server through a temporary connection TCP IP or other PPTP TCP Point to Point Tunneling Protocol enables secure transfer of data over public networks This is the control channel PPTP_ TUNNEL User Defined PPTP Point to Point Tunneling Protocol GRE enables secure transfer of data over public networks This is the data channel REAL AUDIO TCP 7070 A streaming audio service that enables real time sound over the web REXEC i Remote Execution Daemon C a E TCP UDP The Real Time Streaming media control Protocol RTSP is a remote control for multimedia on the Internet SFTP wer e l Simple File Transfer Protocol EMG5324 D10A Users Guide Appendix E Common Services Table 121 Commonly Used Services continued NAME o PROTOCOL PORT S DESCRIPTION SMTP TCP 25 Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is the message exchange standard for the Internet S
130. NNECTION N CLIENT 1 AP1 ENROLLEE CLIENT 2 350 EMG5324 D10A Users Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs In step 3 you add another access point AP2 to your network AP2 is out of range of AP1 so you cannot use AP1 for the WPS handshake with the new access point However you know that Client 2 supports the registrar function so you use it to perform the WPS handshake instead Figure 227 WPS Example Network Step 3 EXISTING CONNECTION CLIENT 1 AP1 REGISTRAR CLIENT 2 ENROLLEE AP1 Limitations of WPS WPS has some limitations of which you should be aware e WPS works in Infrastructure networks only where an AP and a wireless client communicate It does not work in Ad Hoc networks where there is no AP e When you use WPS it works between two devices only You cannot enroll multiple devices simultaneously you must enroll one after the other For instance if you have two enrollees and one registrar you must set up the first enrollee by pressing the WPS button on the registrar and the first enrollee for example then check that it successfully enrolled then set up the second device in the same way e WPS works only with other WPS enabled devices However you can still add non WPS devices to a network you already set up using WPS WPS works by automatically issuing a randomly generated WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK pre shared key from the registrar device to the enrollee devices Whether the netw
131. Number use up to 127 printable ASCII characters Authentication Username Enter the user name for registering this SIP account exactly as it was given to you You can use up to 95 printable ASCII characters Password Enter the password for registering this SIP account exactly as it was given to you You can use up to 95 printable ASCII characters URL Type URL Type Select whether or not to include the SIP service domain name when the Device sends the SIP number SIP include the SIP service domain name TEL do not include the SIP service domain name Voice Features Primary Select the type of voice coder decoder codec that you want the Device to use G 711 Compression provides higher voice quality but requires more bandwidth 64 kbps Type oo e G 711MuLaw is typically used in North America and Japan Secondary G 711ALaw is typically used in Europe Compression G 729 only requires 8 kbps Type G 726 32 operates at 16 24 32 or 40 kbps Third G 722 operates at 48 56 and 64 kbps The Device must use the same codec as the peer When two SIP devices start a SIP session they must agree on a codec Compression Type Select the Device s first choice for voice coder decoder Select the Device s second choice for voice coder decoder Select None if you only want the Device to accept the first choice Select the Device s third choice for voice coder decoder Select None if you only want the Device to
132. O Standard 8 Confirm the IP address of the Device in the Printer Name or IP Address field 9 Select Raw under Protocol 10 The Port Number is automatically configured as 9100 Click OK to go back to the previous screen and click Next Configure Standard TCP IP Port Monitor Port Settings Port Manne IP 92 168 1 1 Printer Hame or IP Address 192 168 1 1 Frotacol cmn E i wre LT LE Fort Number 9100 LPR Settings yeye Hame F LPR Bite Counting Enabled l SNMP Status Enabled Eommunity Hane public SHME Device lpder f Tok ca EMG5324 D10A Users Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 11 Click Finish to close the wizard window Add Standard TCPSIP Printer Port Wizard Completing the Add Standard TCP IP Printer Port Wizard You have selected a port with the following characteristics SNMP No Protocol Raw Raw Device 192 168 1 1 Fort Hame IP_192 168 1 1 Adapter Type To complete this wizard click Finish 12 Select the make of the printer that you want to connect to the print server in the Manufacturer list of printers 13 Select the printer model from the list of Printers 14 If your printer is not displayed in the list of Printers you can insert the printer driver installation CD disk or download the driver file to your computer click Have Disk and install the new printer driver 15 Click Next to continue Add Printer Wizard Install Printer Software The manuf
133. OAE E 165 10 5 The Address Mapping Screen cccccccccccccessseeeeeecceceeauaeescseeeeeeeeeeesuaaseeeeeeeeeeeasaaaaaeeeeeeeseneenaaas 166 103 1 00 Eol Adaess Mapping RUE gene Mem semen el terial eneele te Sette ne nner fe Peni er ator irk oe none ok een ceeee re sree 167 Oo PR th A ici es 168 T PETA ROGO eg eae ect neste es emi nen aioe ets sc nec cg eee 168 Ms bP Aer re aa E nie aeialn ead ernie artigereeetis 168 Te ey iain sea peti attend taliva race petrenttecieee O 169 ee EL Re corse oor earacpenniens rasnesseenen tree ea rere 169 Chapter 11 Baada i PET E T A O aa E P E A E E eile a ein A A E dead aga 171 Di a E A eet 171 ma The DNS Roue SOE een eee eee eee nee cee ere eee en eee a ane nee otter oe aeeeee ee 172 Dee Pt Er UNS ee a paineveiandags tisiaistidiqasereisaligianeernieiat EA 172 Chapter 12 OF N aa E 175 EARS i EOI EAE EEIE E A OSIEA A Mere arr eer EIE Marr E E EEI EETA 175 8 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Table of Contents les The ae ae al tS e E E AE 175 T221 Merce GOUD CONOUG sscan E R 176 Chapter 13 P E N A A E nc deen 177 TAANE AAAA AEE ses einsaunesaeseeeeds 177 Tole eee YOU at OO We ae ETE EE E I EEE E A ETT 177 Toe o r u Need io RION sas e a ter cen ee eRe sever ee eRe 178 Ehe ME ee ai T piace tenateiaitepnienerelieiiaionierts 178 PUD me ea ba T ia T N ere ne pert 179 To E a N a EEA E 180 13 4 The Access Control Screen dass caventadivnaiuetaincnanotactauiereviiaraies talsanesnsabaspareeialaatsaetuetsiassnvedeavan
134. ON Laaa SES a current call on hold to place a second call Switch back to the call if there is no second call Flash Drop the call presently on hold or reject an incoming call which is waiting for answer Flash Disconnect the current phone connection and answer the incoming call or resume with caller presently on hold Flash 1 Switch back and forth between two calls 2 Put a current call on hold to answer an incoming call 3 Separate the current three way conference call into two individual calls one is on line the other is on hold Flash 3 Create three way conference connection Transfer the call to another phone European Call Hold Call hold allows you to put a call A on hold by pressing the flash key If you have another call press the flash key and then 2 to switch back and forth between caller A and B by putting either one on hold Press the flash key and then 0 to disconnect the call presently on hold and keep the current call on line Press the flash key and then 1 to disconnect the current call and resume the call on hold If you hang up the phone but a caller is still on hold there will be a remind ring European Call Waiting This allows you to place a call on hold while you answer another incoming call on the same telephone directory number If there is a second call to a telephone number you will hear a call waiting tone Take one of the following actions e Reject the second
135. Open the web configurator 3 Click VolP gt SIP to open the SIP Service Provider screen Select ChangeMe from the Service Provider Selection drop down list box 4 Select the Enable check box of SIP Service Provider and enter ServiceProviderl as the SIP Service Provider Name Enter the SIP Server Address REGISTER Server Address and SIP Service Domain provided by your ISP accordingly Click Apply SIP Service Provider Selection Service Provider Selection Changele K elete General SIP Service Provider MV Enable SIP Service Provider SIP Service Provider Name ServiceProvidert SIP Local Port 5060 1025 65535 SIP Server Address sip example com SIP Server Port 5060 1025 65535 REGISTER Server Address registersip example cot REGISTER Server Port 5060 1025 65535 SIP Service Domain lsip example com Apply Cancel 40 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 5 Goto the SIP Account screen click the Edit icon of SIP 1 Add new SIP account ServiceProvidert ChangeMe ServiceProvidert ChangeMe 6 Select the Active SIP Account check box then enter the SIP Account Number Username and Password Leave other settings as default 7 Click Apply to save your settings SIP Service Provider Selection Service Provider Selection ServiceProvidert SIP Account Selection SIP Account Selection SIP 1 General SIP Account IY Active SIP Account SIP Account Number E 2345678 Authenticato
136. P lude Exclude The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 37 Class Setup Add Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Class Configuration Select to enable this classifier EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 9 Quality of Service QoS Table 37 Class Setup Add Edit continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Enter a descriptive name of up to 32 printable English keyboard characters including Spaces Select an existing number for where you want to put this classifier to move the classifier to the number you selected after clicking Apply Classification Order Select Last to put this rule in the back of the classifier list Forward to Select a WAN interface through which traffic of this class will be forwarded out If you select Interface Unchange the Device forward traffic of this class according to the default routing table DSCP Mark This field is available only when you select the Ether Type check box in Criteria Configuration Basic section If you select Mark enter a DSCP value with which the Device replaces the DSCP field in the packets If you select Unchange the Device keep the DSCP field in the packets 802 1p Mark Select a priority level with which the Device replaces the IEEE 802 1p priority field in the packets If you select Unchange the Device keep the 802 1 priority field in the packets VLAN ID If you select Remark enter a VLAN ID number between 1 and 4095 with which the Device
137. PEM Base 64 encoded PKCS 7 This Privacy Enhanced Mail PEM format uses 64 ASCII characters to convert a binary PKCS 7 certificate into a printable form Note Be careful not to convert a binary file to text during the transfer process It is easy for this to occur since many programs use text files by default 16 1 3 Verifying a Certificate Before you import a trusted CA or trusted remote host certificate into the Device you should verify that you have the actual certificate This is especially true of trusted CA certificates since the Device also trusts any valid certificate signed by any of the imported trusted CA certificates 192 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 3 4 Chapter 16 Certificates You can use a certificate s fingerprint to verify it A certificate s fingerprint is a message digest calculated using the MD5 or SHA1 algorithms The following procedure describes how to check a certificate s fingerprint to verify that you have the actual certificate Browse to where you have the certificate saved on your computer Make sure that the certificate has a cer or crt file name extension Figure 95 Certificates on Your Computer BR EdLondon Office cer L4 Office crt Certificates Double click the certificate s icon to open the Certificate window Click the Details tab and scroll down to the Thumbprint Algorithm and Thumbprint fields Figure 96 Certificate Details Certificate Gener
138. PSK are the same The only difference between the two is that WPA PSK WPA2 PSK uses a simple common password instead of user specific credentials Type a pre shared key from 8 to 63 case sensitive ASCII characters or 64 hexidecimal digits Click more to show more fields in this section Click hide more to hide them more EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 101 Chapter 6 Wireless Table 13 Wireless gt General WPA 2 PSK continued LABEL DESCRIPTION WPA PSK This field appears when you choose WPA PSK2 as the Security Mode Compatible Check this field to allow wireless devices using WPA PSK security mode to connect to your Device The Device supports WPA PSK and WPA2 PSK simultaneously Encryption If the security mode is WPA PSK the encryption mode is set to TKIP to enable Temporal Key Integrity Protocol TKIP security on your wireless network If the security mode is WPA PSK2 and WPA PSK Compatible is disabled the encryption mode is set to AES to enable Advanced Encryption System AES security on your wireless network AES provides superior security to TKIP If the security mode is WPA PSK2 and WPA PSK Compatible is enabled the encryption mode is set to TKI PAES MIX to allow both TKIP and AES types of security in your wireless network 6 2 4 WPA 2 Authentication The WPA2 security mode is currently the most robust form of encryption for wireless networks It requires a RADIUS server to authenticate user credentials
139. Region Change keyboards or other input methods Change display language D GOU F b Control Panel Network and Internet p Search File Edit View Tools Help Control Panel Home System and Maintenance Security Network and Internet ioa i Internet Options Hardware and Sound Connect to the Internet Programs EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Network and Sharing Center ee z ennect to a network View network computers and devices Change your homepage Delete browsing history and cookies Adda device to the network Setup file sharing Manage browser add ons 297 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 4 Click Manage network connections Figure 170 Windows Vista Network and Sharing Center PF N 5 G E e Network and Internet p Network and sharing Center k File Edit View Tools Help a Network and Sharing Center View computers and devices Connect to a network Set up a creanne tinn of network 4 jj T 3 amp fi Manage network connections TWPC99111 Internet Diagnose ana repair This computer Not connected 5 Right click Local Area Connection and then select Properties Figure 171 Windows Vista Network and Sharing Center LAN or High 5asadIntamatt Loca Collapse group Left AIror A a y onm x 4 be Expand all groups Collapse all groups Disable eb EUS Diagnose Bridge Connections Create shorteut Telete Rename D Note During
140. S on both devices within two minutes Note Use the configuration utility to activate WPS not the push button on the device itself 5 On a computer connected to the wireless client try to connect to the Internet If you can connect WPS was successful If you cannot connect check the list of associated wireless clients in the AP s configuration utility If you see the wireless client in the list WPS was successful EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 347 Appendix D Wireless LANs The following figure shows a WPS enabled wireless client installed in a notebook computer connecting to the WPS enabled AP via the PIN method Figure 223 Example WPS Process PIN Method ENROLLEE REGISTRAR WITHIN 2 MINUTES SECURE EAP TUNNEL A 10 P ee eee errr LL SSID WPA 2 PSK COMMUNICATION ry We How WPS Works When two WPS enabled devices connect each device must assume a specific role One device acts as the registrar the device that supplies network and security settings and the other device acts as the enrollee the device that receives network and security settings The registrar creates a secure EAP Extensible Authentication Protocol tunnel and sends the network name SSID and the WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK pre shared key to the enrollee Whether WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK is used depends on the standards supported by the devices If the registrar is already part of a network it sends the existing information If not it generates th
141. SL Line ba ATM Status ATM Loopback Test DSL Line Status Reset ADSL Line The following table describes the fields in this screen 2 2 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Troubleshooting 30 1 Overview This chapter offers some suggestions to solve problems you might encounter The potential problems are divided into the following categories Power Hardware Connections and LEDs Device Access and Login Internet Access Wireless Internet Access Phone Calls and VoIP USB Device Connection UPnP 30 2 Power Hardware Connections and LEDs The Device does not turn on None of the LEDs turn on 1 Make sure the Device is turned on 2 Make sure you are using the power adaptor or cord included with the Device 3 Make sure the power adaptor or cord is connected to the Device and plugged in to an appropriate power source Make sure the power source is turned on 4 Turn the Device off and on 5 Ifthe problem continues contact the vendor One of the LEDs does not behave as expected 1 Make sure you understand the normal behavior of the LED See Section 1 6 on page 20 2 Check the hardware connections See the Quick Start Guide EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 2 3 Chapter 30 Troubleshooting 3 Inspect your cables for damage Contact the vendor to replace any damaged cables 4 Turn the Device off and on 5 Ifthe problem continues contact the vendor 30 3 Device Access and Login forgot the IP
142. Server Secondary DNS Enter the second DNS server address assigned by the ISP Server I Pv6 1Pv6 Address This section is not available when you select I Pv4 Only in the I Pv6 I Pv4 Mode field no I Pv6 Select this option if you want to have the Device use the Pv6 prefix from the connected Address Prefix router s Router Advertisement RA to generate an IPv6 address Automatically Enable Non Select this option if you want to allow non temporary addresses temporary Addresses Enable Prefix Select this to enable Prefix Delegation This enables an IPv6 router to use the Pv6 prefix Delegation network address received from the ISP or a connected uplink router for its LAN Static Pv6 Select this option if you have a fixed IPv6 address assigned by your ISP Address EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 87 Chapter 5 Broadband Table 6 Broadband Add Edit Routing continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Nie Enter the static Pv6 address provided by your ISP using colon hexadecimal notation Address IPv6 DNS Select whether you want to obtain the IPv6 DNS server addresses automatically or Server configure them manually Obtain Pv6 Select this to have the Device get the Pv6 DNS server addresses from the ISP DNS info automatically Automatically Use the Select this to have the Device use the DNS server addresses you configure manually following Static DNS IPv6 Address Primary Enter the first Pv6 DNS server addre
143. Setup Wireless Enable Wireless LAN Wireless Network Settings Wireless Network NameSsiD ZyXEL_668D Hide SSID 02 13 49 11 66 8d Security Level More Secure Recommended gm Security Mode WPA2 PSK gt Enter 6 63 characters a z A A and 0 9 or 64 hexadecimal digits fa f A F and 0 9 Pre Shared Key QIFYATCVHF 49 more Apply Back The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 16 Wireless gt More AP Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Wireless Network Setup Wireless Select the Enable Wireless LAN check box to activate the wireless LAN Wireless Network Settings EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 6 Wireless Table 16 Wireless gt More AP Edit continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Wireless The SSID Service Set Dentity identifies the service set with which a wireless device is Network Name associated Wireless devices associating to the access point AP must have the same SSID SSID Enter a descriptive name up to 32 English keyboard characters for the wireless LAN Hide SSID Select this check box to hide the SSID in the outgoing beacon frame so a station cannot obtain the SSID through scanning using a site survey tool BSSID This shows the MAC address of the wireless interface on the Device when wireless LAN is enabled Security Level Security Mode Select Basic WEP or More Secure WPA 2 PSK WPA 2 to add security on this wireless network The wireless
144. Step 1 Click WPS button WPS Step 1 Enter the PIN of your new wireless client device and then click Register Step 2 Press the WPS button on your new wireless client Enter PIN here Register device within 120 seconds Step 2 Press the WFS button on your new wireless client device within 120 seconds WPS Configuration Summary AP PIN Status 802 11 Mode SSID Security Note 11403647 Generate New PIN Not Configured This feature is available only when WPA PSK WPA2 PSK or No Security mode is configured The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 17 Network Setting gt Wireless gt WPS LABEL DESCRIPTION Add a new device with WPS Method Method 1 PBC WPS Method 2 PIN Use this section to set up a WPS wireless network using Push Button Configuration PBC Click this button to add another WPS enabled wireless device within wireless range of the Device to your wireless network This button may either be a physical button on the outside of device or a menu button similar to the WPS button on this screen Note You must press the other wireless device s WPS button within two minutes of pressing this button Use this section to set up a WPS wireless network by entering the PIN Personal Identification Number of the client into the Device Enter the PIN of the device that you are setting up a WPS connection with and click Register to authenticate and add the wireless de
145. System System Use this screen to configure the Device s name domain name management inactivity time out Time Time Setting Time Setting Use this screen to change your Device s time and date Z ol Setting Log Setting Use this screen to select which logs and or immediate alerts your device is to record You can also set it to e mail the logs to you Firmware Firmware Use this screen to upload firmware to your Device Upgrade Upgrade EMG5324 D10A Users Guide Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator Table 2 Navigation Panel Summary continued LINK TAB FUNCTION Backup Backup Restore Use this screen to backup and restore your device s configuration Restore settings or reset the factory default settings Use this screen to reboot the Device without turning the power off Ping TraceRoute Use this screen to test the connections to other devices Auto Provision Auto Provision Use this screen to enable and configure the Device s auto provisioning feature EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator 30 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Tutorials 3 1 Overview This chapter contains the following tutorials e How to Set up a Wireless Network e Setting Up NAT Port Forwarding e How to Make a VoIP Call e Using the File Sharing Feature e Using the Media Server Feature e Using the Print Server Feature e Configuring the MAC Address Filter e Configuring Static Rout
146. Use the menu items on the navigation panel to open screens to configure Device features The following table describes each menu item Table 2 Navigation Panel Summary Connection Status This screen shows the network status of the Device and computers devices connected to it Network Setting Broadband Broadband Use this screen to view and modify your WAN interface You can also configure ISP parameters WAN IP address assignment DNS servers and other advanced properties 3G Backup Use this screen to configure the 3G WAN connection 26 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator Table 2 Navigation Panel Summary continued Wireless General Use this screen to turn the wireless connection on or off specify the SSID s and configure the wireless LAN settings and WLAN authentication security settings Use this screen to configure multiple BSSs on the Device Use this screen to use WPS Wi Fi Protected Setup to establish a wireless connection WMM Use Use this screen to enable or disable Wi Fi MultiMedia WMM screen to enable or disable Wi Fi MultiMedia WMM aa Use le cadence screen to configure when the Device enables or disables the wireless LAN Channel Status Use this screen to scan wireless LAN channel noises and view the results Home _ LAN Setup Use this screen to configure LAN TCP IP settings and other advanced Networking properties Static DHCP Use this screen to assign
147. User s Guide Chapter 30 Troubleshooting 4 Reset the device to its factory defaults and try to access the Device with the default IP address See Section 1 7 on page 22 5 If the problem continues contact the network administrator or vendor or try one of the advanced suggestions Advanced Suggestions e Try to access the Device using another service such as Telnet If you can access the Device check the remote management settings and firewall rules to find out why the Device does not respond to HTTP e f your computer is connected to the WAN port or is connected wirelessly use a computer that is connected to a ETHERNET port can see the Login screen but cannot log in to the Device 1 Make sure you have entered the user name and password correctly The default user name is admin These fields are case sensitive so make sure Caps Lock Is not on 2 You cannot log in to the web configurator while someone is using Telnet to access the Device Log out of the Device in the other session or ask the person who is logged in to log out 3 Turn the Device off and on 4 I f this does not work you have to reset the device to its factory defaults See Section 30 2 on page 273 cannot Telnet to the Device See the troubleshooting suggestions for cannot see or access the Login screen in the web configurator Ignore the suggestions about your browser cannot use FTP to upload download the configuration f
148. Virtual Private Networking 0 0 ME Space used by installed components 4 4 MB Space required 0 0 ME Space available on disk B66 MB Description Universal Plug and Play enables seamless connectivity and communication between Windows and intelligent appliances Details 4 Click OK to go back to the Add Remove Programs Properties window and click Next 5 Restart the computer when prompted Installing UPnP in Windows XP Follow the steps below to install the UPnP in Windows XP 1 Click Start and Control Panel 2 Double click Network Connections 3 Inthe Network Connections window click Advanced in the main menu and select Optional Networking Components Figure 50 Network Connections B Network Connections File Edit View Favorites Tools enti Help Operator Assisted Dialing Hi F an Dial up Preferences Address e Metwork Connections Network Identification Bridge Connections Advanced Settings Optional Wetworking Components EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 137 Chapter 7 Home Networking 4 The Windows Optional Networking Components Wizard window displays Select Networking Service in the Components selection box and click Details Figure 51 Windows Optional Networking Components Wizard Windows Optional Networking Components Wizard Windows Components fou can add or remove components of Windows sP To add of remove a component click the checkbor A shaded bos means that only p
149. VolP Phone Event VolP Misc System D WAN DHCP M ETHER M System Maintenance LC Remote Management M TR 089 NTP C DDNS NAT D Attack C ACL EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 26 Log Setting The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 102 Maintenance gt Log Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION Syslog Setting Syslog Logging The Device sends a log to an external syslog server Select the Enable check box to enable syslog logging Syslog Server Enter the server name or IP address of the syslog server that will log the selected categories of logs UDP Port Enter the port number used by the syslog server Active Log and Select Level Log Category Select the categories of logs that you want to record Log Level Select the severity level of logs that you want to record If you want to record all logs select ALL Apply Click Apply to save your changes Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 27 Firmware Upgrade 27 1 Overview This chapter explains how to upload new firmware to your Device You can download new firmware releases from your nearest ZyXEL FTP site or www zyxel com to use to upgrade your device s performance Only use firmware for your device s specific model Refer to the label on the bottom of your Device 27 2 The Firmware Upgrade Screen Click Maintenance gt Firmware Upgrade to open the following scre
150. WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK is used depends on the standards supported by the devices If the registrar is already part of a network it sends the existing information If not it generates the SSID and WPA 2 PSK randomly The following figure shows a WPS enabled client installed in a notebook computer connecting to a WPS enabled access point Figure 33 How WPS works ACTIVATE ACTIVATE WPS WPS WITHIN 2 MINUTES f at E Lp N E V f f gt WPS HANDSHAKE SECURE TUNNEL 5 gt SECURITY INFO lr COMMUNICATION lt lt A R Y AC The roles of registrar and enrollee last only as long as the WPS setup process is active two minutes The next time you use WPS a different device can be the registrar if necessary The WPS connection process is like a handshake only two devices participate in each WPS transaction If you want to add more devices you should repeat the process with one of the existing networked devices and the new device Note that the access point AP is not always the registrar and the wireless client is not always the enrollee All WPS certified APs can be a registrar and so can some WPS enabled wireless clients By default a WPS devices is unconfigured This means that it is not part of an existing network and can act as either enrollee or registrar if it supports both functions If the registrar is unconfigured the security settings it transmits to the enrollee are randomly
151. _192 168 1 1 Model HP DeskJet 12200 Default es Test page Yes To close this wizard click Finish Add a New Printer Using Macintosh OS X Complete the following steps to set up a print server driver on your Macintosh computer 1 Click the Print Center icon located in the Macintosh Dock a place holding a series of icons Shortcuts at the bottom of the desktop Proceed to step 6 to continue If the Print Center icon is not in the Macintosh Dock proceed to the next step 2 On your desktop double click the Macintosh HD icon to open the Macintosh HD window Macintosh HD 8 ft oO A Computer Home Favorites Applications 12 items 19 31 GB available 4 Applications Applications Mac O 9 Users Documents Library System 62 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 4 Double click the Utilities folder 6 0o Y Applications lt o a Ay A Back Forward Computer Home Favorites Applications 39 items 19 31 GB available Address Book Calculator vo es i a DVD Player 5 0 00 J utilities gt o mMm Btw A Back Forward Computer Home Favorites Applications 30 items 19 31 GB available ry 5 pa Keychain Access Netinfo Manager Network Utility amp ODEC Administrator R Process Viewer 6 Click the Add icon at the top of the screen Printer List a Status Stylus C43 Stopped 7 Setup your printer in the Printer List configuration screen Select IP Printing fr
152. able 96 System Monitor gt VoIP Status continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Status eee field displays the current state of the phone call Idle There are no current VoIP calls incoming calls or outgoing calls being made Dial The callee s phone is ringing Ring The phone is ringing for an incoming VoIP call Process There is a VoIP call in progress DISC The callee s line is busy the callee hung up or your phone was left off the hook This field displays what voice codec is being used for a current VoIP call through a phone port Peer Number This field displays the SIP number of the party that is currently engaged in a VoIP call through a phone port Phone Status This field This field displays the phone accounts of the Device the phone accounts of the Device Outgoing This field ee eee ee eee eo the SIP number that you use to make calls on this phone port Number This field displays the SIP number that you use to receive calls on this phone port Number Phone State This field shows whether or the phone connected to the subscriber port is on hook ONHOOK or off hook OFFHOOK EMG5324 D10A User s Guide User Account 21 1 Overview You can configure system password for different user accounts in the User Account screen 21 2 The User Account Screen Use the User Account screen to configure system password Click Maintenance gt User Account to open the following screen Figure 136 Maintenance g
153. accept the first or second choice ue Enter the loudness that the Device uses for speech that it sends to the peer device Volume Control Minimum is the quietest and Maximum is the loudest Listening Enter the loudness that the Device uses for speech that it receives from the peer device Volume Control Minimum is the quietest and Maximum is the loudest Active G 168 Select this if you want to eliminate the echo caused by the sound of your voice Echo reverberating in the telephone receiver while you talk Cancellation Active VAD Select this if the Device should stop transmitting when you are not speaking This reduces Voice Active the bandwidth the Device uses Detector Call Features Send Caller ID Select this if you want to send identification when you make VoIP phone calls Clear this if you do not want to send identification Active Call Select this to enable call transfer on the Device This allows you to transfer an incoming call Transfer that you have answered to another phone EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 18 VoIP Table 81 SIP Account Edit continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Call Select this to enable call waiting on the Device This allows you to place a call on hold while Waiting you answer another incoming call on the same telephone directory number Active Call Specify a time of seconds that the Device waits before rejecting the second call if you do not Waiting Reject answer it T
154. accounts Use this screen to select your location oll Rule Speed Dial Use this screen to configure speed dial for SIP phone numbers that you Call often FXO FXO Device Use this screen to set up the PSTN line you use to make regular phone calls System Monitor oa System Log Use this screen to view the Device s system logs Phone Log Use this screen to view the Device s phone logs VolP Call History Use this screen to view the Device s VoIP call Use this screen to view the Device s VoIP call history Traffic Status Use ee U screen to view the status of all network traffic going through the WAN port of the Device Use this screen to view the status of all network traffic going through the LAN ports of the Device Use this screen to view the status of NAT sessions on the Device 3G Backup Use this screen to view the status of 3G Backup on the Device VoIP Status VoIP Status Use this screen to view the SIP phone and call status of the Device Maintenance Users Account Account Users Account Account Use this screen to Use this screen to configure the passwords your user accounts the passwords Use this screen to configure the passwords your user accounts user accounts MGMT ee MGMT Use this screen to enable specific traffic directions for network services SNMP SNMP Use this screen to configure through which interface s and from which IP address es users can use SNMP to manage ie Device
155. acturer and model determine which printer software to use Select the manufacturer and model of your printer IF your printer came with an installation disk click Have Disk IF your printer ts not listed consult pour printer documentation for compatible printer software Manufacturer ia Printers Fujitsu e SaHP DeskJet 1220C a Ev HP DeskJet 1600C Gestetner ii HF a Sof HP DeskJet 1600CM PS oss so F w E This driver is digitally signed Windows Update Tell me why driver signing i important EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 16 If the following screen displays select Keep existing driver radio button and click Next if you already have a printer driver installed on your computer and you do not want to change it Otherwise select Replace existing driver to replace it with the new driver you selected in the previous screen and click Next Add Printer Wizard Use Existing Driver A diver is already installed for thie printer You can use or replace the existing driver HP DeskJet 12200 Do you want to keep the existing diver or use the new one O Replace existing driver 17 Type a name to identify the printer and then click Next to continue Add Printer Wizard Name Your Printer Tou must assign a name to this printer Type a name for this printer Because some programs do not support printer and server name combinations of more than 31 characters itis best to keep the name as short as
156. addresses manually configured If you do not configure a DNS server you must know the IP address of a computer in order to access it Apply Click Apply to save your changes Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings 7 3 The Static DHCP Screen This table allows you to assign IP addresses on the LAN to specific individual computers based on their MAC Addresses Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC Media Access Control address The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters for example 00 AO C5 00 00 02 7 3 1 Before You Begin Find out the MAC addresses of your network devices if you intend to add them to the Static DHCP screen EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 7 Home Networking Use this screen to change your Device s static DHCP settings Click Network Setting gt Home Networking gt Static DHCP to open the following screen Figure 38 Network Setting gt Home Networking gt Static DHCP Add new static lease twect37 4 02 OO 2421 7e 20096 192 168 1 58 Apply Cancel i Refresh The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 23 Network Setting gt Home Networking gt Static DHCP LABEL DESCRIPTION new static a this to add a new static DHCP entry lease PR This is the index number of the entry This field displays whether the client is connected to the Device This field displays the client host name
157. ail queue created in this example From Interface This is the interface from which the traffic will be coming from Select Lan Ether Type Select IP to identify the traffic source by its IP address or MAC address MAC Address Type the MAC address of your computer AA FF AA FF AA FF Type the MAC Mask if you know it IP Address Type the IP address of your computer 192 168 1 23 Type the IP Subnet Mask if you know it IP Protocol Select User defined and enter 25 as the IP Protocol This maps e mail traffic to queue 7 created in the previous screen see the IP Protocol field This also maps your computer s IP address and MAC address to queue 7 see the Source fields M Serice 70 EMG5324 D10A Users Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 4 Verify that the queue setup works by checking Network Setting gt QoS gt Monitor This shows the bandwidth allotted to e mail traffic compared to other network traffic Monitor Refresh Interval No Refresh Status Interface Monitor pimod 3900 Queue Monitor WAN _Default_Queue 0 LAN Default_Queue 0 Fast 0 Active user WAR 0 Passive user 0 Slow l 0 3 11 Access the Device Using DDNS If you connect your Device to the Internet and it uses a dynamic WAN IP address it is inconvenient for you to manage the device from the Internet The Device s WAN IP address changes dynamically Dynamic DNS DDNS allows you to access the Device using a domain name http zyxelro
158. al Details Certification Path Show lt All gt Field Value subject Glenn Public key RSA 1024 Bits eikey Usage Digital Signature Certificate Signing iF Subject AiberttSthr ne DNS Name Glenn r N Basic Constraints Subject Type CA Path Length Cons 3 re Thumbprint algorithm shal Se Thumbprint BOA 2286 7960 FF92 52F4 6B4C A2 Copy to File Use a secure method to verify that the certificate owner has the same information in the Thumbprint Algorithm and Thumbprint fields The secure method may very based on your situation Possible examples would be over the telephone or through an HTTPS connection 16 2 Local Certificates Use this screen to view the Device s summary list of certificates and certification requests You can import the following certificates to your Device e Web Server This certificate secures HTTP connections EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 193 Chapter 16 Certificates e SIP TLS This certificate secures VoIP connections e SSH SCP SFTP This certificate secures remote connections Click Security gt Certificates to open the Local Certificates screen Figure 97 Security gt Certificates gt Local Certificates Replace PrivateKey Certificate file in PEM format WebServer Browse 2009 10 07 00 48 07 2019 10 05 00 48 07 os GMT GMT web pem O ZyXEL CN zyxel com tw O ZyXEL CN zyxel com tw SSH SCP SFTP Browse ssh rsa B note SS
159. al character s For example if you set the MAC address to 00 13 49 00 00 00 and the mask to ff ff ff 00 00 00 a packet with a MAC address of 00 13 49 12 34 56 matches this criteria IP Address Select the check box and enter the destination IP address in dotted decimal notation A blank source IP address means any source IP address IP Subnet Enter the destination subnet mask Mask If you select I Pv6 in the Ether Type field enter the destination s IPv6 address Address Prefix Enter the destination prefix length length Port Range If you select TCP or UDP in the IP Protocol field select the check box and enter the port number s of the source Select this option to exclude the packets that match the specified criteria from this classifier Others 802 1P This field is available only when you select 802 1Q in the Ether Type field Select this option and select a priority level between O and 7 from the drop down list box 0 is the lowest priority level and 7 is the highest VLAN ID This field is available only when you select 802 1Q in the Ether Type field IP Protocol This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field Select this option and select the protocol service type from TCP or UDP If you select User defined enter the protocol service type number IP Packet Length This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field Select this option and enter the
160. also VPN IPv6 83 357 addressing 83 357 DHCP 83 EUI 64 359 global address 358 interface ID 359 link local address 358 Neighbor Discovery Protocol 357 ping 357 prefix 83 357 prefix delegation 84 prefix length 83 357 Stateless autoconfiguration 360 unspecified address 358 ISP 82 iTunes server 130 ITU T 222 L LAN 121 and USB printer 131 client list 125 MAC address 126 LAN TCP IP 133 limitations wireless LAN 112 WPS 118 listening port 225 Local Area Network see LAN login passwords 23 logout 24 automatic 24 logs 243 263 375 Index MAC 77 185 MAC address 126 filter 111 MAC address filtering 185 MAC filter 185 managing the device good habits 20 using FTP See FTP Media access control 185 Media Access Control see MAC Address media server 130 activation 130 iTunes server 130 Message Integrity Check see MIC MIC 341 model name 77 MTU Multi Tenant Unit 92 multicast 92 multimedia 233 my IP address 202 N NAT 133 162 290 definitions 168 how it works 169 IPSec 211 SIP ALG 168 activation 168 traversal 212 what it does 169 negotiation mode 215 Network Address Translation see NAT network map 26 non proxy calls 232 O OK response 237 other documentation 2 outside header 213 376 P Pairwise Master Key PMK 342 343 passphrase 100 passwords 23 PBC 114 peer to peer calls 232 Per Hop Behavior see PHB PHB 160 238 phone book Speed dial 232
161. and Greenwich Mean Time GMT EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 25 Time Setting Table 101 Maintenance gt System gt Time Setting continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Daylight Daylight saving is a period from late spring to early fall when many countries set their clocks Savings ahead of normal local time by one hour to give more daytime light in the evening Select this option if you use Daylight Saving Time Start Date Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time starts if you selected Daylight Savings The o clock field uses the 24 hour format Here are a couple of examples Daylight Saving Time starts in most parts of the United States on the second Sunday of March Each time zone in the United States starts using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A M local time So in the United States you would select Second Sunday March and type 2 in the o clock field Daylight Saving Time starts in the European Union on the last Sunday of March All of the time zones in the European Union start using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment 1 A M GMT or UTC So in the European Union you would select Last Sunday March The time you type in the o clock field depends on your time zone In Germany for instance you would type 2 because Germany s time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC GMT 1 End Date Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time ends if you selected Daylight Savings The o clock field uses the 24 hour format H
162. and the ISP or carrier as it requires no specific configuration of the broadband modem at the customer site By implementing PPPoE directly on the Device rather than individual computers the computers on the LAN do not need PPPoE software installed since the Device does that part of the task Furthermore with NAT all of the LANs computers will have access IP Address Assignment A static IP is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you A dynamic IP is not fixed the ISP assigns you a different one each time The Single User Account feature can be enabled or disabled if you have either a dynamic or static IP However the encapsulation method assigned influences your choices for IP address and default gateway Introduction to VLANs A Virtual Local Area Network VLAN allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple logical networks Devices on a logical network belong to one group A device can belong to more than one group With VLAN a device cannot directly talk to or hear from devices that are not in the same group s the traffic must first go through a router EMG5324 D10A User s Guide ot Chapter 5 Broadband In Multi Tenant Unit MTU applications VLAN is vital in providing isolation and security among the subscribers When properly configured VLAN prevents one subscriber from accessing the network resources of another on the same LAN thus a user will not see the printers and hard disks of another user in the same bu
163. anges EMG5324 D10A User s Guide E Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address Verifying Settings Check your TCP IP properties by clicking System gt Administration gt Network Tools and then selecting the appropriate Network device from the Devices tab The Interface Statistics column shows data if your connection is working properly Figure 198 Ubuntu 8 Network Tools Tool Edit Help eee SS IOIO O a Network device IP Information Protocol IP Address Netrnask Prefix Broadcast Scope IPA TO 0524 13 255 290 00 0 10 0 2 255 IPw6 fe80 a00 27ffe30 e16c 64 Link Interface Information Interface Statistics Hardware address 08 00 27 30 e1 6c DERES 684 6 KiB Multicast Enabled Transmitted packets 1425 MTU 1500 Transmission errors O Link speed not available Received bytes 219 5 KiB State Active Received packets 1426 Reception errors 0 Collisions 0 Linux openSUSE 10 3 KDE This section shows you how to configure your computer s TCP IP settings in the K Desktop Environment KDE using the openSUSE 10 3 Linux distribution The procedure screens and file locations may vary depending on your specific distribution release version and individual configuration The following screens use the default openSUSE 10 3 installation Note Make sure you are logged in as the root administrator Follow the steps below to configure your computer IP address in the KDE 316 EMG5324 D10A User
164. aniangasiecayaidgesuadian suscensiendsnWreanmnciuecermeisadbentancinvie 274 Tc EN EA E E rg ENE E E E E EE EAT EA E E AE E E E EE 276 er eee Meme ee dininin TAA AEA TAAA 277 CURR agi ate e a a F oaa A ene ner ee ee ee ere are 278 tae USE te AY a irrananeect ren miarseperivictrasvanadeissteldnnebielanieapiensipreanataanienaarigiaeneds 279 0 ci og cee ee eee nea Rete E mn Ore nee Ae eee ce ene ee ay Seer re ee ere 279 Chapter 31 APU AM RTROOUAEI EEC EASING enc ces ct Gan a a anaes 281 Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting ciccssicrncivnanenpincatrinisecanianteiancassaintiedesiabisawinnidennaianeueneiadas 283 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address ccccccssseeeeeceeseeeeeceeeeeeeseeaeeeesaneeeeensaaes 293 Appendix C Pop up Windows JavaScript and Java Permissions ccccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeees 323 Pe DO wireless L NO seisarrsasaianenn nenni n E A AnA AEEA NARRAN ANNAN REANA aA DA AARAA DER PANA RERA ER 333 Append E Common SeyiCES gente ccna annae PA AEAEE AAS EERE EREEREER 353 2 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Table of Contents Pe F PVD atictepccaccnepetninetne pina vat anitanicd bet nrar aaa aKa ENAA Ea ENEE gina 357 Appendix G Legal Information cccccccsecccsssscecceneeccseeeecceueeesseueeecseueeessuueeeseeeeseaueeeseueeessagsessssags 369 E a A pA 373 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Table of Contents 14 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide PART User s Guide Introductio
165. ard 5 Click Start and then OK Dibbler a DACP r client Properties Local Computer o General Log On Recover Dependencies Service name DHCP y6Client Display name Dibbler a DHCP v6 client Description Dibbler a portable DHCPv6 This is DHCP Y6 client version 0 7 2 Path to executable C Program Files OHCPy6Clhent_dibblerdibbler client exe service d C 4Pr Startup type Automatic Service status Stopped fou can specify the start parameters that apply when you start the service from here Start parameters x 6 Now your computer can obtain an IPv6 address from a DHCPVv6 Server Example Enabling IPv6 on Windows 7 Windows 7 supports IPv6 by default DHCPv6 is also enabled when you enable IPv6 on a Windows 7 computer To enable IPv6 in Windows 7 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Appendix F IPv6 1 Select Control Panel gt Network and Sharing Center gt Local Area Connection 2 Select the Internet Protocol Version 6 TCP IPv6 checkbox to enable it 3 Click OK to save the change U Local Area Connection Properties Networking Connect using a Broadcom Netxtreme Gigabit Ethemet This connection uses the following items i OM Client for Microsoft Networks Install Uninsta Properties Description TCPYIP version 6 The latest version of the intemet protocol that provides communication across diverse interconnected networks 4 Click Close to e
166. art of the component will be installed To see what s included in a component click Details Components L 29 Management and Monitoring Tools Networking Services 0 3 ME LJ 29 Other Network File and Print Services Description Containg a variety of specialized network related services and protocols Total disk space required 0 0 ME Space available on disk 260 9 MB 5 Inthe Networking Services window select the Universal Plug and Play check box Figure 52 Networking Services Networking Services To add of remove a component click the check bos A shaded box means that only part of the component will be installed To see what s included in a component click Details subcomponents of Networking Services O RIF Listener OOMB fa Simple TCP IP 5ericeg 0 0 ME Ti G Universal Plug and Flay ein Ue MB Description Allows your computer to discover and control Universal Plug and Flay devices Total disk space required 0 0 ME Space available on disk 260 8 MB 138 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 7 Home Networking 6 Click OK to go back to the Windows Optional Networking Component Wizard window and click Next 7 10 Using UPnP in Windows XP Example This section shows you how to use the UPnP feature in Windows XP You must already have UPnP installed in Windows XP and UPnP activated on the Device Make sure the computer is connected to a LAN port of the Device Turn on your computer and the Device Auto
167. ase 64 encoded Binary PKCS 7 PEM Base 64 encoded PKCS 7 Certificate File Path Choose File No file chosen Apply Back The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 63 Security gt Certificates gt Trusted CA gt Import LABEL DESCRIPTION Certificate File Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse to find it Path Click Browse to find the certificate file you want to upload Apply Click Apply to save the certificate on the Device Click Back to return to the previous screen 16 5 View Certificate Use this screen to view in depth information about the certification authority s certificate change the certificate s name and set whether or not you want the Device to check a certification authority s list of revoked certificates before trusting a certificate issued by the certification authority 196 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 16 Certificates Click Security gt Certificates gt Trusted CA to open the Trusted CA screen Click the View icon to open the View Certificate screen Figure 100 Trusted CA View Certificate Name certnew cer BEGIN CERTIFICATE gt MNEaTCCA1 GgAwIBAg OGKaoaDAmLtD GHitnth3 1jANBokghkiG9wIBAQUFADA MRMWEQYK CZ mizPyLGQBGRYDY2ouMRUWEwYKCz imizPy_LGQBGRYFVWnly RUwxEDAO BoNVBAMTB1p5WEVMQ0EwHhcNMDcwhijA1MDMwMTIOWhcNMT cwMjA1 MD MwoTQ5vWyjaA MRMWEQYK CZ mizPyLGQBGRYDY2UMRUWEwYKCz imizZzPyLGQBGRYFWnly RUwxEDAO
168. aten are R 26 2 2 3 Navigation Panel atdsejiaietictesdtcenssacinniianinsaniiaisceeteinianeaedorsiniadidecesmeibinianinsadiisinaaiaiserasleiainalaids 26 Chapter 3 PAE e g o EE AE A E AE N teed N E A FA EN A O E A A A EA E AE T 31 I E E A rats 31 32 How to Set upa Wireless NeIWOrK See ee Merten tee et ai ai 31 SeA Ero Fa amO seiniin enri E ees RE EEEE AAEE 31 TeL GONO IIE AF saser ia i a a E a a nia aa arasia 32 3 2 3 Configuring the Wireless Client ccccccccccsesssseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeesaeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseas 33 eG ge Hie Un NAF FON FON ar ONO sasa ane Nn tec Bee eter R 38 Ee ael A IL E AE E ETT A T 39 3 4 1 VolP Calls With a Registered SIP Account wvisiccccccssissiwsancssatsssccocteyrasnnanseistenssensiawanncusiasiacsnbadines 40 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Table of Contents da ed a FEE aarre iEn TEE EEEE E Rees sien arated 42 TT RE S a e E a eee ee nanee eens l oe Seen eee 43 3 5 2 Access Your Shared Files From a Computer ccccccceeeecceeeceeeeeeeeeceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeaas 44 3 6 Using the Media Server Feature rata ccnp eetciacpctveceteesedloticaiencsalepaeeetiateisehttuteanadenlelesesiwetaldaiaceneactad 44 3 6 1 Configuring the Device ccccccsseeccceecceeseeccecceeeeeeeeeeeceaeceeeeseeeeeeceeeessaeseeeeeesseasseeesssaaageeseneesas 45 36 2 Usno Windows Media BN sie eecces sccm cctepecerticcecnctcniceceresdneiecierdedeee aia 45 3 6 9 Using a Digital Media AGA ED araiccins
169. ation code The DES encryption algorithm uses a 56 bit key Triple DES 3DES is a variation on DES that uses a 168 bit key As a result 3DES is more secure than DES It also requires more processing power resulting in increased latency and decreased throughput This implementation of AES uses a 128 bit key and a 256 bit key AES is faster than 3DES Authentication Select MD5 SHA1 SHA2 256 or SHA2 512 from the drop down list box MD5 Algorithm Message Digest 5 and SHA1 Secure Hash Algorithm and SHA2 are hash algorithms used to authenticate packet data The SHA1 algorithm is generally considered stronger than MD5 but is slower Select MD5 for minimal security and SHA 1 for more security SHA2 256 or SHA2 512 are part of the SHA2 set of cryptographic functions and they are considered even more secure than MD5 and SHAI1 SA Life Time Define the length of time before an IKE SA automatically renegotiates in this field It Seconds may range from 60 to 3 000 000 seconds almost 35 days A short SA Life Time increases security by forcing the two VPN gateways to update the encryption and authentication keys However every time the VPN tunnel renegotiates all users accessing remote resources are temporarily disconnected Perfect Forward Perfect Forward Secrecy PFS is disabled NONE by default in phase 2 IPSec SA Secrecy PFS setup This allows faster IPSec setup but is not so secure Choose DH2 DH5 or DH14 from the drop down list box t
170. ation interface Use the PIN method instead of the push button configuration PBC method if you want to ensure that the connection is established between the devices you specify not just the first two devices to activate WPS in range of each other However you need to log into the configuration interfaces of both devices to use the PIN method When you use the PIN method you must enter the PIN from one device usually the wireless client into the second device usually the Access Point or wireless router Then when WPS is activated on the first device it presents its PIN to the second device If the PIN matches one device sends the network and security information to the other allowing it to join the network Take the following steps to set up a WPS connection between an access point or wireless router referred to here as the AP and a client device using the PIN method 1 Ensure WPS is enabled on both devices 2 Access the WPS section of the AP s configuration interface See the device s User s Guide for how to do this 3 Look for the client s WPS PIN it will be displayed either on the device or in the WPS section of the client s configuration interface see the device s User s Guide for how to find the WPS PIN for the Device see Section 6 4 on page 105 4 Enter the client s PIN in the AP s configuration interface 114 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 6 Wireless 5 If the client device s co
171. ber Similarly as each house has its own house number each host on the network has its own unique identifying number the host ID Routers use the network number to send packets to the correct network while the host ID determines to which host on the network the packets are delivered An IP address is made up of four parts written in dotted decimal notation for example 192 168 1 1 Each of these four parts is known as an octet An octet is an eight digit binary number for example 11000000 which is 192 in decimal notation Therefore each octet has a possible range of 00000000 to 11111111 in binary or O to 255 in decimal EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 283 Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting The following figure shows an example IP address in which the first three octets 192 168 1 are the network number and the fourth octet 16 is the host ID Figure 156 Network Number and Host ID 192 168 1 16 ne an N Save er ese sur wz Q we oe ee mmmn d S Re Eee eee Lg How much of the IP address is the network number and how much is the host ID varies according to the subnet mask Subnet Masks A subnet mask is used to determine which bits are part of the network number and which bits are part of the host ID using a logical AND operation The term subnet is short for sub network A subnet mask has 32 bits If a bit in the subnet mask is a 1 then the corresponding bit in the IP address is par
172. bnet mask based on the IP address you enter so do not change this field unless you are instructed to do so DHCP Server State 124 EMG5324 D10A Users Guide Chapter 7 Home Networking Table 22 Network Setting gt Home Networking gt LAN Setup continued Select Enable to have your Device assign IP addresses an IP default gateway and DNS servers to LAN computers and other devices that are DHCP clients If you select Disable you need to manually configure the IP addresses of the computers and other devices on your LAN When DHCP is used the following fields need to be set IP Addressing Values IP Pool Starting This field specifies the first of the contiguous addresses in the IP address pool Address This field specifies the size or count of the IP address pool DNS Values DNS Server 1 3 Select From ISP if your ISP dynamically assigns DNS server information and the Device s WAN IP address Select User Defined if you have the IP address of a DNS server Enter the DNS server s IP address in the field to the right If you chose User Defined but leave the IP address set to 0 0 0 0 User Defined changes to None after you click Apply If you set a second choice to User Defined and enter the same IP address the second User Defined changes to None after you click Apply Select None if you do not want to configure DNS servers You must have another DHCP sever on your LAN or else the computers must have their DNS server
173. browser enter http www zyxel com or the URL of any other web site in the address bar and press ENTER If you are able to access the web site your new profile is successfully configured 11 If you cannot access the Internet go back to the Profile screen select the profile you are using and click Edit Check the details you entered previously Also refer to the Troubleshooting section of this User s Guide or contact your network administrator if necessary 3 3 Setting Up NAT Port Forwarding In this tutorial you manage the Doom server on a computer behind the Device In order for players on the Internet like A in the figure below to communicate with the Doom server you need to configure the port settings and IP address on the Device Traffic should be forwarded to the port 666 of the Doom server computer which has an IP address of 192 168 1 34 LAN WAN D 192 168 1 34 You may set up the port settings by configuring the port settings for the Doom server computer see Chapter 10 on page 162 for more information 1 Click Network Setting gt NAT gt Port Forwarding Click Add new rule 38 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 2 Enter the following values Service Name Select User Defined WAN Interface Select the WAN interface through which the Doom service is forwarded This is the default interface for this example which is MyDSLConnection Start End Ports Translation Start End Ports Server IP Ad
174. cache prefix list and default router list The Device maintains and updates its Pv6 caches constantly using the information from response messages In Pv6 the Device configures a link local address automatically and then sends a neighbor solicitation message to check if the address is unique If there is an address to be resolved or verified the Device also sends out a neighbor solicitation message When the Device receives a neighbor advertisement in response it stores the neighbor s link layer address in the neighbor cache When the Device uses a router solicitation message to query for a router and receives a router advertisement message it adds the router s information to the neighbor cache prefix list and destination cache The Device creates an entry in the default router list cache if the router can be used as a default router When the Device needs to send a packet it first consults the destination cache to determine the next hop If there is no matching entry in the destination cache the Device uses the prefix list to determine whether the destination address is on link 362 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Appendix F IPv6 and can be reached directly without passing through a router If the address is unlink the address is considered as the next hop Otherwise the Device determines the next hop from the default router list or routing table Once the next hop IP address is known the Device looks into the neighbor cache to ge
175. cascrsansrsiasiassieinseneiiasianciinasiseeisisremneriminrarsioenaenes 48 S7 Using the Frim Server ges gt eee er eee a da ia 50 3 8 Configuring Ihe MAC Address FINGI cetiirascctni rire nncnnitiv ier rndeeterGananieusieeedieenes 65 3 9 Configuring Static Route for Routing to Another Network cccccsecseeeeseeceeseeeeeeeesaeeeeeeseeeeeessaaeess 66 3 10 Connaurind Q05 Queue and Class SIUC isciicscacierseixccnxsdoinenainexnsieisdsoenendnnins muieeecdtannsteaazeanpanaansbes 68 3 11 Access the Devices Using DDNS a iseccccovnddcinaovnctdasascnliedasacqusvetenenseusdsoasiojadiesaemtignissaaceielonsanstoemactes T1 3 11 1 Registering a DDNS Account on www dyndns org ss ssssssssssssssrnrreeeserrrrreerrrrrrresnrrrrrrnrnrreeene 72 LIL COTM DONS On POU Ce io sienteeccetidesce a inewtret nee 72 else lesing tme DONS SOG cncccataracrwrnisaceiiasncseranneianrepeanensioayesnei niapsrasnduiagendal saedecaeeadnaqraneniciahares 72 Part Il Technical Reference cccccesccesessssenseeesenseenseeesonseonseeseseesenssoneeeaes 73 Chapter 4 Connection Status and System Info sasnsnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn mnnn nnn 75 MEE i EAEE EENE EAI IA ATOE SA E L A IIE A TOE TAE PAA E TEE A A E A E 75 te Me Te onus SCEE aiana RRA 75 ka Ea a E rA EEr Tr eaaa 77 Chapter 5 gss a g e PRN N eee E E A E A E N T E E E E E E 81 ee EAA E TEN E E O EE 81 Ski ahal Can Do im Mie Chamier sensira bore aa
176. ccessories to the device Do NOT open the device or unit Opening or removing covers can expose you to dangerous high voltage points or other risks ONLY qualified service personnel should service or disassemble this device Please contact your vendor for further information Make sure to connect the cables to the correct ports Place connecting cables carefully so that no one will step on them or stumble over them Always disconnect all cables from this device before servicing or disassembling Use ONLY an appropriate power adaptor or cord for your device Connect the power adaptor or cord to the right supply voltage for example 110V AC in North America or 230V AC in Europe Do NOT allow anything to rest on the power adaptor or cord and do NOT place the product where anyone can walk on the power adaptor or cord Do NOT use the device if the power adaptor or cord is damaged as it might cause electrocution If the power adaptor or cord is damaged remove it from the device and the power source Do NOT attempt to repair the power adaptor or cord Contact your local vendor to order a new one Do not use the device outside and make sure all the connections are indoors There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning Do NOT obstruct the device ventilation slots as insufficient airflow may harm your device Use only No 26 AWG American Wire Gauge or larger telecommunication line cord Antenna Warning This device meets ETSI and FCC certif
177. cess to the network Check the MAC addresses of your wireless clients usually printed on a label on the bottom of the device If there is an unknown MAC address you can remove it or reset the AP EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 1190 Chapter 6 Wireless 120 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide l Home Networking 7 1 Overview A Local Area Network LAN is a shared communication system to which many computers are attached A LAN is usually located in one immediate area such as a building or floor of a building The LAN screens can help you configure a LAN DHCP server and manage IP addresses 7 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter e Use the LAN Setup screen to set the LAN IP address subnet mask and DHCP settings Section 7 2 on page 124 e Use the Static DHCP screen to assign IP addresses on the LAN to specific individual computers based on their MAC Addresses Section 7 3 on page 125 e Use the UPnP screen to enable UPnP Section 7 4 on page 127 e Use the File Sharing screen to enable file sharing server Section 7 5 on page 127 e Use the Media Server screen to enable or disable the sharing of media files Section 7 6 on page 130 e Use the Printer Server screen to enable the print server Section 7 7 on page 131 7 1 2 What You Need To Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter 7 1 2 1 About LAN IP Address Similar to the way houses on a street share a common street name so to
178. clients which want to associate to this network must have Same wireless security settings as the Device After you select to use a security additional options appears in this screen Or you can select No Security to allow any client to associate this network without any data encryption or authentication See Section 6 2 1 on page 98 for more details about this field Apply Click Apply to save your changes Click Back to exit this screen without saving 6 4 The WPS Screen Use this screen to configure WiFi Protected Setup WPS on your Device WPS allows you to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security without having to configure security settings manually Set up each WPS connection between two devices Both devices must support WPS See Section 6 8 5 3 on page 116 for more information about WPS Note The Device applies the security settings of the SSID1 profile See Section 6 2 on page 97 If you want to use the WPS feature make sure you have set the security mode of SSID1 to WPA PSK WPA2 PSK or No Security EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 105 Chapter 6 Wireless Click Network Setting gt Wireless gt WPS The following screen displays Select Enable and click Apply to activate the WPS function Then you can configure the WPS settings in this screen Figure 27 Network Setting gt Wireless gt WPS General WPS Enable Disable Add a new device with WPS Method Method 1 PBC Method 2 PIN
179. close the wizard and then plug the printer s cable into Your Computer or point the printer toward your computer s infrared port and turn the printer on Windows will automatically install the printer for you To continue click Next Cancel EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 3 Select Local printer attached to this computer and click Next Add Printer Wizard Local or Network Printer The wizard needs to know which type of printer to set up Select the option that describes the printer you want to use Automatically detect and install my Plug and Play printer O A network printer or a printer attached to another computer S To set up a network printer that i not attached to a print server J use the Local printer option 4 Select Create a new port and Standard TCP IP Port Click Next Add Printer Wizard Select a Printer Port Computers communicate with printers through ports Select the port you want pour printer to use Ifthe port i not listed pou can create a new port O Use the following port Create a new port Type of port EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 5 Add Standard TCP IP Printer Port Wizard window opens up Click Next to start configuring the printer port Add Standard TCPSIP Printer Foot Wizard C Welcome to the Add Standard Re TCP IP Printer Port Wizard fou use this wizard to add a port for a network printer Before continuin
180. col nternet Protocol The default Wide area network protocol that provides communication across diverse interconnected networks Show icon in notification area when connected EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 5 The Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties window opens Figure 166 Windows XP Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties aca General Altemate Configuration Tou can get IF settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise pou need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings Obtain an IP address automatically O Use the following IF address Obtain ONS server address automatically Use the following DNS server addresses Advanced L o ox Cancel 6 Select Obtain an IP address automatically if your network administrator or ISP assigns your IP address dynamically Select Use the following IP Address and fill in the IP address Subnet mask and Default gateway fields if you have a static IP address that was assigned to you by your network administrator or ISP You may also have to enter a Preferred DNS server and an Alternate DNS server if that information was provided 7 Click OK to close the Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties window 8 Click OK to close the Local Area Connection Properties window Verifyi
181. commended that you select a network number from 192 168 0 0 to 192 168 255 0 The Internet Assigned Number Authority IANA reserved this block of addresses specifically for private use please do not use any other number unless you are told otherwise You must also enable Network Address Translation NAT on the Device Once you have decided on the network number pick an IP address for your Device that is easy to remember for instance 192 168 1 1 but make sure that no other device on your network is using that IP address The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address Your Device will compute the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address that you entered You don t need to change the subnet mask computed by the Device unless you are instructed to do otherwise Private IP Addresses Every machine on the Internet must have a unique address If your networks are isolated from the Internet running only between two branch offices for example you can assign any IP addresses to the hosts without problems However the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority IANA has reserved the following three blocks of IP addresses specifically for private networks e 10 0 0 0 10 255 255 255 172 16 0 0 172 31 255 255 e 192 168 0 0 192 168 255 255 You can obtain your IP address from the IANA from an ISP or it can be assigned from a private network If you belong to a small organization and your Internet access is thr
182. communicate with each other This screen allows you to enable and configure multiple Basic Service Sets BSSs on the Device Click Network Settings gt Wireless gt More AP The following screen displays Figure 25 Network Settings gt Wireless gt More AP fyYMEL_668D WPA2 PSK mixed AEL_668E WPA2 PSK mixed y AEL_668F WPA2 PSK mixed EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 6 Wireless The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 15 Network Settings gt Wireless gt More AP LABEL DESCRIPTION This is the index number of the entry This field indicates whether this SSID is active A yellow bulb signifies that this SSID is active A gray bulb signifies that this SSID is not active SSID An SSID profile is the set of parameters relating to one of the Device s BSSs The SSID Service Set Dentifier identifies the Service Set with which a wireless device is associated This field displays the name of the wireless profile on the network When a wireless client scans for an AP to associate with this is the name that is broadcast and seen in the wireless client utility This field indicates the security mode of the SSID profile Modify Click the Edit icon to configure the SSID profile 6 3 1 Edit More AP Use this screen to edit an SSID profile Click the Edit icon next to an SSID in the More AP screen The following screen displays Figure 26 Wireless gt More AP Edit Wireless Network
183. configure user specific parameters such as the username and password SSH SCP SFTP Secure Shell SSH is a secure communication protocol that combines authentication and data encryption to provide secure encrypted communication between two hosts over an unsecured network The following file transfer methods use SSH e Secure Copy SC is a secure way of transferring files between computers It uses port 22 e SSH File Transfer Protocol or Secure File Transfer Protocol SFTP is an old way of transferring files between computers It uses port 22 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 255 Chapter 22 Remote MGMT 22 2 The Remote MGMT Screen Use this screen to decide what services you may use to access which Device interface Click Maintenance gt Remote MGMT to open the following screen Figure 137 Maintenance gt Remote MGMT Remote Management HTTPS Enable Enable a O HTTP Enable Enable TELNET Enable Enable a FTP Enable Enable SoH SCPISFTP Enable Enable a ICMP Enable Enable TR 064 xI Enable xI oNMP Enable The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 98 Maintenance gt Remote MGMT LABEL DESCRIPTION Services This is the service you may use to access the Device LAN WLAN Select the Enable check box for the corresponding services that you want to allow access to the Device from the LAN and WLAN WAN Select the Enable check box for the corresponding services that you want to all
184. ct Bob s_ Share Click Apply e GENERIC USB Mass Storage 100 1 2010 08 25 09 45 26 2010 08 17 09 38 36 2003 01 04 06 08 00 2010 04 27 14 51 36 2010 08 17 15 15 16 Bob s _ Share Mac zywall 1050_dir Win 7 NWD 2205_ PowerPC Mac0O 10 4_Driver_1003_UI_1 7 9 Peeve ER 2010 08 22 Apply Back EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 43 Chapter 3 Tutorials 3 You can add a description for the share or leave it blank The Add Share Directory screen should look like the following Click Apply to finish Volume GENERIC_USB_Mass_Storage_100_1 Share Path Bob s_Share Browse Description 4 This sets up the file sharing server You can see the USB storage device listed in the table below Share Directory List Add new share i __________s GENERIC_USB_Mass_ Storage GENERIC_USB_Mass_Storage_100_1 GENERIC_USB_Mass_Storage_100_1 4 il USB_Storage GENERIC_USB_Mass_Storage_100_1 USB_Storage Apply Cancel 3 5 2 Access Your Shared Files From a Computer You can use Windows Explorer to access the file storage devices connected to the Device Note The examples in this User s Guide show you how to use Microsoft s Windows XP to browse your shared files Refer to your operating system s documentation for how to browse your file structure Open Windows Explorer to access Bob s Share using Windows Explorer browser In Windows Explorer s Address bar type a double backslash followed by the
185. ctelarveses 181 13 4 1 Add Edit an ACL Rule ciccicicissccccsrsesscosncicedacssveiasedssensuassausvevnevaccessbanecuersteessactosaesaissvenesessnns 182 To MELOS OTEN nA E ipsierdenicteantinens 183 13 6 Firewall Technical Reference iircens citer tenner cedars sends tea reseed 183 13 6 1 Guidelines For Enhancing Security With Your Firewall ccccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeenees 184 Be Ne ia EEE EAE E AEEA EE ESEE 184 Chapter 14 Ea E E aE EEEE ERES E EEE 185 TOVIN eicispadaviccsnduah cevgassxninaseaadasinis cinaanididdaestuvelananerbeisedaauaiardateieiaal4sbersamieuaatienesadniatvcienpeelesenas 185 ELU ana et aneren NET E ANE TE NE 185 ee a ee E A A E EAE A E N E N N E TET 185 Chapter 15 Pon ALE OO E A eet eee 187 ea a T a A A 187 192 The Farental Control i a ervcasoiadacvancvoriearaneviadaraunsiinidavanstanrauseuevieiaieusiadaarasehbeteieernijeiaveasiaawens 187 15 2 1 Add Edit a Parental Control Rule occ ccccccccccsecsceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeueeeaeeeeeeeeeneeeueeeeeeeeaess 188 Chapter 16 oor ia A E 191 rE Oe E AE E EE EET NS 191 Pid Wha You Can DO MiNaS a sseisenineniseniin kininon i E i 191 1E ia yrna Yau Need rcs cance rte eee eee ee ere 191 Toia venin ng a pcg Le eee ee een ee eee Pee enY Rleeeince cra food SOLE eee ea Cee eee eer in et Pri 192 16 2 Local TI sana tssccreasicdidpncraiadistananicdidsmianioidsimmrnnbisiuniendenspinsbotiaiaiadneaddasiasiebsninnntetianaradiextauanis 193 sande areebtersie iets cess sana amesvstnciiie
186. cvensnjaacioreaswiniocuaneiietanconsveiauieaseieleammetieiacasmveladvans talent 239 10 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Table of Contents Chapter 19 LOS nvcnseinavaawsssatasiaavensevednoeas A sks aeaeaisiasonda san ee ness 243 ES Gs gl 2 Sener meen earn a erent er ar ee enone ne rene Neer hry Mee cnr ete eae ne er ens Meer nen ee ae wen er eter eee ene 243 Tee at Bere VOU Gan DO NNE Ce snie aa E 243 Tare Fe T aaa 243 e e a Ee EE E E A E EE AT EEA EA AE AEE A E E 244 o UATE Ie E E T T 245 a The cell maar lpg cick lg gach ea i 245 Chapter 20 Ye LAE T Renee ee ony A E E E E nT nent nnn A en ree E ce te tem arene tener T 247 i I geen nce ten Ce Nr ne eee CUE ey OTe Toca ee nr TOR a CR Me Ocoee et ee ere tee cetera eer vere 247 20 1 1 What You Carn Do in mS CAST nactvtasincincicvssesxeanipe lt inensasinaneolsseeysmiesan lt inaninsasnsersaeersreiesiens 247 yea iad cs TAN SUS SOE esaa N 247 a E e E E a E ints E E E A E A EE EE E ANE E E N 248 ea TENA a T a E E S 249 ALS Meda SACU Aaus Sree sirem EENS EEE ene 250 eU O TO VoF Saus SOE asr a A N A 251 Chapter 21 We sT i EEE N A NA NE A E A E O EE N A NE N N E NS 253 BN O E ei EEEE EEEN EEEE EEEE OEE E EEEE 253 DTe 9 N E inna eainiatlenrseuieieatenieteqaseaiereia 253 Chapter 22 O a AA 255 E a E E EEA EE A eee A A etaies 255 eA e a a a L EE E E A AA E E E E E E EEE E 255 Bee the Remolie MAMI GOOG siririna iae na EaR T N ar eee 256 Chapter 23 T STE T a EAE AEE EEE 25
187. d the ZyXEL utility icon in the system tray turns green and the Link I nfo screen displays details of the active connection Check the network information in the Link Info screen to verify that you have successfully connected to the selected network If the wireless client is not connected to a network the fields in this screen remain blank statistics Profile Name Transmit Rate 2 Kbps Network Namef SSID S5ID Examples Receive Rate 0 kbps AP MAC Address 00 40 05 CD 1F 64 Authentication Mone Network Type Infrastructure Network Mode 302 119 Transmission Rate 18 Mbps Total Transmit 46 Security WPA PSK Total Receive 3 Channel 6 Link Quality 68 dBm lrend hart Signal Strength eeeec 2606 Link Quality 2 6 6 0 0 6 0 0 0 6 Open your Internet browser and enter http www zyxel com or the URL of any other web site in the address bar If you are able to access the web site your wireless connection is successfully configured If you cannot access the web site try changing the encryption type in the Security Settings screen check the Troubleshooting section of this User s Guide or contact your network administrator 3 2 3 2 Creating and Using a Profile A profile lets you easily connect to the same wireless network again later You can also configure different profiles for different networks for example if you connect a notebook computer to wireless networks at home and at work This example illustrates how t
188. d Content ja icsisiceraiiniacaasarcaiaceiairatanaesaiarancasadinncsuebanccsccedeserssiesiuasodscebbiaaissadnestansenes 216 EEFE S A nT E AE 217 17 6 10 Difie Hellman DH Key GrOUDS sscescscissaseseccrcarstaensicanencencssnnsnectetenasretecsscageanenrearstausesecnsedens 217 17 6 11 Telecommuter VPN IPSec ices dctettrawes cid saicsnmrcusauadedekvdumcieaueegivestbaciiuncnetecricleniers 217 Chapter 18 IE E pdcneien i gndaneaaveaaniauidbelonsaacueiavpaieal bclatiihad apiaecabinsa aida hanged teint apatite tuensagies 221 We A ee aAA EEEE EAA neaaresnvain 221 18 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ccccccccccccsseseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeaeseeeeeseaaaeeeeeessaaeees 221 1S gs Jqrcige cea ol lt gee RION eee ee ee eee RP eE eae een bers etene Cente hee R enna nae RErs aT hee Leet he RENIN S avCRT Tare re neem 221 eg a Ree ee Ve ke nina EEEE 222 Ise VII SCS PGI OE n EA hoa ements 223 TTo he SIF ACCU TOEO ace rriexien ares EA E A ENG 226 en aU EOLO PECOU siiin TAA 227 1094 I Sir Fe wie cash tinier wie E TE S 229 Ue a tacripet tet ett sais cca ecw nc daa eet e A a 230 18 3 1 Eoi Fhone DEVICE oan iiaaiecsanneticunduabnniadandelanddanerminianieanielieieraniiaidsennaevieninnehisisdnnmeubeianenneniasnias 230 Tae Tho FROS Regien a aissein R E ee tetuoeeseenees 231 eNA aE at EE EE A AE EEEE AE E PSEA E EE EEE AE E 232 teo eem PERNO a r E a 233 Po OLE AAE 233 Ec E EE 233 TO Sa BE o a T E A E E E E E ees 238 18 8 4 Phone Services CVO ic dadcccncicci
189. d WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK pre shared key from the registrar device to the enrollee devices Whether the network uses WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK depends on the device You can check the configuration interface of the registrar device to discover the key the network is using if the device supports this feature Then you can enter the key into the non WPS device and join the network as normal the non WPS device must also support WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK 118 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 6 Wireless e When you use the PBC method there is a short period from the moment you press the button on one device to the moment you press the button on the other device when any WPS enabled device could join the network This is because the registrar has no way of identifying the correct enrollee and cannot differentiate between your enrollee and a rogue device This is a possible way for a hacker to gain access to a network You can easily check to see if this has happened WPS works between only two devices simultaneously so if another device has enrolled your device will be unable to enroll and will not have access to the network If this happens open the access point s configuration interface and look at the list of associated clients usually displayed by MAC address It does not matter if the access point is the WPS registrar the enrollee or was not involved in the WPS handshake a rogue device must still associate with the access point to gain ac
190. d displays the current date and time in the Device You can change this in Maintenance gt Time Setting 78 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 4 Connection Status and System Info Table 4 System Info Screen continued LABEL DESCRIPTION System Resource CPU Usage This field displays what percentage of the Device s processing ability is currently used When this percentage is close to 100 the Device is running at full load and the throughput is not going to improve anymore If you want some applications to have more throughput you should turn off other applications Memory This field displays what percentage of the Device s memory is currently used Usually this Usage percentage should not increase much If memory usage does get close to 100 the Device is probably becoming unstable and you should restart the device See Chapter 28 on page 269 or turn off the device unplug the power for a few seconds USB Status This shows the type of device connected to the Device Status This shows whether the device is currently active Up This shows N A if there are no device connected to the Device or the connected device is not working Registration Status This column displays each SIP account in the Device Action This field displays the current registration status of the SIP account You have to register SIP accounts with a SIP server to use VoIP If the SIP account is already registered with the SIP server e
191. dard defines an explicit VLAN tag in the MAC header to identify the VLAN membership of a frame across bridges A VLAN tag includes the 12 bit VLAN ID and 3 bit user priority The VLAN ID associates a frame with a specific VLAN and provides the information that devices need to process the frame across the network IEEE 802 1p specifies the user priority field and defines up to eight separate traffic types The following table describes the traffic types defined in the IEEE 802 1d standard which incorporates the 802 1p Table 39 IEEE 802 1p Priority Level and Traffic Type PRIORITY LEVEL TRAFFIC TYPE sLevel7 7 Typically used for network control traffic such as router configuration messages Ge N 6 Typically used for voice traffic that is especially sensitive to jitter jitter is the variations in delay Typically used for video that consumes high bandwidth and is sensitive to jitter Level 4 Typically used for controlled load latency sensitive traffic such as SNA Systems Network Architecture transactions Level 3 Typically used for excellent effort or better than best effort and would include important business traffic that can tolerate some delay Level2 2 This is for spare bandwidth EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 159 Chapter 9 Quality of Service QoS Table 39 IEEE 802 1p Priority Level and Traffic Type continued PRIORITY LEVEL TRAFFIC TYPE Level 1 This is typically used for non critical bac
192. den nodes exists on your network and the cost of resending large frames is more than the extra network overhead involved in the RTS Request To Send CTS Clear to Send handshake If the RTS CTS value is greater than the Fragmentation Threshold value see next then the RTS Request To Send CTS Clear to Send handshake will never occur as data frames will be fragmented before they reach RTS CTS size Note Enabling the RTS Threshold causes redundant network overhead that could negatively affect the throughput performance instead of providing a remedy Fragmentation Threshold A Fragmentation Threshold is the maximum data fragment size between 256 and 2432 bytes that can be sent in the wireless network before the AP will fragment the packet into smaller data frames A large Fragmentation Threshold is recommended for networks not prone to interference while you should set a smaller threshold for busy networks or networks that are prone to interference 336 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs If the Fragmentation Threshold value is smaller than the RTS CTS value see previously you set then the RTS Request To Send CTS Clear to Send handshake will never occur as data frames will be fragmented before they reach RTS CTS size Preamble Type Preamble is used to signal that data is coming to the receiver Short and long refer to the length of the synchronization field in a packet Short preamble increas
193. displays the current version of the firmware inside the device It also shows the Version date the firmware version was created Go to the Maintenance gt Firmware Upgrade screen to change it WAN Information EMG5324 D10A User s Guide ral Chapter 4 Connection Status and System Info Table 4 System Info Screen continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Mode This is the method of encapsulation used by your ISP IP Address This field displays the current IP address of the Device in the WAN IP Subnet Mas This field displays the current subnet mask in the WAN LAN Information IP Address IP Subnet Mask DHCP Server This field displays the current IP address of the Device in the LAN This field displays the current subnet mask in the LAN This field displays what DHCP services the Device is providing to the LAN Choices are Server The Device is a DHCP server in the LAN It assigns IP addresses to other computers in the LAN None The Device is not providing any DHCP services to the LAN WLAN Information Channel This is the channel number used by the Device now WPS Status Configured displays when a wireless client has connected to the Device or WPS is enabled and wireless or wireless security settings have been configured Unconfigured displays if WPS is disabled or wireless security settings have not been configured SSID 1 4 Information SSID This is the descriptive name used to identify the Device in the wire
194. divided into eight 16 bit blocks and written in hexadecimal notation Hexadecimal uses four bits for each character 1 10 A F Each block s 16 bits are then represented by four hexadecimal characters For example FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FCO0O 0000 0000 0000 DHCPv6 The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol for Pv6 DHCPv6 RFC 3315 is a server client protocol that allows a DHCP server to assign and pass IPv6 network addresses prefixes and other configuration information to DHCP clients DHCPv6 servers and clients exchange DHCP messages using UDP Each DHCP client and server has a unique DHCP Unique Dentifier DUID which is used for identification when they are exchanging DHCPv6 messages The DUID is generated from the MAC address time vendor assigned ID and or the vendor s private enterprise number registered with the IANA It should not change over time even after you reboot the device EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 83 Chapter 5 Broadband Prefix Delegation Prefix delegation enables an Pv6 router to use the Pv6 prefix network address received from the ISP or a connected uplink router for its LAN The Device uses the received Pv6 prefix for example 2001 db2 48 to generate its LAN IP address Through sending Router Advertisements RAs regularly by multicast the Device passes the I Pv6 prefix information to LAN hosts The hosts use the prefix to generate their Pv6 addresses 5 1 3 Before You Begin You ne
195. dress AA FF AA FF AA FF for example of your computer and map it to queue 7 68 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials Note QoS is applied to traffic flowing out of the Device Traffic that does not match this class is assigned a priority queue based on the internal QoS mapping table on the Device ZyXEL Device DSL gt 22 10 000 kbps Your computer IP 192 168 1 23 and or MAC AA FF AA FF AA FF a E mail Queue 7 A colleague s computer Other traffic Automatic classifier 1 Click Network Setting gt QoS gt General and check Active Set your WAN Managed Upstream Bandwidth to 10 000 kbps or leave this blank to have the Device automatically determine this figure Click Apply to save your settings i Active QoS WAN Managed Upstream Bandwidth f 0000 kbps Traffic priority will be automatically assigned by None b Note You can assign the upstream bandwidth manually If the field is empty the CPE set the value automatically If Enable QoS checkbox is selected choose an automapping type to assign traffic priority automatically Apply Cancel 2 Goto Network Setting gt QoS gt Queue Setup Click Add new Queue to create a new queue In the screen that opens check Active and enter or select the following values then click Apply e Name Email e Priority 7 High e Weight 15 e Rate Limit 5 000 kbps IV Active Name Email Interface AN Priority 7 High
196. dress either local or global of an outside host 10 7 2 What NAT Does In the simplest form NAT changes the source IP address in a packet received from a subscriber the inside local address to another the inside global address before forwarding the packet to the WAN side When the response comes back NAT translates the destination address the inside global address back to the inside local address before forwarding it to the original inside host Note that the IP address either local or global of an outside host is never changed The global IP addresses for the inside hosts can be either static or dynamically assigned by the ISP In addition you can designate servers for example a web server and a Telnet server on your local network and make them accessible to the outside world If you do not define any servers NAT offers the additional benefit of firewall protection With no servers defined your Device filters out all incoming inquiries thus preventing intruders from probing your network For more information on IP address translation refer to RFC 1631 The IP Network Address Translator NAT 10 7 3 How NAT Works Each packet has two addresses a source address and a destination address For outgoing packets the ILA Inside Local Address is the source address on the LAN and the IGA Inside Global Address is the source address on the WAN For incoming packets the ILA is the destination address on the LAN and the IGA is th
197. dress Enter the IP address of the Doom server This is 192 168 1 34 for this example Protocol Select TCP UDP This should be the protocol supported by the Doom server Service Name User Defined WAN Interface MyDSLConnection Start Port End Part Translation Start Port Translation End Part Server IP Address 192 168 1 34 Protocal TCP UDP 3 Click Apply 4 The port forwarding settings you configured should appear in the table Make sure the bulb in Status is the color yellow meaning it is activated Click Apply to have the Device start forwarding port 666 traffic to the computer with IP address 192 168 1 34 Add new rule User p Defined WyDSLConm Players on the Internet then can have access to your Doom server 3 4 How to Make a VoIP Call You can register a SIP account with the SIP server and make voice calls over the Internet to another VoIP device EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials The following parameters are used in this example SIP Service Provider Name REGISTER Server Address SIP Account Number 12345678 ChangeMe Password ThislsSMySIP 3 4 1 VoIP Calls With a Registered SIP Account To use a registered SIP account you should configure the SIP service provider and applied for a SIP account 3 4 1 1 SIP Service Provider Configuration Follow the steps below to configure your SIP service provider 1 Make sure your Device is connected to the Internet 2
198. ds do two things First they authenticate This means that only people presenting the right credentials often a username and password or a key phrase can access the network Second they encrypt This means that the information sent over the air is encoded Only people with the code key can understand the information and only people who have been authenticated are given the code key These security standards vary in effectiveness Some can be broken such as the old Wired Equivalent Protocol WEP Using WEP is better than using no security at all but it will not keep a determined attacker out Other security standards are secure in themselves but can be broken if a user does not use them properly For example the WPA PSK security standard Is very secure if you use a long key which is difficult for an attacker s software to guess for example a twenty letter long string of apparently random numbers and letters but it is not very secure if you use a short key which is very easy to guess for example a three letter word from the dictionary Because of the damage that can be done by a malicious attacker it s not just people who have sensitive information on their network who should use security Everybody who uses any wireless network should ensure that effective security is in place A good way to come up with effective security keys passwords and so on is to use obscure information that you personally will easily remember and to
199. e 3 If you are connecting a USB hard drive that comes with an external power supply make sure it Is connected to an appropriate power source that is on 4 Re connect your USB device to the Device 30 8 UPnP When using UPnP and the Device reboots my computer cannot detect UPnP and refresh My Network Places gt Local Network 1 Disconnect the Ethernet cable from the Device s LAN port or from your computer 2 Re connect the Ethernet cable The Local Area Connection icon for UPnP disappears in the screen Restart your computer cannot open special applications such as white board file transfer and video when I use the MSN messenger 1 Wait more than three minutes 2 Restart the applications EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 219 Chapter 30 Troubleshooting 280 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Wall mounting Instructions Do the following to hang your Device on a wall Note See Table 155 on page 282 for the size of screws to use and how far apart to place them Align the holes on the back of the supplied wall mounting bracket with the screws on the wall Locate a high position on a wall that is free of obstructions Use a sturdy wall Drill two holes on the wall with screws inserted in the wall mounting bracket The distance between the screws is 132 3mm Be careful to avoid damaging pipes or cables located inside the wall when drilling holes for the screws Make sure the screws are snugly
200. e translating the IP address since this is already handled by the outbound proxy server Server Address Enter the IP address or domain name of the SIP outbound proxy server Server Port Enter the SIP outbound proxy server s listening port if your VolP service provider gave you one Otherwise keep the default value QoS Tag SIP TOS Priority Enter the DSCP DiffServ Code Point number for SIP message transmissions The Device Setting creates Class of Service CoS priority tags with this number to SIP traffic that it transmits RTP TOS Enter the DSCP DiffServ Code Point number for RTP voice transmissions The Device Priority Setting creates Class of Service CoS priority tags with this number to RTP traffic that it transmits Timer Setting Expiration Enter the number of seconds your SIP account is registered with the SIP register server Duration before it is deleted The Device automatically tries to re register your SIP account when one half of this time has passed The SIP register server might have a different expiration Register Re Enter the number of seconds the Device waits before it tries again to register the SIP send timer account if the first try failed or if there is no response Session Expires Enter the number of seconds the Device lets a SIP session remain idle without traffic before it automatically disconnects the session Min SE Enter the minimum number of seconds the Device lets a SIP
201. e servers CU SEEME A popular videoconferencing solution from White Pines Software UDP TCP UDP Domain Name Server a service that matches web names for example www zyxel com to IP numbers ESP User Defined 50 The IPSEC ESP Encapsulation Security IPSEC_TUNNEL Protocol tunneling protocol uses this service FINGER TCP 79 Finger is a UNIX or Internet related command that can be used to find out if a user is logged on TCP 20 File Transfer Program a program to enable TCP 21 fast transfer of files including large files H 323 1720 NetMeeting uses this protocol that may not be possible by e mail EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Appendix E Common Services Table 121 Commonly Used Services continued NAME o PROTOCOL PORT S DESCRIPTION HTTP TCP Hyper Text Transfer Protocol a client server protocol for the world wide web HTTPS TCP 443 HTTPS is a secured http session often used in e commerce ICMP User Defined 1 Internet Control Message Protocol is often used for diagnostic or routing purposes Ce ee i 4000 This is a popular Internet chat program IGMP MULTICAST User Defined Internet Group Management Protocol is used when sending packets to a specific group of hosts IKE The Internet Key Exchange algorithm is used for key distribution and management IRC TCP UDP 6667 This is another popular Internet chat program MSN Messenger TCP 1863 Microsoft Networks messenger service uses this protocol
202. e 3G connection traffic statistics in this screen Figure 134 System Monitor gt Traffic Status gt 3G Backup v Sent Received 0 Bytes 0 Bytes Refresh interval 5 seconds Connected Interface ppp9 The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 95 System Monitor gt Traffic Status gt 3G backup LABEL DESCRIPTION This shows the number of bytes received and sent through the 3G interface of the Device Refresh Interval Select how often you want the Device to update this screen from the drop down list box Connected This shows the name of the 3G connection interface that is currently connected Interface 250 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 20 Traffic Status 20 6 The VoIP Status Screen Click System Monitor gt VolP Status to open the following screen You can view the VolP traffic Statistics in this screen Figure 135 System Monitor gt VoIP Status Refresh interval 5 seconds SIF Status ChangeMe ChangeMe NO ChangeMe ChangeMe NO Call Status SIP 4 0 Day s 0 Hour s 0 Minutes 0 Second s 0 Day s 0 Hour s 0 Minute s 0 Seconds Phone Status Phone 1 ChangeMe ChangeMe ONHOOK Phone 2 ChangelMe ChangeMe ONHOOK The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 96 System Monitor gt VoIP Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Refresh Interval Select how often you want the Device to update this screen from the drop down list box SIP Status
203. e Call Hold e Call Waiting e Making a Second Call e Call Transfer e Three Way Conference e Internal Calls e Do not Disturb Note To take full advantage of the supplementary phone services available through the Device s phone ports you may need to subscribe to the services from your VoIP service provider The Flash Key Flashing means to press the hook for a short period of time a few hundred milliseconds before releasing it On newer telephones there should be a flash key button that generates the signal electronically If the flash key is not available you can tap press and immediately release the hook by hand to achieve the same effect However using the flash key is preferred since the timing is much more precise With manual tapping if the duration is too long it may be interpreted as hanging up by the Device You can invoke all the supplementary services by using the flash key Europe Type Supplementary Phone Services This section describes how to use supplementary phone services with the Europe Type Call Service Mode Commands for supplementary services are listed in the table below EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 239 Chapter 18 VoIP After pressing the flash key if you do not issue the sub command before the default sub command time out 2 seconds expires or issue an invalid sub command the current operation will be aborted Table 87 European Flash Key Commands COMMAND SUB COMMAND COMMAND DESCRIPTI
204. e Choose a Diffie Hellman public key cryptography key group DH1 or DH2 e Set the IKE SA lifetime This field allows you to determine how long an IKE SA should stay up before it times out An IKE SA times out when the IKE SA lifetime period expires If an IKE SA times out when an IPSec SA is already established the IPSec SA stays connected In phase 2 you must e Choose which protocol to use ESP or AH for the IKE key exchange e Choose an encryption algorithm e Choose an authentication algorithm e Choose whether to enable Perfect Forward Secrecy PFS using Diffie Hellman public key cryptography see Appendix D on page 333 Select None the default to disable PFS e Choose Tunnel mode or Transport mode e Set the IPSec SA lifetime This field allows you to determine how long the IPSec SA should stay up before it times out The Device automatically renegotiates the IPSec SA if there is traffic when the IPSec SA lifetime period expires The Device also automatically renegotiates the IPSec SA if both IPSec routers have keep alive enabled even if there is no traffic If an IPSec SA times out then the IPSec router must renegotiate the SA the next time someone attempts to send traffic 214 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 17 VPN 17 6 6 Negotiation Mode The phase 1 Negotiation Mode you select determines how the Security Association SA will be established for each connection through IKE negotiations e Main Mode ensures th
205. e DNS route is currently in use or not A yellow bulb signifies that this DNS route is in use A gray bulb signifies that this DNS route is not in use Domain Name This is the domain name to which the DNS route applies WAN Interface This is the WAN interface through which the matched DNS request is routed Modify Click the Edit icon to configure a DNS route on the Device Click the Delete icon to remove a DNS route from the Device 11 2 1 Add Edit DNS Route Edit Click Add new DNS route in the DNS Route screen or the Edit icon next to an existing DNS route Use this screen to configure the required information for a DNS route Figure 82 DNS Route Add Edit M Active Domain Name example com WAN Interface Ethem AN1 B Note Must select one WAN interface 172 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 11 DNS Route The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 49 DNS Route Add Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Select this to activate this DNS route Domain Name Enter the domain name you want to resolve You can use the wildcard character an asterisk as the left most part of a domain name such as example com The Device forwards DNS queries for any domain name ending in example com to the WAN interface specified in this route Select a WAN interface through which the matched DNS query is sent You must have the WAN interface s already configured in the Broadband screen EMG5324
206. e SSID and WPA 2 PSK randomly 348 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs The following figure shows a WPS enabled client installed in a notebook computer connecting to a WPS enabled access point Figure 224 How WPS works ACTIVATE ACTIVATE WPS WPS WITHIN 2 MINUTES v CIP cif WPS HANDSHAKE REGISTRAR SECURE TUNNEL i 4 O lt CD SECURITY INFO COMMUNICATION Ve The roles of registrar and enrollee last only as long as the WPS setup process is active two minutes The next time you use WPS a different device can be the registrar if necessary The WPS connection process Is like a handshake only two devices participate in each WPS transaction If you want to add more devices you should repeat the process with one of the existing networked devices and the new device Note that the access point AP is not always the registrar and the wireless client is not always the enrollee All WPS certified APs can be a registrar and so can some WPS enabled wireless clients By default a WPS devices is unconfigured This means that it is not part of an existing network and can act as either enrollee or registrar if it supports both functions If the registrar is unconfigured the security settings it transmits to the enrollee are randomly generated Once a WPS enabled device has connected to another device using WPS it becomes configured A configured wireless cli
207. e Security gt Firewall gt Service gt Add screen display in this list Protocol This field is displayed only when you select Specific Protocol in Select Protocol Choose the IP port TCP UDP ICMP or Others that defines your customized port from the drop down list box Protocol If you select Others in the Select Protocol field enter a single port number or the range Number of port numbers of the source EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 13 Firewall Table 56 Access Control Add Edit continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Source These fields are displayed if you select TCP or UDP as the IP port Destination Port Select Single to specify one port only or Range to specify a span of ports that define your customized service If you select Any the service is applied to all ports Type a single port number or the range of port numbers that define your customized service ACCEPT packets that match this rule Direction Use the drop down list box to select the direction of traffic to which this rule applies Apply Click Apply to save your changes Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving Policy Use the drop down list box to select whether to discard DROP deny and send an ICMP destination unreachable message to the sender of REJECT or allow the passage of 13 5 The DoS Screen DoS Denial of Service attacks can flood your Internet connection with invalid packets and connection requests using so much bandwid
208. e WPA2 standard WPA PSK This has the device use either WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK depending on which security mode the wireless client uses WPA2 WPA2 IEEE 802 111 is a wireless security standard that defines stronger encryption authentication and key management than WPA It requires the use of a RADIUS server and is mostly used in business networks WPA Wi Fi Protected Access WPA is a subset of the IEEE 802 111 standard It requires the use of a RADIUS server and is mostly used in business networks WEP Wired Equivalent Privacy WEP encryption scrambles the data transmitted between the wireless stations and the access points to keep network communications private 30 6 Phone Calls and VoIP The telephone port won t work or the telephone lacks a dial tone 1 Check the telephone connections and telephone wire can access the Internet but cannot make VolP calls 1 The PHONE light should come on Make sure that your telephone is connected to the PHONE port 2 You can also check the VoIP status in the System I nfo screen 3 If the VoIP settings are correct use speed dial to make peer to peer calls If you can make a call using speed dial there may be something wrong with the SIP server contact your VoIP service provider 278 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 30 Troubleshooting 30 7 USB Device Connection The Device fails to detect my USB device 1 Disconnect the USB device 2 Reboot the Devic
209. e destination address on the WAN NAT maps private local IP addresses to globally unique ones required for communication with hosts on other networks It replaces the original IP source address and TCP or UDP source port numbers for Many to One and Many to Many Overload NAT mapping in each packet and then forwards it to the Internet The EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 169 Chapter 10 Network Address Translation NAT Device keeps track of the original addresses and port numbers so incoming reply packets can have their original values restored The following figure illustrates this Figure 79 How NAT Works NAT Table LAN Inside Local Inside Global IP Address IP Address WAN 192 168 1 10 IGA 1 192 168 1 13 192 168 1 11 IGA 2 lt 192 168 1 12 IGA 3 192 168 1 13 Inside Local Address ILA Inside Global Address IGA 192 168 1 11 195 1681 10 1 70 EMG5324 D10A Users Guide DNS Route 11 1 Overview DNS Domain Name System is for mapping a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa The DNS server is extremely important because without it you must know the IP address of a machine before you can access it In addition to the system DNS server s each WAN interface service is set to have its own static or dynamic DNS server list You can configure a DNS static route to forward DNS queries for certain domain names through a specific WAN interface to its DNS server s The Device uses a s
210. e drop down list box select All Call History to view all call records Click this to renew the log screen Clear Logs Click this to delete all the logs This field is a sequential value and is not associated with a specific entry 246 EMG5324 D10A Users Guide Traffic Status 20 1 Overview Use the Traffic Status screens to look at network traffic status and statistics of the WAN LAN interfaces and NAT 20 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter e Use the WAN screen to view the WAN traffic statistics Section 20 2 on page 247 e Use the LAN screen to view the LAN traffic statistics Section 20 3 on page 248 e Use the NAT screen to view the NAT status of the Device s client s Section 20 4 on page 249 e Use the 3G Backup screen to view the 3G connection traffic statistics Section 20 6 on page 254 e Use the Vol P Status screen to view the VolP traffic statistics Section 20 6 on page 251 20 2 The WAN Status Screen Click System Monitor gt Traffic Status to open the WAN screen You can view the WAN traffic Statistics in this screen Figure 131 System Monitor gt Traffic Status gt WAN Sent oat Recened 3062046 Bytes 17295076 Bytes Status i Packets Sent Packets Recewed Connected Interface Data Error Drop Data Error Drop eth 12474 0 0 290326 0 30 The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 92 System Monitor gt Traffic Status gt WAN LABEL DESCRIPTION This sh
211. e for Routing to Another Network e Configuring QoS Queue and Class Setup e Access the Device Using DDNS 3 2 How to Set up a Wireless Network This section gives you examples of how to set up an access point and wireless client for wireless communication using the following parameters The wireless clients can access the Internet through the Device wirelessly 3 2 1 Example Parameters 802 11 mode 802 11b g Channel auto Security WPA PSK Pre Shared Key 12MyWPAPSKpresharedkey34 An access point AP or wireless router is referred to as the AP and a computer with a wireless network card or USB adapter is referred to as the wireless client here We use the M 302 utility screens as the wireless client example The screens may vary for different models EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 3 2 2 Configuring the AP Follow the steps below to configure the wireless settings on your AP 1 Open the Network Setting gt Wireless gt General screen in the AP s web configurator Wireless Network Setup Wireless M Enable Wireless LAN Wireless Network Settings Wireless Network Name SsSibDy SolD Examples Hide SSID 02 13 49 11 66 8c 802 11big BSSID Mode Select Channel Selection Auto Scan Operating Channel 6 Security Level More Secure Recommended d Security Mode WPA PSK gt Enter 6 63 characters a z 4 4 and 0 9 or 64 hexadecimal digits fa
212. e highest level of security when the communicating parties are negotiating authentication phase 1 It uses 6 messages in three round trips SA negotiation Diffie Hellman exchange and an exchange of nonces a nonce is a random number This mode features identity protection your identity is not revealed in the negotiation 17 6 7 Remote DNS Server In cases where you want to use domain names to access Intranet servers on a remote network that has a DNS server you must identify that DNS server You cannot use DNS servers on the LAN or from the ISP since these DNS servers cannot resolve domain names to private IP addresses on the remote network The following figure depicts an example where three VPN tunnels are created from Device A one to branch office 2 one to branch office 3 and another to headquarters In order to access computers that use private domain names on the headquarters HQ network the Device at branch office 1 uses the Intranet DNS server in headquarters The DNS server feature for VPN does not work with Windows 2000 or Windows XP Figure 114 VPN Host using Intranet DNS Server Example ISP DNS Servers 212 54 64 170 212 54 54 17 f LAN __PNS 212 54 64 170 e 212 54 64 171 HQ a mol 10 1 1 1 200 VPN DNS 10 1 1 10 VPN Tunnel 192 168 1 1 50 3 172 16 1 1 50 If you do not specify an Intranet DNS server on the remote network then the VPN host must use IP addresses to
213. e if other devices connected to this port should remain in the group Example Enabling IPv6 on Windows XP 2003 Vista By default Windows XP and Windows 2003 support IPv6 This example shows you how to use the ipv install command on Windows XP 2003 to enable IPv6 This EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 363 Appendix F IPv6 also displays how to use the ipconfig command to see auto generated IP addresses C gt ipv6 install hSstallanG lt 5 Succeeded Ce Si peontig Windows IP Configuration Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection Connecter LoOn sSpeeciriCc DNS OUTE y 4 IP HAGE ES Sis ses cat Sat Ge ee ES Se ee ot ca E DO Tae DUS MaSK a cde an a a see 8 a Gee hs SE a Oe OO LP AddrESS o so a s w ay GA e mae f feg80 2d0 59ff feb8 103c34 Default Gateway a sel tn ow ed I 10 1 1 254 IPv6 is installed and enabled by default in Windows Vista Use the ipconfig command to check your automatic configured IPv6 address as well You should see at least one IPv6 address available for the interface on your computer Example Enabling DHCPv6 on Windows XP Windows XP does not support DHCPv6 If your network uses DHCPv6 for IP address assignment you have to additionally install a DHCPv6 client software on your Windows XP Note If you use static IP addresses or Router Advertisement for Pv6 address assignment in your network ignore this section This example uses Dibbler as the DHCPv6 client To enable DHCP
214. e packet accordingly Packets assigned a high priority are processed more quickly than those with low priority if there is congestion allowing time sensitive applications to flow more smoothly Time sensitive applications include both those that require a low level of latency delay and a low level of jitter variations in delay such as Internet gaming and those for which jitter alone is a problem such as Internet radio or streaming video Note The Device has built in configurations for Voice over IP IP The Quality of Service QoS feature does not affect VoIP traffic e See Section 9 6 on page 159 for advanced technical information on SIP 9 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter e Use the General screen to enable QoS set the bandwidth and allow the Device to automatically assign priority to upstream traffic according to the IEEE 802 1p priority level IP precedence or packet length Section 9 2 on page 150 e Use the Queue Setup screen to configure QoS queue assignment Section 9 3 on page 151 e Use the Class Setup screen to set up classifiers to sort traffic into different flows and assign priority and define actions to be performed for a classified traffic flow Section 9 4 on page 153 e Use the Monitor screen to view the Device s QoS related packet statistics Section 9 5 on page 158 9 1 2 What You Need to Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 149
215. e telecommuters since it can find the telecommuters by resolving their domain names Figure 116 Telecommuters Using Unique VPN Rules Example LAN A TED 192 168 2 12 192 168 3 2 C LAN lt gt 192 168 4 15 Table 78 Telecommuters Using Unique VPN Rules Example Pero Content beio Coo oo Rete eRe T8RTERATE S a ess 19216832 a Local ID Content myVPN myplace com Peer ID Content myVPN myplace com Local IP Address 192 168 4 15 Secure Gateway Address telecommuterc com Remote Address 192 168 4 15 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 17 VPN 220 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide VoIP 18 1 Overview Use this chapter to e Connect an analog phone to the Device e Make phone calls over the Internet as well as the regular phone network e Configure settings such as speed dial e Configure network settings to optimize the voice quality of your phone calls 18 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter These screens allow you to configure your Device to make phone calls over the Internet and your regular phone line and to set up the phones you connect to the Device e Use the SIP Service Provider screen to configure the SIP server information QoS for VoIP calls the numbers for certain phone functions Section 18 3 on page 226 e Use the SIP Account screen to set up information about your SIP account control which SIP accounts the phones connected to the Device use and configure audio settings such as vo
216. e the Services screen to view the configured firewall rules and add edit or remove a firewall rule Section 13 3 on page 179 Use the Access Control screen to view and configure incoming outgoing filtering rules Section 13 4 on page 181 Use the DoS screen to activate protection against Denial of Service DoS attacks Section 13 5 on page 183 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 177 Chapter 13 Firewall 13 1 2 What You Need to Know Firewall The Device s firewall feature physically separates the LAN WLAN and the WAN and acts as a secure gateway for all data passing between the networks It is designed to protect against Denial of Service DoS attacks when activated The Device s purpose is to allow a private Local Area Network LAN to be securely connected to the Internet The Device can be used to prevent theft destruction and modification of data as well as log events which may be important to the security of your network The Device is installed between the LAN WLAN and a broadband modem connecting to the Internet This allows it to act as a Secure gateway for all data passing between the Internet and the LAN The Device has one Ethernet WAN port and four Ethernet LAN ports which are used to physically separate the network into two areas The WAN Wide Area Network port attaches to the broadband cable or DSL modem to the Internet The LAN Local Area Network port attaches to a network of computers which needs security from
217. e video photo and music shares published To change your Device s media server settings click Network Setting gt Home Networking gt Media Server The screen appears as shown Figure 44 Network Setting gt Home Networking gt Media Server M Enable Media Server The following table describes the labels in this menu Table 28 Network Setting gt Home Networking gt Media Server LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable Media Check this to have the Device function as a DLNA compliant media server Server Enable the media server to let DLNA compliant media clients on your network play media files located in the shares Apply Click Apply to save your changes 130 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 7 Home Networking 7 The Printer Server Screen The Device allows you to share a USB printer on your LAN You can do this by connecting a USB printer to one of the USB ports on the Device and then configuring a TCP IP port on the computers connected to your network Figure 45 Sharing a USB Printer 7 7 1 Before You Begin To configure the print server you need the following e Your Device must be connected to your computer and any other devices on your network The USB printer must be connected to your Device e A USB printer with the driver already installed on your computer e The computers on your network must have the printer software already installed before they can create a TCP IP port for printing via the netwo
218. e wireless adapters are within range of each other they can set up an independent network which is commonly referred to as an ad hoc network or Independent Basic Service Set IBSS The following diagram shows an example of notebook computers using wireless adapters to form an ad hoc wireless LAN Figure 217 Peer to Peer Communication in an Ad hoc Network SS BSS A Basic Service Set BSS exists when all communications between wireless clients or between a wireless client and a wired network client go through one access point AP Intra BSS traffic is traffic between wireless clients in the BSS When Intra BSS is enabled wireless client A and B can access the wired network and communicate with each other When Intra BSS is EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 333 Appendix D Wireless LANs disabled wireless client A and B can still access the wired network but cannot communicate with each other Figure 218 Basic Service Set ESS An Extended Service Set ESS consists of a series of overlapping BSSs each containing an access point with each access point connected together by a wired network This wired connection between APs is called a Distribution System DS This type of wireless LAN topology is called an Infrastructure WLAN The Access Points not only provide communication with the wired network but also mediate wireless network traffic in the immediate neighborhood 334 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Appendix D Wirel
219. eaa 82 5 1 2 What You Need to KNOW cccccccssssecccceeeeeeceeseecceausceceeueeecseaaeeeessaeeeessauaeeeessaaeeessageeesssnageees 82 ee BCIE TO BOO er iaatainabenemcmahssiaiatiptbhaan ples seme nhy mL aateeimnsamaniaL Riese 84 sep Rh P EE E E A E PE E E I seis eet eres 84 ge 1A Edi inene COmECION sceso A a 85 Soue Ea a T a E T A E 89 T E O E a E 91 Chapter 6 a A AE A E A tn E E E EE ee 95 R E E E E E AR ear eet 95 6 1 1 What You Can Do m ihis CrNaplel seisisiiisreirirainerinrisareisnirararaiseini odr drenare esanaia rnan IA Erain 95 6 1 2 Wireless Network Overview ss nussnunnnssennnssrnrnesrnrrnsrnrrrsrnrrrsrnrrrnrrrrsrrrresnrrrrsnrrrrnnrrrrnnnrrennrrrene 95 ic ee T E T E ENEE IEEE E A EAE EA 97 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Table of Contents ee FG Stes Cee EN A N I E E E N T I AE A TA T AT 97 aae oe E EEE EENE PEE E ANAA A AEE EEA TTE TETA ee 98 6 2 2 Basic Static WEP Shared WEP Encryption 0 lt c0ssses sceccecconseseececenseseereesnsesaneeensecnseesennens 99 Gaa POO SECUS FRF N eee a ee ne eee ee ener Re eee cee ee eee eee 101 6 2 4 WPA 2 Authentication ccccccccccseeeeeseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeaseeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeesegeeesaaeeesseseessageeesaes 102 Co TA AF a cesses see nc crniss steers ace asa EA esi E 103 sd OO et sennsipenseavaceidacenessiesesenecpnacayrats r 104 oe GC Ay i ae 2 2 eee een eee ee Renee ncn Mee eee net aCe sn enc E mee See re ee 105 BT tT a A eens adams ET 107 Se
220. eb configurator you need to allow e Web browser pop up windows from your device e JavaScript enabled by default e Java permissions enabled by default Note Internet Explorer 6 screens are used here Screens for other Internet Explorer versions may vary Internet Explorer Pop up Blockers You may have to disable pop up blocking to log into your device Either disable pop up blocking enabled by default in Windows XP SP Service Pack 2 or allow pop up blocking and create an exception for your device s IP address Disable Pop up Blockers 1 In Internet Explorer select Tools Pop up Blocker and then select Turn Off Pop up Blocker Figure 207 Pop up Blocker Tools Mail and News Pop up Blocker b urn OFF Pop up Blocker Manage Add ons Boo uo Blocker Setting p ee imi POERI Synchronize 1 Windows Update windows Messenger Internet Options You can also check if pop up blocking is disabled in the Pop up Blocker section in the Privacy tab 1 In Internet Explorer select Tools Internet Options Privacy EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 323 Appendix C Pop up Windows JavaScript and Java Permissions 2 Clear the Block pop ups check box in the Pop up Blocker section of the screen This disables any web pop up blockers you may have enabled Figure 208 Internet Options Privacy Internet Options General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Settings E M
221. eboot This does not affect the Device s configuration EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 269 Chapter 28 Backup Restore 2 0 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Diagnostic 29 1 Overview You can use different diagnostic methods to test a connection and see the detailed information These read only screens display information to help you identify problems with the Device 29 2 The Ping TraceRoute Screen Ping and traceroute help check availability of remote hosts and also help troubleshoot network or Internet connections Click Maintenance gt Diagnostic to open the Ping TraceRoute screen Shown next Figure 151 Maintenance gt Diagnostic gt Ping TraceRoute PING 192 168 1 33 192 168 1 33 56 data bytes 192 168 1 33 ping statistics 4 packets transmitted 0 packets received 100 packetloss The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 105 Maintenance gt Diagnostic gt Ping TraceRoute LABEL DESCRIPTION Ping Type the IP address of a computer that you want to ping in order to test a connection Click Ping and the ping statistics will show in the diagnostic TraceRoute Click this button to perform the traceroute function This determines the path a packet takes to the specified host EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 2 1 Chapter 29 Diagnostic 29 3 The DSL Line Screen Click Maintenance gt Diagnostic gt DSL Line to open the screen shown next Figure 152 Maintenance gt Diagnostic gt D
222. ection Status and System Info If you prefer to view the status in a list click List View in the Viewing mode Selection box You can configure how often you want the Device to update this screen in Refresh Interval Figure 10 Connection Status Icon View 4 55 Language English z cC Logout LAN Device E Viewing mode B Refresh Interval None f 3 Internet is e Connection Status Figure 11 Connection Status List View ZyXEL eters English v E E LAN Device l m Viewing mode Refresh Interval None x In Lcon View if you want to view information about a client click the client s name and Info Click the IP address if you want to change it If you want to change the name or icon of the client click Change name icon In List View you can also view the client s information EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 4 3 The System Info Screen Chapter 4 Connection Status and System Info Click Connection Status gt System Info to open this screen Figure 12 System Info Screen System Info ae Host Name Model Name MAC Address Firmware Version WAN Information Mode IP Address IP Subnet Mask LAN Information IP Address IP Subnet Mask DHCP Server WLAN Information Channel WPS Status SSID1 Information SSID Status Security Mode SSID2 Information SSID Status Security Mode SSID3 Information SSID Status S
223. ecurity Mode router 00 a0 c5 60 18 27 3 00 AACM 0 b1 ETHER WAN IPoE 192 168 1 1 255 255 255 0 Server 11 Unconfigured ZyXEL_1824 On WPA2 PSK mixed ZyXEL_1825 Off WPA2 PSK mixed ZyXEL_1826 Off WPA2 PSK mixed Interface ETHER WAN LAN 1 LAN 2 LAN 3 LAN 4 WLAN 3G System Up Time Current Date Time System Resource CPU Usage Memory Usage Type Storage Printer See NONE x CO ee Status Rate Down NIA Down NIA Up 1000Mbps Down NIA Down NIA Up 300Mbps Disabled NIA 2 min Sat Jan 1 01 02 20 CET 2000 47 0 SSID4 Information SSID ZyXEL_1827 Status Off Security Mode VWPA2 PSK mixed Account Action Account Status URI SIP 1 Register In Active Register In Active ChangeMe ChangeMe ChangeMe ChangeMe Connection Status Each field is described in the following table Table 4 System Info Screen LABEL DESCRIPTION Language Select the web configurator language from the drop down list box Refresh Select how often you want the Device to update this screen from the drop down list box Interval Device Information Host Name This field displays the Device system name It is used for identification You can change this in the Maintenance gt System screen s Host Name field Model Name This is the model name of your device sae This is the MAC Media Access Control or Ethernet address unique to your Device Address Firmware This field
224. ed WEP from the Security Mode list Figure 22 Wireless gt General Basic Static WEP Shared WEP security Level Security Mode Static WEP Mote The WEP ired equivalency privacy key is like password that you need to gain access to the network Type your manual WEF key using one of the following guidelines Sto 13 ASCII keyboard characters 10 to 26 HEX characters containing 0 9 and A F only Longer WEP keys are more secure than short ones WEP Key The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 12 Wireless gt General Basic Static WEP Shared WEP LABEL DESCRIPTION Security Mode Choose Static WEP or Shared WEP from the drop down list box e Select Static WEP to have the Device allow association with wireless clients that use Open System mode Data transfer is encrypted as long as the wireless client has the correct WEP key for encryption The Device authenticates wireless clients using Shared Key mode that have the correct WEP key Select Shared WEP to have the Device authenticate only those wireless clients that use Shared Key mode and have the correct WEP key Enter a WEP key that will be used to encrypt data Both the Device and the wireless stations must use the same WEP key for data transmission If you want to manually set the WEP key enter any 5 or 13 characters ASCII string or 10 or 26 hexadecimal characters 0 9 A F for a 64 bit or 128 bit WEP key respectively
225. ed and includes an Expiring or Expired message if the certificate is about to expire or has already expired Action Click the Delete icon to delete the certificate or certification request You cannot delete a certificate that one or more features is configured to use Click on the Download icon to download a certificate to your computer 16 6 1 Import Certificate Click I mport Certificate in the VPN Certificates screen to open the I mport Certificate screen You can save a trusted certification authority s certificate to the Device 198 EMG5324 D10A Users Guide Chapter 16 Certificates Figure 102 Security gt Certificates gt VPN Certificates Name Private Key BEGIN RSA PRIVATE KEY Delete all these words and add yours Apply Back The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 66 VPN Certificates gt Import LABEL DESCRIPTION Public Key The value provided by a designated authority which combined with a private key can be used to encrypt messages Write the key between BEGI N CERTI FI CATE and END CERTI FI CATE Private Key This is the key known only to the parties that exchange information Write the key between BEGI N CERTI FI CATE and END CERTI FI CATE Apply Click Apply to save the certificate on the Device Click Back to return to the previous screen EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 16 Certificates 200 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide VPN
226. ed digital cellular standard pioneered by System PHS etc Qualcomm The brand name for IS 95 is cdmaOne IS 95 is also Known as TIA EIA 95 Packet GPRS General Packet Radio Services CDMA2000 is a hybrid 2 5G 3G protocol of Switched High Speed Circuit Switched Data mobile telecommunications standards that HSCSD etc use CDMA a multiple access scheme for is also Known as 1x 1xRTT or 1S 2000 and considered to be a 2 5G or 2 75G technology 2 5G Packet Enhanced Data rates for GSM Evolution digital radio switched EDGE Enhanced GPRS EGPRS etc CDMA2000 1xRTT 1 times Radio Transmission Technology is the core CDMA2000 wireless air interface standard It defined in ITU specification is just EV is an evolution of CDMA2000 1xRTT sometimes marketed as 3GSM The UMTS and enables high speed wireless uses GSM infrastructures and W CDMA connectivity It is also denoted as IS 856 or Wideband Code Division Multiple Access High Data Rate HDR as the air interface Packet HSDPA High Speed Downlink Packet switched Access is a mobile telephony protocol used for UMTS based 3G networks and allows for higher data transfer speeds Fast A The International Telecommunication Union ITU is an international organization within which governments and the private sector coordinate global telecom networks and services 2G 2 5G 3G Packet UMTS Universal Mobile CDMA2000 EV DO Evolution Data Switched Telecommunications
227. ed in as the root administrator Follow the steps below to configure your computer IP address in GNOME 1 Click System gt Administration gt Network Figure 192 Ubuntu 8 System gt Administration Menu system a Preferences fox Administration Th Authorizations Ret Hardware Drivers Help and Support About GNOME e Hardware Testing Es Language Support E Login Window 0 Quit m Network 3 About Ubuntu Network Tools EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 2 When the Network Settings window opens click Unlock to open the Authenticate window By default the Unlock button is greyed out until clicked You cannot make changes to your configuration unless you first enter your admin password Figure 193 Ubuntu 8 Network Settings gt Connections ENOI C APRE Ea Lal _ e kT i De t d Tea cms SO sel pis Gen S a M Location fe e Connections General DNS Hosts Wired connection Properties Roaming mode enabled Point to point connec This network interface is not c 3 Inthe Authenticate window enter your admin account name and password then click the Authenticate button Figure 194 Ubuntu 8 Administrator Account Authentication E Authenticate System policy prevents modifying the configuration An application is atternpting to perform an action that requires privileges Authentication as one of
228. ed to know your Internet access settings such as encapsulation and WAN IP address Get this information from your ISP 5 2 The Broadband Screen The Device must have a WAN interface to allow users to use the Ethernet WAN port or DSL port to access the Internet Use the Broadband screen to view or modify a WAN interface Click Network Setting gt Broadband The following screen opens Figure 15 Network Setting gt Broadband Add new WAN Interface Internet Setup q Ether Ether Routing IPoE IPv40 NVA NIA NVA NIA MA Enabl Enabl Yes 4 i The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 5 Network Setting gt Broadband LABEL DESCRIPTION ae new WAN EEE this to create a new WAN interface Interface This is the index number of the connection is the index number of the connection Name This is the service name of the connection ener anton i aren This is the Virtual Path Identifier VPI This is the Virtual Channel Identifier VCI Vian8021p This indicates the 802 1P priority level assigned to traffic sent through this connection This displays N A when there is no priority level assigned VianMuxld This indicates the VLAN ID number assigned to traffic sent through this connection This displays N A when there is no VLAN ID number assigned ATM QoS This shows the ATM Quality of Service QoS type configured for this connection This displays N A when there is no ATM QoS assigned 8
229. efresh Interval None Z Ve Internet a eS Connection Status 7 Click System Info to display the System Info screen where you can view the Device s interface and system information 24 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 2 2 The Web Configurator Layout Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator Click Connection Status gt System Info to show the following screen Figure 8 Web Configurator Layout ZyXEL System Info E M Host Name Model Name MAC Address Firmware Version WAN Information Mode IP Address IP Subnet Mask LAN Information IP Address IP Subnet Mask DHCP Server WLAN Information Channel WPS Status SSID1 Information SSID Status Security Mode SSID2 Information SSID Status Security Mode SSID3 Information SSID Status Security Mode SSID4 Information SSID Status Security Mode router 00 a0 c5 60 18 27 3 00 AACM 0 b1 ETHER WAN IPoE 192 168 255 255 Server 1 1 255 0 11 Unconfigured ZyXEL_1824 On WPA2 PSK mixed ZyXEL_1825 Off WPA2 PSK mixed ZyXEL_1826 Off VWPA2 PSK mixed ZyXEL_1827 Off WPA2 PSK mixed Action Register Register Connection Status etree English v E T Refresh Interval NONE x a Sk rrr Interface ETHER WAN LAN 1 LAN 2 LAN 3 LAN 4 WLAN 3G System Up Time Current Date Time System Resource CPU Usage Memory Usage
230. en The upload process uses HTTP Hypertext Transfer Protocol and may take up to three minutes After a successful upload the system will reboot Do NOT turn off the Device while firmware upload is in progress Figure 143 Maintenance gt Firmware Upgrade Upgrade Firmware Current Firmware Version V3 70 TUJ 0 b4 FilePath The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 103 Maintenance gt Firmware Upgrade LABEL DESCRIPTION Current This is the present Firmware version Firmware Version File Path Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse to find it Browse Click this to find the bin file you want to upload Remember that you must decompress compressed zip files before you can upload them Upload Click this to begin the upload process This process may take up to three minutes EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 265 Chapter 27 Firmware Upgrade After you see the firmware updating screen wait a few minutes before logging into the Device again Figure 144 Firmware Uploading Hod Router is restarting now Please wait AS there willbe no indication of when the process is complete please waitfor one minute before attempting to access the router again The Device automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network disconnect In some operating systems you may see the following icon on your desktop Figure 145 Network Temporarily
231. ent can still act as enrollee or registrar in subsequent WPS connections but a configured access point can no longer act as enrollee It will be the registrar in all subsequent WPS connections in which it is involved If you want a configured AP to act as an enrollee you must reset it to its factory defaults Example WPS Network Setup This section shows how security settings are distributed in an example WPS setup The following figure shows an example network In step 1 both AP1 and Client 1 are unconfigured When WPS is activated on both they perform the handshake In this example AP1 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 349 Appendix D Wireless LANs is the registrar and Client 1 is the enrollee The registrar randomly generates the security information to set up the network since it is unconfigured and has no existing information Figure 225 WPS Example Network Step 1 ENROLLEE REGISTRAR lt QD SECURITY INFO CLIENT 1 AP1 In step 2 you add another wireless client to the network You know that Client 1 supports registrar mode but it is better to use AP1 for the WPS handshake with the new client since you must connect to the access point anyway in order to use the network In this case AP1 must be the registrar since it is configured it already has security information for the network AP1 supplies the existing security information to Client 2 Figure 226 WPS Example Network Step 2 REGISTRAR EXISTING CO
232. enter it in a way that appears random 110 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 6 Wireless and does not include real words For example tf your mother owns a 1970 Dodge Challenger and her favorite movie is Vanishing Point which you know was made in 1971 you could use 70dodchal71vanpoi as your security key The following sections introduce different types of wireless security you can set up in the wireless network 6 8 2 1 SSID Normally the Device acts like a beacon and regularly broadcasts the SSID in the area You can hide the SSID instead in which case the Device does not broadcast the SSID In addition you should change the default SSID to something that is difficult to guess This type of security is fairly weak however because there are ways for unauthorized wireless devices to get the SSID In addition unauthorized wireless devices can still see the information that is sent in the wireless network 6 8 2 2 MAC Address Filter Every device that can use a wireless network has a unique identification number called a MAC address A MAC address is usually written using twelve hexadecimal characters for example OOA0C5000002 or 00 A0 C5 00 00 02 To get the MAC address for each device in the wireless network see the device s User s Guide or other documentation You can use the MAC address filter to tell the Device which devices are allowed or not allowed to use the wireless network If a device is allowed to use
233. entity to I1P address or domain name mapping The register server checks your user name and password when you register RTP When you make a VoIP call using SIP the RTP Real time Transport Protocol is used to handle voice data transfer See RFC 3550 for details on RTP Pulse Code Modulation Pulse Code Modulation PCM measures analog signal amplitudes at regular time intervals and converts them into bits SIP Call Progression The following figure displays the basic steps in the setup and tear down of a SIP call A calls B Table 86 SIP Call Progression ce 236 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 18 VoIP Table 86 SIP Call Progression continued a 1 A sends a SIP INVITE request to B This message is an invitation for B to participate in a SIP telephone call 2 B sends a response indicating that the telephone is ringing 3 B sends an OK response after the call is answered 4 Athen sends an ACK message to acknowledge that B has answered the call 5 Now A and B exchange voice media talk 6 After talking A hangs up and sends a BYE request 7 B replies with an OK response confirming receipt of the BYE request and the call is terminated Voice Coding A codec coder decoder codes analog voice signals into digital signals and decodes the digital Signals back into analog voice signals The Device supports the following codecs e G 711 is a Pulse Code Modulation PCM waveform codec PCM measures analog s
234. er Transport Mode IPSec IP TOF Sai Protected Packet Header Header Header TCP Header IPSec IP Header Header Tunnel Mode IP Protected Packet Header Data Tunnel Mode Tunnel mode encapsulates the entire IP packet to transmit it securely A Tunnel mode is required for gateway services to provide access to internal systems Tunnel mode is fundamentally an IP tunnel with authentication and encryption This is the most common mode of operation Tunnel mode is required for gateway to gateway and host to gateway communications Tunnel mode communications have two sets of IP headers e Outside header The outside IP header contains the destination IP address of the VPN gateway e Inside header The inside IP header contains the destination IP address of the final system behind the VPN gateway The security protocol appears after the outer IP header and before the inside IP header EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 2 3 Chapter 17 VPN 17 6 5 IKE Phases There are two phases to every IKE Internet Key Exchange negotiation phase 1 Authentication and phase 2 Key Exchange A phase 1 exchange establishes an IKE SA and the second one uses that SA to negotiate SAs for IPSec Figure 113 Two Phases to Set Up the IPSec SA Phase In phase 1 you must e Choose a negotiation mode e Authenticate the connection by entering a pre shared key e Choose an encryption algorithm e Choose an authentication algorithm
235. er s Guide Chapter 6 Wireless Table 19 Network Setting gt Wireless gt Scheduling continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings 6 7 The Channel Status Screen Use the Channel Status screen to scan wireless LAN channel noises and view the results Click Network Setting gt Wireless gt Channel Status The screen appears as shown Click Scan to scan the wireless LAN channels You can view the results in the Channel Scan Result section Figure 30 Network Setting gt Wireless gt Channel Status Channel Monitor Scan WLAN channels Can z Note take a while to scan the wireless channels Channel Scan Result E Current WLAN Channel Channel Noise Channel Noise Channel No 6 8 Technical Reference This section discusses wireless LANs in depth For more information see the appendix EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 109 Chapter 6 Wireless 6 8 1 Additional Wireless Terms The following table describes some wireless network terms and acronyms used in the Device s web configurator Table 20 Additional Wireless Terms RTS CTS In a wireless network which covers a large area wireless devices are sometimes not aware Threshold of each other s presence This may cause them to send information to the AP at the same time and result in information colliding and not getting through By setting this value lower than the default value
236. er s Guide 19 Chapter 1 Introduction 1 4 Ways to Manage the Device Use any of the following methods to manage the Device e Web Configurator This is recommended for everyday management of the Device using a Supported web browser e FTP for firmware upgrades and configuration backup restore 1 5 Good Habits for Managing the Device Do the following things regularly to make the Device more secure and to manage the Device more effectively e Change the password Use a password that s not easy to guess and that consists of different types of characters such as numbers and letters e Write down the password and put it in a Safe place e Back up the configuration and make sure you know how to restore it Restoring an earlier working configuration may be useful if the device becomes unstable or even crashes If you forget your password to access the Web Configurator you will have to reset the Device to its factory default settings If you backed up an earlier configuration file you would not have to totally re configure the Device You could simply restore your last configuration Keep in mind that backing up a configuration file will not back up passwords used to set up PPPoE and VolP Write down any information your ISP provides you 1 6 LEDs Lights The following graphic displays the labels of the LEDs Figure 4 LEDs on the Top of the Device O O O OQ e Q Q O O O 2 4 INTERNET WAN POWER WLAN WPS L PHONE
237. er Name SIP Local Port Main SIP Server Address SIP Server Port REGISTER Server Address REGISTER Server Port SIP Service Domain Bound Interface Name Bound Interface Name RFC Support PRACK RFC 3262 Il DNS SRV Enabled RFC 3263 l Session Timer RFC 4028 VoIP IOP Flags ChangeMe x M Enable SIP Service Provider ChangeMe 5060 1025 65535 ChangeMe 5060 1025 65535 ChangeMe 5060 1025 65535 ChangeMe SS hide more AnyWAN Supported x QoS Tag SIP TOS Priority Setting RTP TOS Priority Setting Timer Setting Expiration Duration Register Re send timer Session Expires Min SE Dialing Interval Selection Dialing Interval Selection Phone Key Config Call Return Caller Display Call Caller Hidden Call One Shot Caller Hidden Call Call Waiting Enable Call Waiting Disable One Shot Call Waiting Enable One Shot Call Waiting Disable Internal Call Call Transfer fo 0 255 fo 0 255 600 60 65535 second 512 1480 65535 second fiso 1400 3600 second 90 90 1800 second 3 x second Poze 30 30 31 pe Replace dial digit to 23 in SIP messages Remove 5060 and transport udp from request uri in SIP messages Remove the Route header in SIP messages Dont send re Iinvite to the remote party when there are multiple codecs answered in the SDP Remove the Authentication header in SIP ACK message RTP Port Ran
238. ere are a couple of examples Daylight Saving Time ends in the United States on the first Sunday of November Each time zone in the United States stops using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A M local time So in the United States you would select First Sunday November and type 2 in the o clock field Daylight Saving Time ends in the European Union on the last Sunday of October All of the time zones in the European Union stop using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment 1 A M GMT or UTC So in the European Union you would select Last Sunday October The time you type in the o clock field depends on your time zone In Germany for instance you would type 2 because Germany s time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC GMT 1 Apply Click Apply to save your changes Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh EMG5324 D10A Users Guide Log Setting 26 1 Overview You can configure where the Device sends logs and which logs and or immediate alerts the Device records in the Log Setting screen 26 2 The Log Setting Screen To change your Device s log settings click Maintenance gt Log Setting The screen appears as Shown Figure 142 Maintenance gt Log Setting Syslog Setting Syslog Logging Enable Disable Syslog Server 0 0 0 0 IP Address UDP Port 514 Server Port Active Log and Select Level Log Category VoIP VolP Call Statistics M VoIP SIP Call Signaling M VoIP SIP Registrations I
239. ered with the IANA It should not change over time even after you reboot the device Identity Association An Identity Association 1A is a collection of addresses assigned to a DHCP client through which the server and client can manage a set of related IP addresses Each IA must be associated with exactly one interface The DHCP client uses the 5 In IPv6 all network interfaces can be associated with several addresses 360 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Appendix F IPv6 IA assigned to an interface to obtain configuration from a DHCP server for that interface Each IA consists of a unique IAID and associated IP information The IA type is the type of address in the IA Each IA holds one type of address IA_NA means an identity association for non temporary addresses and IA_TA is an identity association for temporary addresses An IA_NA option contains the T1 and T2 fields but an IA_TA option does not The DHCPv6 server uses T1 and T2 to control the time at which the client contacts with the server to extend the lifetimes on any addresses in the IA_NA before the lifetimes expire After T1 the client sends the server S1 from which the addresses in the IA_NA were obtained a Renew message If the time T2 is reached and the server does not respond the client sends a Rebind message to any available server S2 For an IA_TA the client may send a Renew or Rebind message at the client s discretion l T2 T1 l O S1 Za o S
240. es performance as less time sending preamble means more time for sending data All IEEE 802 11 compliant wireless adapters support long preamble but not all support short preamble Use long preamble if you are unsure what preamble mode other wireless devices on the network Support and to provide more reliable communications in busy wireless networks Use short preamble if you are sure all wireless devices on the network support it and to provide more efficient communications Use the dynamic setting to automatically use short preamble when all wireless devices on the network support it otherwise the Device uses long preamble Note The wireless devices MUST use the same preamble mode in order to communicate IEEE 802 119 Wireless LAN IEEE 802 11g is fully compatible with the IEEE 802 11b standard This means an IEEE 802 11b adapter can interface directly with an IEEE 802 11g access point and vice versa at 11 Mbps or lower depending on range IEEE 802 11g has several intermediate rate steps between the maximum and minimum data rates The IEEE 802 11g data rate and modulation are as follows Table 117 IEEE 802 119 DATA RATE MBPS MODULATION DQPSK Differential Quadrature Phase Shift Keying 5 5 11 CCK Complementary Code Keying 6 9 12 18 24 36 48 OFDM Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing 54 Wireless Security Overview Wireless security is vital to your network to protect wireless communication between wirel
241. es the fields in this screen Table 60 Add Edit Parental Control Rule LABEL DESCRIPTION General Active Select the checkbox to activate this parental control rule 188 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 15 Parental Control Table 60 Add Edit Parental Control Rule continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Parental Enter a descriptive name for the rule Control Profile Name Home Network Select the LAN user that you want to apply this rule to from the drop down list box If you User select Custom enter the LAN user s MAC address If you select All the rule applies to all LAN users Internet Access Schedule a Select check boxes for the days that you want the Device to perform parental control Drag the time bar to define the time that the LAN user is allowed access Network Service Network If you select Block the Device prohibits the users from viewing the Web sites with the Service Setting URLs listed below If you select Access the Device blocks access to all URLs except ones listed below Add new Click this to show a screen in which you can add a new service rule You can configure the service Service Name Protocol and Name of the new rule This shows the index number of the rule Select the checkbox next to the rule to activate it This shows the name of the rule Protocol Port This shows the protocol and the port of the rule Modify Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the rule
242. ess clients access points and the wired network Wireless security methods available on the Device are data encryption wireless client authentication restricting access by device MAC address and hiding the Device identity EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 33 Appendix D Wireless LANs The following figure shows the relative effectiveness of these wireless security methods available on your Device Table 118 Wireless Security Levels SECURITY LEVEL SECURITY TYPE Least Unique SSID Default Wi Fi Protected Access WPA WPA2 Most Secure Note You must enable the same wireless security settings on the Device and on all wireless clients that you want to associate with it IEEE 802 1x In June 2001 the IEEE 802 1x standard was designed to extend the features of IEEE 802 11 to Support extended authentication as well as providing additional accounting and control features It IS Supported by Windows XP and a number of network devices Some advantages of IEEE 802 1x are e User based identification that allows for roaming e Support for RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RFC 2138 2139 for centralized user profile and accounting management on a network RADIUS server e Support for EAP Extensible Authentication Protocol RFC 2486 that allows additional authentication methods to be deployed with no changes to the access point or the wireless clients RADIUS RADIUS is based on a client server model that sup
243. ess LANs An ESSID ESS Dentification uniquely identifies each ESS All access points and their associated wireless clients within the same ESS must have the same ESSID in order to communicate Figure 219 Infrastructure WLAN w x s wne t ae Channel A channel is the radio frequency ies used by wireless devices to transmit and receive data Channels available depend on your geographical area You may have a choice of channels for your region so you should use a channel different from an adjacent AP access point to reduce Interference Interference occurs when radio signals from different access points overlap causing interference and degrading performance Adjacent channels partially overlap however To avoid interference due to overlap your AP should be on a channel at least five channels away from a channel that an adjacent AP is using For example if your region has 11 channels and an adjacent AP is using channel 1 then you need to select a channel between 6 or 11 RTS CTS A hidden node occurs when two stations are within range of the same access point but are not within range of each other The following figure illustrates a hidden node Both stations STA are within range of the access point AP or wireless gateway but out of range of each other so they EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs cannot hear each other that is they do not know if the channel is currently being used The
244. ess format is as follows Table 122 Link local Unicast Address Format 1111 1110 10 io Interface ID 10 bits 54 bits 64 bits Global Address A global address uniquely identifies a device on the Internet It is similar to a public IP address in IPv4 A global unicast address starts with a 2 or 3 Unspecified Address An unspecified address 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 or is used as the source address when a device does not have its own address It is similar to 0 0 0 0 in IPv4 Loopback Address A loopback address 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 or 1 allows a host to send packets to itself It is similar to 127 0 0 1 in IPv4 Multicast Address In IPv6 multicast addresses provide the same functionality as Pv4 broadcast addresses Broadcasting is not supported in IPv6 A multicast address allows a host to send packets to all hosts in a multicast group Multicast scope allows you to determine the size of the multicast group A multicast address has a predefined prefix of ff00 8 The following table describes some of the predefined multicast addresses Table 123 Predefined Multicast Address MULTICAST ADDRESS DESCRIPTION All hosts on a local node All routers on a local node All hosts on a local connected link All routers on a local connected link All routers on a local site All DHCP severs on a local site 358 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Appendix F IPv6 The following table describes the multicast addre
245. eters Summary Refer to this table to see what other security parameters you should configure for each authentication method or key management protocol type MAC address filters are not dependent on how you configure these security features Table 120 Wireless Security Relational Matrix AUTHENTICATION ENCRYPTIO ENTER METHOD KEY MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL N METHOD MANUAL KEY Enable without Enable without Dynamic WEP Key WEP Key Open WEP oO Enable with Dynamic WEP Key K E Enable without Dynamic WEP Key IEEE 802 1X p ooo a E C a E Wo Babe Antenna Overview An antenna couples RF signals onto air A transmitter within a wireless device sends an RF signal to the antenna which propagates the signal through the air The antenna also operates in reverse by capturing RF signals from the air Positioning the antennas properly increases the range and coverage area of a wireless LAN 344 EMG5324 D10A Users Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs Antenna Characteristics Frequency An antenna in the frequency of 2 4GHz IEEE 802 11b and IEEE 802 119 or 5GHz IEEE 802 11a Is needed to communicate efficiently in a wireless LAN Radiation Pattern A radiation pattern is a diagram that allows you to visualize the shape of the antenna s coverage area Antenna Gain Antenna gain measured in dB decibel is the increase in coverage within the RF beam width Higher antenna gain improves the range of the signal for better comm
246. ey exchange 340 E EAP Authentication 339 echo cancellation 222 Encapsulation 91 MER 91 PPP over Ethernet 91 encapsulation 82 213 encryption 112 341 ESP 211 ESS 334 Europe type call service mode 239 Extended Service Set Dentification 98 105 Extended Service Set see ESS F FCC interference statement 369 File Sharing 127 filters MAC address 111 firewalls 177 add protocols 179 configuration 178 DoS 178 security 184 firmware 265 flash key 239 flashing 239 fragmentation threshold 110 336 FTP 162 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide G G 168 222 Guide Quick Start 2 H hidden node 335 host 253 host name 77 IANA 133 290 IBSS 333 ID type and content 216 IEEE 802 11g 337 IEEE 802 1Q 92 IEEE 802 1Q VLAN 239 IGMP 92 version 92 IKE phases 214 Importing trusted CAs 195 Independent Basic Service Set see IBSS initialization vector IV 342 inside header 213 install UPnP 136 Windows Me 136 Windows XP 137 Interface group 175 Internet Assigned Numbers Authority See IANA Internet Assigned Numbers Authority see IANA Internet Key Exchange 214 Internet Protocol Security see IPSec Internet Protocol version 6 83 Internet Protocol version 6 see IPv6 Internet Service Provider see ISP IP address 78 133 default 23 WAN 82 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Index IP Address Assignment 91 IP pool 125 IP pool setup 132 IPSec 201 algorithms 211 architecture 211 NAT 211 see
247. f A F and 0 9 Pre Shared Key PaPSkpresharedkey34 mare 2 Make sure Enable Wireless LAN is selected 3 Enter SSID _Example3 as the SSID and select Auto in the Channel Selection field to have the device search for an available channel 4 Select 802 11b g in the Mode Select field 5 Select More Secure as your security level and set security mode to WPA PSK and enter 12MyWPAPSKpresharedkey34 in the Pre Shared Key field Click Apply EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 6 Click Connection Status gt System Info Verify your wireless and wireless security settings under Device Information and check if the WLAN connection is up under Interface Status V4 JE ete ea English v E Logout System Info y Refresh Interval None gt Host Name router Model Name MAC Address 00 13 49 11 66 8f Firmware Version WAN 1 Information VDSL WAN 1 Mode IPoE IP Address IP Subnet Mask LAN Information IP Address IP Subnet Mask DHCP Server DHCPv6 Server DHCPV6 Relay WLAN Information DSL Up Time NIA Channel 5 System Up Time 1 day 6 19 WPS Status Configured Current Date Time Sun Jan 2 07 19 54 CET 2000 SSID1 Information System Resource SSID SSID_Example3 CPU Usage i 20 Status On Security Mode WPA PSK Memory Usage n 51 8 Interface Status Rate VDSL WAN Down N A LAN 1 Up 1000Mbps LAN 2 Down N A LAN 3 Down N A AN 4 Down M A WLAN Up 300Mbps 3G
248. f the actual bandwidth If you set this number lower than the interface s actual transmission speed the Device will not use some of the interface s available bandwidth Leave this field blank to have the Device set this value automatically These fields are ignored if upstream traffic matches a class you configured in the Class Setup screen If you select Ethernet Priority I P Precedence or Packet Length and traffic does not match a class configured in the Class Setup screen the Device assigns priority to unmatched traffic based on the IEEE 802 1 priority level IP precedence or packet length See Section 9 6 1 on page 159 for more information Apply Click Apply to save your changes Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings 9 3 The Queue Setup Screen Use this screen to configure QoS queue assignment Click Network Setting gt QoS gt Queue Setup to open the screen as shown next Figure 66 Network Setting gt QoS gt Queue Setup Add new Queue Note WAN _Default_Queue LAN Default_Queue Fast Active user Passive user Slow Maximum 6 user configurable entries EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 9 Quality of Service QoS The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 34 Network Setting gt QoS gt Queue Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Add new Queue Click this to create a new entry This is
249. fastened to the wall They need to hold the weight of the Device with the connection cables Figure 153 Wall mounting 1 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 281 Chapter 31 Wall mounting Instructions 5 Mount the Device on the wall mounting bracket which is already installed on the wall that the Device is firmly attached to the bracket so it does not fall off Figure 154 Wall mounting 2 Make sure NN Pel a haa b ER z SS S Se E ee Gi ee A Ol ji The following are dimensions of an M4 tap screw and masonry plug used for wall mounting All measurements are in millimeters mm Figure 155 Masonry Plug and M4 Tap Screw 4 22e 0 1 SUUS 30 0 2 0 282 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide IP Addresses and Subnetting This appendix introduces IP addresses and subnet masks IP addresses identify individual devices on a network Every networking device Such as computers servers routers and printers needs an IP address to communicate across the network These networking devices are also known as hosts Subnet masks determine the maximum number of possible hosts on a network You can also use subnet masks to divide one network into multiple sub networks Introduction to IP Addresses One part of the IP address is the network number and the other part is the host ID In the same way that houses on a street share a common street name the hosts on a network share a common network num
250. fic priority will be automatically assigned by None M Active u pstream hardware Queue if avaiable B Note You can assign the upstream bandwidth manually lf the field is empty the CPE set the value automatically lf Enable QoS checkbox is selected choose an automapping type to assign traffic priority automatically 150 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 9 Quality of Service QoS The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 33 Network Setting gt QoS gt General LABEL Active QoS WAN Managed Upstream Bandwidth Traffic priority will be automatically assigned by DESCRIPTION Select the check box to turn on QoS to improve your network performance You can give priority to traffic that the Device forwards out through the WAN interface Give high priority to voice and video to make them run more smoothly Similarly give low priority to many large file downloads so that they do not reduce the quality of other applications Enter the amount of bandwidth for the WAN interface that you want to allocate using QoS The recommendation is to set this speed to match the interface s actual transmission speed For example set the WAN interface speed to 1000 kbps if your Internet connection has an upstream transmission speed of 1 Mbps Setting this number higher than the interface s actual transmission speed will stop lower priority traffic from being sent if higher priority traffic uses all o
251. finding out the IP address of the Device first This comes helpful if you do not know the IP address of the Device Follow the steps below to access the web configurator 1 Click Start and then Control Panel 2 Double click Network Connections 142 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 7 Home Networking 3 Select My Network Places under Other Places Figure 59 Network Connections Network Connections Fie Edit View Favorites Tools Advanced Help Back Bs Jo Search Folders Hab Network Tasks ii T Internet Connection Create a new connection ed Disabled Set up a home or small h Internet Connection office network LAN or High Speed Internet See Also Local 4rea Connection J Network Troubleshooter a Enabled La Accton EN120 D Ts PEIL Fast Other Places gt Control Panel a My Network Places My Documents P My computer Details Network Connections System Folder i F Sia FI E Network Connections 4 An icon with the description for each UPnP enabled device displays under Local Network EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 7 Home Networking 5 Right click on the icon for your Device and select Invoke The web configurator login screen displays Figure 60 Network Connections My Network Places s My Network Places Fie Edit wiew Favorites Tools Help fa a P a Pad Search i Folders Hak Address a My Network Places Local Network Network Tasks al Adda
252. g be sure that 1 The device is turned on 2 The network is connected and configured To continue click Next Cancel 6 Enter the IP address of the Device to which the printer is connected in the Printer Name or IP Address field In our example we use the default IP address of the Device 192 168 1 1 The Port Name field updates automatically to reflect the IP address of the port Click Next Note The computer from which you are configuring the TCP IP printer port must be on the same LAN in order to use the printer sharing function Add Standard TERE Printer Port Wizard Add Port For which device do you want to add a port Enter the Printer Hame or IF address and a port name for the desired device Printer Name or IP Address 192 168 1 1 Fort Name IF_192 165 1 1 EMG5324 D10A Users Guide 57 Chapter 3 Tutorials 7 Select Custom under Device Type and click Settings Add Standard TEPME Printer Port Wizard Additional Port Information Required The device could not be identified The device is not found on the network Be sure that 1 The device is turned on 2 The network i connected 3 The device tt properly configured 4 The address on the previous page is correct IF You think the address i not corect click Back to return to the previous page Then correct the address and perform another search on the network fF you are sure the address i corect select the device type below Device Type
253. g screen This screen displays a list of the configured incoming or outgoing filtering rules Figure 89 Security gt Firewall gt Access Control Add new ACL rule TCF Any Port gt An PERMIT The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 55 Security gt Firewall gt Access Control LABEL DESCRIPTION Add new ACL Click this to go to add a filter rule for incoming or outgoing IP traffic rule This displays the name of the rule Src IP This displays the source IP addresses to which this rule applies Please note that a blank source address is equivalent to Any Dst IP This displays the destination IP addresses to which this rule applies Please note that a blank destination address is equivalent to Any Services This displays the transport layer protocol that defines the service and the direction of traffic to which this rule applies Policy This field displays whether the rule silently discards packets DROP discards packets and sends a TCP reset packet or an ICMP destination unreachable message to the sender REJ ECT or allows the passage of packets ACCEPT Modify Click the Edit icon to edit the rule Click the Delete icon to delete an existing rule Note that subsequent rules move up by one when you take this action EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 181 Chapter 13 Firewall 13 4 1 Add Edit an ACL Rule Click Add new ACL rule or the Edit icon next to an existing ACL rule in the Access Cont
254. ge Start Port End Port DTMF Mode DTMF Mode Transport Type Transport Type FAX Option 6711 Fax Passthrough Outbound Proxy l Enable Server Address Server Port EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 50000 1025 65535 65535 1025 65535 RFC 2833 UDP T38 Fax Relay C 1025 65535 Unconditional Call Forward Enable Unconditional Call Forward Disable No Answer Call Forward Enable No Answer Call Forward Disable Call Forward When Busy Enable Call Forward When Busy Disable Do Not Disturb Enable Do Not Disturb Disable PSTN Fail Over Fall back to PSTN when SIP is unregistered or SIP call fail Chapter 18 VoIP The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 79 VoIP gt SIP gt SIP Service Provider LABEL DESCRIPTION Service Select the SIP service provider profile you want to use for the SIP account you configure in Provider this screen If you change this field the screen automatically refreshes Selection General SIP Service Select this if you want the Device to use this SIP provider Clear it if you do not want the Provider Device to use this SIP provider SIP Service Enter the name of your SIP service provider Provider Name SIP Local Port Enter the Device s listening port number if your VoIP service provider gave you one Otherwise keep the default value SIP Server Enter the IP address or domain name of the SIP server provided by your VoIP service
255. gly 3 A 256 bit Pairwise Master Key PMK is derived from the authentication process by the RADIUS server and the client 4 The RADIUS server distributes the PMK to the AP The AP then sets up a key hierarchy and management system using the PMK to dynamically generate unique data encryption keys The keys are used to encrypt every data packet that is wirelessly communicated between the AP and the wireless clients Figure 221 WPA 2 with RADIUS Application Example XQ Internet y 4 WPA 2 PSK Application Example A WPA 2 PSK application looks as follows 1 First enter identical passwords into the AP and all wireless clients The Pre Shared Key PSK must consist of between 8 and 63 ASCII characters or 64 hexadecimal characters including spaces and symbols 2 The AP checks each wireless client s password and allows it to join the network only if the password matches 3 The AP and wireless clients generate a common PMK Pairwise Master Key The key itself is not sent over the network but is derived from the PSK and the SSID EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 343 Appendix D Wireless LANs 4 The AP and wireless clients use the TKIP or AES encryption process the PMK and information exchanged in a handshake to create temporal encryption keys They use these keys to encrypt data exchanged between them Figure 222 WPA 2 PSK Authentication W Ps Dir l a S gt Efe n Internet J Security Param
256. grams 2 Click the Windows Setup tab and select Communication in the Components selection box Click Details Figure 48 Add Remove Programs Windows Setup Communication Add Remove Programs Prop Install Uninstall Windows Setup Startup Disk To add of remove a component select or clear the check box If the check box it shaded only part of the component will be Installed To see what s included in a component click Details Components ji Eft Address Book B amp Communications FEMME ee LJ At Desktop Themes 0 0 MB ja Games 10 1 MB L 2 Multilanguage Support 0 0 MB Space used by installed components 4 4 MB Space required 0 0 ME Space available on disk 066 3 MB Description Includes accessories to help you connect to other computers and online services Sof 10 components selected Details Have Disk EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 7 Home Networking 3 Inthe Communications window select the Universal Plug and Play check box in the Components selection box Figure 49 Add Remove Programs Windows Setup Communication Components xi To install a component select the check bos next to the component name or clear the check box if you do not want to Install it A shaded box means that only part of the component will be installed To see what s included in a component click Details Components BBY NetMeeting in ay Phone Dialer Universal Plug and Play 0 4 ME O a
257. gure router R is connected to the Device s LAN R connects to two networks N1 192 168 1 x 24 and N2 192 168 10 x 24 If you want to send traffic from computer A in N1 network to computer B in N2 network the traffic is sent to the Device s WAN default gateway by default In this case B will never receive the traffic N1 66 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials You need to specify a static routing rule on the Device to specify R as the router in charge of forwarding traffic to N2 In this case the Device routes traffic from A to R and then R routes the traffic to B This tutorial uses the following example IP settings Table 3 IP Settings in this Tutorial C To configure a static route to route traffic from N1 to N2 1 Click Network Setting gt Routing Click Add New Static Route Add Hew Static Route Y mewe Sats Mane Desiraton P suret ask 2 Configure the Static Route Setup screen using the following settings e Select Active e Specify a descriptive name for this routing rule e Type 192 168 10 0 and subnet mask 255 255 255 0 for the destination N2 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials Type 192 168 1 253 R s N1 address in the Gateway IP Address field IY Active Route Name Destination IP Address IP Subnet Mask Gateway IP Address 192 168 1 253 Bound Interface NotAvailiable so ox Click Apply The Routing screen should display the route you ju
258. h client can use Section on page 164 e Use the Address Mapping screen to configure the Device s address mapping settings Section 10 5 on page 166 e Use the ALG screen to enable and disable the SIP VoIP ALG in the Device Section 10 6 on page 168 10 1 2 What You Need To Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter Inside Outside and Global Local Inside outside denotes where a host is located relative to the Device for example the computers of your subscribers are the inside hosts while the web servers on the Internet are the outside hosts Global local denotes the IP address of a host in a packet as the packet traverses a router for example the local address refers to the IP address of a host when the packet is in the local network while the global address refers to the IP address of the host when the same packet is traveling in the WAN side NAT In the simplest form NAT changes the source IP address in a packet received from a subscriber the inside local address to another the inside global address before forwarding the packet to the WAN side When the response comes back NAT translates the destination address the inside global address back to the inside local address before forwarding it to the original inside host EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 161 Chapter 10 Network Address Translation NAT Port Forwarding A port forwarding set is a list of inside behind NAT on the LA
259. h the TV according to the instructions in the DMA 2500 Quick Start Guide EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 1 Connect the DMA 2500 to an available LAN port in your Device USB Storage Device N DMA 2500 ZyXEL Device 2 Turn on the TV and wait for the DMA 2500 Home screen to appear Using the remote control go to MyMedia to open the following screen Select the Device as your media server E 01 02 TWPC 13262 01 3 The screen shows you the list of available media files in the USB storage device Select the file you want to open and push the Play button in the remote control CKE 2 ZyXEL Celebration Video gt 3 ZyXEL Connecting the Future EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 49 Chapter 3 Tutorials 3 Using the Print Server Feature In this section you can e Configure a TCP IP Printer Port e Add a New Printer Using Windows e Add a New Printer Using Macintosh OS X Configure a TCP IP Printer Port This example shows how you can configure a TCP IP printer port This example is done using the Windows 2000 Professional operating system Some menu items may look different on your operating system The TCP IP port must be configured with the IP address of the Device and must use the RAW protocol to communicate with the printer Consult your operating systems documentation for instructions on how to do this or follow the instructions below if you have a Windows 2000 XP operating sys
260. he Encryption Algorithm describes the use of encryption techniques such as DES Data Encryption Standard and Triple DES algorithms The Authentication Algorithms HMAC MD5 RFC 2403 and HMAC SHA 1 RFC 2404 provide an authentication mechanism for the AH and ESP protocols Key Management Key management allows you to determine whether to use IKE ISAKMP or manual key configuration in order to set up a VPN 17 6 2 IPSec and NAT Read this section if you are running IPSec on a host computer behind the Device NAT is incompatible with the AH protocol in both Transport and Tunnel mode An IPSec VPN using the AH protocol digitally signs the outbound packet both data payload and headers with a hash value appended to the packet When using AH protocol packet contents the data payload are not encrypted A NAT device in between the IPSec endpoints will rewrite either the source or destination address with one of its own choosing The VPN device at the receiving end will verify the integrity of the EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 2 Chapter 17 VPN incoming packet by computing its own hash value and complain that the hash value appended to the received packet doesn t match The VPN device at the receiving end doesn t know about the NAT in the middle so it assumes that the data has been maliciously altered IPSec using ESP in Tunnel mode encapsulates the entire original packet including headers in a new IP packet The new IP packet s so
261. he bottom of the device If there is an unknown MAC address you can remove it or reset the AP EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Common Services The following table lists some commonly used services and their associated protocols and port numbers For a comprehensive list of port numbers ICMP type code numbers and services visit the IANA Internet Assigned Number Authority web site e Name This is a short descriptive name for the service You can use this one or create a different one if you like e Protocol This is the type of IP protocol used by the service If this is TCP UDP then the service uses the same port number with TCP and UDP If this is USER DEFINED the Port s is the IP protocol number not the port number e Port s This value depends on the Protocol Please refer to RFC 1700 for further information about port numbers e f the Protocol is TCP UDP or TCP UDP this is the IP port number e f the Protocol is USER this is the IP protocol number e Description This is a brief explanation of the applications that use this service or the situations in which this service is used Table 121 Commonly Used Services NAME o o PROTOCOL PORT S DESCRIPTION AH User Defined 51 The IPSEC AH Authentication Header IPSEC TUNNEL tunneling protocol uses this service AI M New I CQ TCP 5190 AOL s Internet Messenger service It is also used as a listening port by ICQ AUTH TCP 113 Authentication protocol used by som
262. he party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate this equipment FCC Radiation Exposure Statement e This transmitter must not be co located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter e EEE 802 11b 802 11g or 802 11n 20MHz operation of this product in the U S A is firmware limited to channels 1 through 11 IEEE 802 11n 40MHz operation of this product in the U S A is firmware limited to channels 3 through 9 e EEE 802 11b or 802 11g operation of this product in the U S A is firmware limited to channels 1 through 11 OU CO CoO CI Co CICOCOCO COCO Co C4 Co CICOCOCO O a A CI Co COCOCOCO CI Co CI Co COCOCOCO O A A CI Co CO COCO CI Co CICOCOCI O A A CI Co COICOCOCO COCO Co a O A A AA O A A CI Co COCOCOCO COCO Co CI Co COCOCOCO O a A CI Co COICOCOCO COCO Co CI Co CICOCOCO COCO Co CI Co COICOCOCO O Ea A O O A A AA O A A C O A A AA O A A C O A A AA O A A C O A A AA COCO A C O A A AA CI Co Co O A A A CI Co C O A A AA O C O A A AA CI Co Co COICOCOCO CI Co Co COCOCOCO CI Co C O A A A CI Co CI COICOCOCO CI Co EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Appendix G Legal Information Notices Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment This device is designed for the WLAN 2 4 GHz and or 5 GHz networks throughout the EC region and Switzerland with restrictions in France
263. his connection The greater the number the higher the priority level Enter 802 1Q Type the VLAN ID number from 1 to 4094 for traffic through this connection VLAN ID This section is available only when you select Routing in the Mode field and PPPoE in the a WAN Service Type field PPP User Name Enter the user name exactly as your ISP assigned If assigned a name in the form user domain where domain identifies a service name then enter both components exactly as given PPP PPP Password Enter the Enter the password associated with the username above associated with the user name above a ER Service Type e A name of your PPPoE service here Name EMG5324 D10A Users Guide Chapter 5 Broadband Table 6 Broadband Add Edit Routing continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Authentication The Device supports PAP Password Authentication Protocol and CHAP Challenge Mode Handshake Authentication Protocol CHAP is more secure than PAP however PAP is readily available on more platforms Use the drop down list box to select an authentication protocol for outgoing calls Options AUTO Your Device accepts either CHAP or PAP when requested by this remote node PAP Your Device accepts PAP only CHAP Your Device accepts CHAP only MS CHAP Your Device accepts MSCHAP only MS CHAP is the Microsoft version of the CHAP Use Static IP A static IP address is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you A dynamic IP address is not fixed
264. hnical background information about the topics covered in this chapter 10 7 1 NAT Definitions Inside outside denotes where a host is located relative to the Device for example the computers of your subscribers are the inside hosts while the web servers on the Internet are the outside hosts 168 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 10 Network Address Translation NAT Global local denotes the IP address of a host in a packet as the packet traverses a router for example the local address refers to the IP address of a host when the packet is in the local network while the global address refers to the IP address of the host when the same packet is traveling in the WAN side Note that inside outside refers to the location of a host while global local refers to the IP address of a host used in a packet Thus an inside local address ILA is the IP address of an inside host in a packet when the packet is still in the local network while an inside global address IGA is the IP address of the same inside host when the packet is on the WAN side The following table Summarizes this information Table 47 NAT Definitions ITEM DESCRIPTION This refers to the host on the LAN This refers to the host on the WAN Local This refers to the packet address source or destination as the packet travels on the LAN Global This refers to the packet address source or destination as the packet travels on the WAN NAT never changes the IP ad
265. hone gt Region Region Settings USA Call Service Mode Europe Type B Note Caution When Region Settings is changed you need to reboot device to take settings effect Each field is described in the following table Table 84 VolP gt Phone gt Region LABEL DESCRIPTION Region Settings Select the place in which the Device is located Call Service Select the mode for supplementary phone services call hold call waiting call transfer and Mode three way conference calls that your VolP service provider supports e Europe Type use supplementary phone services in European mode e USA Type use supplementary phone services American mode You might have to subscribe to these services to use them Contact your VolP service provider Apply Click this to save your changes and to apply them to the Device Click this to set every field in this screen to its last saved value EMG5324 D10A Users Guide Chapter 18 VoIP 18 7 The Call Rule Screen Use this screen to add edit or remove speed dial numbers for outgoing calls Speed dial provides Shortcuts for dialing frequently used VoIP phone numbers You also have to create speed dial entries if you want to call SIP numbers that contain letters Once you have configured a speed dial rule you can use a shortcut the speed dial number 01 for example on your phone s keypad to call the phone number To access this screen click Vol P gt Call Rule Figure
266. ication requirements when using the included antenna s Only use the included antenna s e This product is for indoor use only utilisation int rieure exclusivement e The RJ 45 jacks are not used for telephone line connection Your product is marked with this symbol which is known as the WEEE mark WEEE stands for Waste Electronics and Electrical Equipment It means that used electrical and electronic products should not be mixed with general waste Used electrical and electronic equipment should be treated separately 372 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide A ACK message 237 ACL rule 182 activation firewalls 178 media server 130 SIP ALG 168 SSID 104 wireless LAN scheduling 108 adding a printer example 55 administrator password 23 Advanced Encryption Standard see AES AES 341 AH 211 algorithms 211 alternative subnet mask notation 286 antenna directional 345 gain 345 omni directional 345 AP Access Point 335 applications Internet access 17 media server 130 activation 130 ITunes server 130 VoIP 18 authentication 110 111 RADIUS server 111 automatic logout 24 B backup configuration 267 bandwidth management 149 Basic Service Set see BSS EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Index Index blinking LEDs 20 Broadband 81 broadcast 92 BSS 113 333 example 113 BYE request 237 C CA 191 340 call hold 240 call rule 232 call service mode 239 call transfer 241 call waiting 240 Canonical Format I
267. ick Tools then click Options in the screen that appears Figure 215 Mozilla Firefox Tools gt Options fee Help Web Search Chri k Downloads Ctrl J Add ons Web Developer Error Console Adblock Plus trl ShiFk 4 Page Info FireFTP Clear Private Data Ctrl ShiFt Del Tab Mix Plus Options My Session Manager i Options 1a EMG5324 D10A Users Guide Appendix C Pop up Windows JavaScript and Java Permissions Click Content to show the screen below Select the check boxes as shown in the following screen Figure 216 Mozilla Firefox Content Security Options J i T a A ow Ay my tae Main Tabs Content Feeds Privacy Security Advanced o Block pop up windows Exceptions i Load images automatically Exceptions IW Enable JavaScript Advanced IY Enable Java Fonts amp Colors Default Font Times New Roman Size 16 advanced Colors File Types Configure how Firefox handles certain types of Files Manage coe e EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Appendix C Pop up Windows JavaScript and Java Permissions 332 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Wireless LANs Wireless LAN Topologies This section discusses ad hoc and infrastructure wireless LAN topologies Ad hoc Wireless LAN Configuration The simplest WLAN configuration is an independent Ad hoc WLAN that connects a set of computers with wireless adapters A B C Any time two or mor
268. ick this button and then Save in the File Download screen The Save As screen opens browse to the location that you want to use and click Save SSH SCP SFTP Type in the location of the SSH SCP SFTP certificate file you want to upload in this field or click Browse to find it Choose file Click this link to find the certificate file you want to upload Current File This field displays the name used to identify this certificate It is recommended that you give each certificate a unique name Key Type This field applies to the SSH SCP SFTP certificate Wai This shows the file format of the current certificate Click this to clear your settings EMG5324 D10A Users Guide Chapter 16 Certificates 16 3 Trusted CA Use this screen to view a Summary list of certificates of the certification authorities that you have set the Device to accept as trusted The Device accepts any valid certificate signed by a certification authority on this list as being trustworthy thus you do not need to import any certificate that is signed by one of these certification authorities Click Security gt Certificates gt Trusted CA to open the Trusted CA screen Figure 98 Security gt Certificates gt Trusted CA Import Certificate Name O ca certpem CN CPE Norway C NO L Fornebu O Telenor emailAddress cpe norway telenor net OU Engineering B note Maximum 5 certificates can be stored The following table describes the labels in
269. ide Global IP Address IGA Enter 0 0 0 0 here if you have a dynamic IP address from your ISP You can only do this for the Many to One mapping type Global End IP Enter the ending Inside Global IP Address IGA This field is blank for One to One and Many to One mapping types MAP Set Select the number of the mapping set for which you want to configure OK Click OK to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving 10 6 The ALG Screen Some NAT routers may include a SIP Application Layer Gateway ALG A SIP ALG allows SIP calls to pass through NAT by examining and translating IP addresses embedded in the data stream When the Device registers with the SIP register server the SIP ALG translates the Device s private IP address inside the SIP data stream to a public IP address You do not need to use STUN or an outbound proxy if your Device is behind a SIP ALG Use this screen to enable or disable the SIP VoIP ALG in the Device To access this screen click Network Setting gt NAT gt ALG Figure 78 Network Setting gt NAT gt ALG ALG State ALG Enable Disable The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 46 Network Setting gt NAT gt ALG LABEL DESCRIPTION ALG Enable this to make sure SIP VoIP works correctly with port forwarding and address mapping rules Apply Click Apply to save your changes 10 7 Technical Reference This section provides some tec
270. ificates To access this screen click on Security gt Certificates gt VPN Certificates Figure 101 Security gt Certificates gt VPN Certificates Import Certificate 1 ZyxeL CNewww 2yel com tw CN www zyel com tuy oa cee We 0 Axel STP CHT O 24yeel ST PA CHT ui ae one il EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 1 97 Chapter 16 Certificates The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 65 Security gt Certificates gt VPN Certificates LABEL DESCRIPTION Import Certificate Click this button to open a screen where you can save the certificate of a certification authority that you trust to the Device This field displays the name used to identify this certificate Subject This field displays information that identifies the owner of the certificate such as Common Name CN OU Organizational Unit or department Organization O State ST and Country C It is recommended that each certificate have unique subject information Issuer This field displays identifying information about the certificate s issuing certification authority such as a common name organizational unit or department organization or company and country Valid From This field displays the date that the certificate becomes applicable The text displays in red and includes a Not Yet Valid message if the certificate has not yet become applicable Valid To This field displays the date that the certificate expires The text displays in r
271. ight subnets 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 and 111 288 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting The following table shows IP address last octet values for each subnet Table 114 Eight Subnets SUBNET LAST BROADCAST SUBNET ADDRESS FIRST ADDRESS ADDRESS ADDRESS Subnet Planning The following table is a Summary for subnet planning on a network with a 24 bit network number Table 115 24 bit Network Number Subnet Planning Noras ooo o SSB aS soo emmm e Je E a E C E E E e ee C E The following table is a summary for subnet planning on a network with a 16 bit network number Table 116 16 bit Network Number Subnet Planning ol ee fe EE E S C E E C E E E C E E E C E E E C E E E C e E E E e E E E E C e E EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 289 Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting Table 116 16 bit Network Number Subnet Planning continued NO BORROWED NO HOSTS PER Configuring IP Addresses Where you obtain your network number depends on your particular situation If the ISP or your network administrator assigns you a block of registered IP addresses follow their instructions in selecting the IP addresses and the subnet mask If the ISP did not explicitly give you an IP network number then most likely you have a single user account and the ISP will assign you a dynamic IP address when the connection is established If this is the case it is re
272. ignal amplitudes at regular time intervals and converts them into digital samples G 711 provides very good sound quality but requires 64 kbps of bandwidth e G 726 is an Adaptive Differential PCM ADPCM waveform codec that uses a lower bitrate than standard PCM conversion ADPCM converts analog audio into digital signals based on the difference between each audio sample and a prediction based on previous samples The more similar the audio sample is to the prediction the less space needed to describe it G 726 operates at 16 24 32 or 40 kbps e G 729 is an Analysis by Synthesis AbS hybrid waveform codec that uses a filter based on information about how the human vocal tract produces sounds G 729 provides good sound quality and reduces the required bandwidth to 8 kbps PSTN Call Setup Signaling Dual Tone MultiFrequency DTMF signaling uses pairs of frequencies one lower frequency and one higher frequency to set up calls It is also Known as Touch Tone Each of the keys on a DTMF telephone corresponds to a different pair of frequencies Pulse dialing sends a series of clicks to the local phone office in order to dial numbers 3 The Device does not support pulse dialing at the time of writing EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 23 Chapter 18 VoIP MWI Message Waiting Indication Enable Message Waiting Indication MWI enables your phone to give you a message waiting beeping dial tone when you have a voice message s Your VolP
273. ilding VLAN also increases network performance by limiting broadcasts to a smaller and more manageable logical broadcast domain In traditional switched environments all broadcast packets go to each and every individual port With VLAN all broadcasts are confined to a specific broadcast domain Introduction to IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN A tagged VLAN uses an explicit tag VLAN ID in the MAC header to identify the VLAN membership of a frame across bridges they are not confined to the switch on which they were created The VLANs can be created statically by hand or dynamically through GVRP The VLAN ID associates a frame with a specific VLAN and provides the information that switches need to process the frame across the network A tagged frame is four bytes longer than an untagged frame and contains two bytes of TPID Tag Protocol Identifier residing within the type length field of the Ethernet frame and two bytes of TCI Tag Control Information starts after the source address field of the Ethernet frame The CFI Canonical Format Indicator is a single bit flag always set to zero for Ethernet switches If a frame received at an Ethernet port has a CFI set to 1 then that frame should not be forwarded as it is to an untagged port The remaining twelve bits define the VLAN ID giving a possible maximum number of 4 096 VLANs Note that user priority and VLAN ID are independent of each other A frame with VID VLAN Identifier of null 0 is cal
274. ile cannot use FTP to upload new firmware See the troubleshooting suggestions for cannot see or access the Login screen in the web configurator Ignore the suggestions about your browser EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 2 5 Chapter 30 Troubleshooting 30 4 Internet Access cannot access the Internet 1 Check the hardware connections and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected See the Quick Start Guide and Section 1 6 on page 20 2 Make sure you entered your ISP account information correctly These fields are case sensitive so make sure Caps Lock is not on 3 If you are trying to access the Internet wirelessly make sure the wireless settings in the wireless client are the same as the settings in the AP 4 Ifyou are trying to access the Internet wirelessly make sure you have enabled the wireless LAN by the WPS WLAN button or the Network Setting gt Wireless gt General screen 5 Disconnect all the cables from your device and follow the directions in the Quick Start Guide again 6 If the problem continues contact your ISP cannot access the Internet through an Ethernet WAN connection 7 Make sure you connect the Ethernet WAN port to a DSL modem or router in your network 8 Make sure you configured a proper Ethernet WAN connection with the Internet account information provided by your ISP 9 If you set up a WAN connection using bridging service all LAN ports and WLAN BSSs are bridged to
275. ime Active Select this if you want the Device to forward all incoming calls to the specified phone Unconditional number Forward Specify the phone number in the To Number field on the right Active Busy Select this if you want the Device to forward incoming calls to the specified phone number if Forward the phone port is busy Specify the phone number in the To Number field on the right If you have call waiting the incoming call is forwarded to the specified phone number if you reject or ignore the second incoming call Active No Select this if you want the Device to forward incoming calls to the specified phone number if Answer the call is unanswered See No Answer Time Forward Specify the phone number in the To Number field on the right No Answer Ring This field is used by the Active No Answer Forward feature Time Enter the number of seconds the Device should wait for you to answer an incoming call before it considers the call is unanswered Hot Line Select this to enable the hot line or warm line feature on the Device Warm Line Enable Warm Line Select this to have the Device dial the specified warm line number after you pick up the telephone and do not press any keys on the keypad for a period of time Hot Line Select this to have the Device dial the specified hot line number immediately when you pick up the telephone Hot Line Enter the number of the hot line or warm line that you want the Device to dial War
276. ime period expires See Section 17 6 6 on page 215 on keeping alive to have the Device renegotiate an IPSec SA when the SA lifetime expires even if there is no traffic Figure 109 Security gt VPN gt Monitor ades mads5 Retest The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 70 Security gt VPN gt Monitor No Tis isthe secury assocationindex umber OO IPSec This field displays the encryption algorithm and authentication algorithm used in each VPN Algorithm tunnel Select one of the security associations and then click Disconnect to stop that security association Click Refresh to display the current active VPN connection s 17 6 IPSec VPN Technical Reference This section provides some technical background information about the topics covered in this chapter 210 EMG5324 D10A Users Guide Chapter 17 VPN 17 6 1 IPSec Architecture The overall IPSec architecture is shown as follows Figure 110 IPSec Architecture IPSec Algorithms ESP Protocol RFC 2406 _ AH Protocol RFC 2402 Authentication RFC 2403 HMAC SHA 1 Algorithm REC 2404 DES Encryption Algorithm Key Management IPSec Algorithms The ESP Encapsulating Security Payload Protocol RFC 2406 and AH Authentication Header protocol RFC 2402 describe the packet formats and the default standards for packet structure including implementation algorithms T
277. ing ID type and content configuration in order to set up a VPN tunnel 216 EMG5324 D10A Users Guide Chapter 17 VPN The two Devices in this example can complete negotiation and establish a VPN tunnel Table 75 Matching ID Type and Content Configuration Example DEVICE A DEVICE B Local ID type E mail Local ID type IP Local ID content tom yourcompany com Local ID content 1 1 1 2 Peer ID type IP Peer ID type E mail Peer ID content 1 1 1 2 Peer ID content tom yourcompany com The two Devices in this example cannot complete their negotiation because Device B s Local ID type is IP but Device A s Peer ID type is set to E mail An ID mismatched message displays in the IPSEC LOG Table 76 Mismatching ID Type and Content Configuration Example DEVICE A DEVICE B Local ID type IP Local ID type IP Local ID content 1 1 1 10 Local ID content 1 1 1 10 Peer ID type E mail Peer ID type IP Peer ID content aa yahoo com Peer ID content N A 17 6 9 Pre Shared Key 17 6 10 17 6 11 17 6 11 1 A pre shared key identifies a communicating party during a phase 1 IKE negotiation see Section 17 6 5 on page 214 for more on IKE phases It is called pre shared because you have to share it with another party before you can communicate with them over a secure connection Diffie Hellman DH Key Groups Diffie Hellman DH is a public key cryptography protocol that allows two parties to establish a shared secret o
278. interface There is no need to modify this information Secure Gateway Type the WAN IP address or the URL up to 31 characters of the IPSec router with Address which you re making the VPN connection If you are not sure of this information you can leave it blank but do not use 0 0 0 0 Local ID Select IP to identify this Device by its IP address Select DNS to identify this Device by a domain name Select E mail to identify this Device by an e mail address EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 17 VPN Table 68 Security gt VPN gt Setup gt Edit continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Content When you select IP in the Local I D Type field type the IP address of your computer in the local Content field The Device automatically uses the IP address in the My IP Address field refer to the My IP Address field description if you configure the local Content field to 0 0 0 0 or leave it blank It is recommended that you type an IP address other than 0 0 0 0 in the local Content field or use the DNS or E mail ID type in the following situations e When there is a NAT router between the two IPSec routers e When you want the remote IPSec router to be able to distinguish between VPN connection requests that come in from IPSec routers with dynamic WAN IP addresses When you select DNS or E mail in the Local I D Type field type a domain name or e mail address by which to identify this Device in the local Content field Use up to 31 AS
279. ion Backup Configuration allows you to back up save the Device s current configuration to a file on your computer Once your Device is configured and functioning properly it is highly recommended that you back up your configuration file before making configuration changes The backup configuration file will be useful in case you need to return to your previous settings Click Backup to save the Device s current configuration to your computer EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 267 Chapter 28 Backup Restore Restore Configuration Restore Configuration allows you to upload a new or previously saved configuration file from your computer to your Device Table 104 Restore Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION File Path Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse to find it Browse Click this to find the file you want to upload Remember that you must decompress compressed ZIP files before you can upload them Upload Click this to begin the upload process Click this to reset your device settings back to the factory default Do not turn off the Device while configuration file upload is in progress After the Device configuration has been restored successfully the login screen appears Login again to restart the Device The Device automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network disconnect In some operating systems you may see the following icon on your desktop Figu
280. ion are better than none at all but it is still possible for unauthorized wireless devices to figure out the original information pretty quickly When you select WPA2 or WPA2 PSK in your Device you can also select an option WPA compatible to support WPA as well In this case if some of the devices support WPA and some support WPA2 you should set up WPA2 PSK or WPA2 depending on the type of wireless network login and select the WPA compatible option in the Device Many types of encryption use a key to protect the information in the wireless network The longer the key the stronger the encryption Every device in the wireless network must have the same key 6 8 3 Signal Problems Because wireless networks are radio networks their signals are subject to limitations of distance interference and absorption Problems with distance occur when the two radios are too far apart Problems with interference occur when other radio waves interrupt the data signal Interference may come from other radio transmissions such as military or air traffic control communications or from machines that are coincidental emitters such as electric motors or microwaves Problems with absorption occur when physical objects such as thick walls are between the two radios muffling the signal 2 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 6 Wireless 6 8 4 BSS A Basic Service Set BSS exists when all communications between wireless stations or between a wireless
281. ire Supported header field with the option tag 100rel in all INVITE requests When the Device receives a SIP response message indicating that the phone it called is ringing the Device sends a PRACK message to have both sides confirm the message is received If you select Supported the peer device supports the option tag 100rel to send provisional responses reliably If you select Required the peer device requires the option tag 100rel to send provisional responses reliably Select Disabled to turn off this function DNS SRV Select this to have the Device query your ISP s DNS server for a list of any available SIP Enabled servers that it maintains This is useful if your static SIP server exeriences difficulties making it hard for your IP phone users to make SIP calls Session Timer Select this to have the Device support RFC 4028 This makes sure that SIP sessions do not hang and the SIP line can always be available for use VoIP IOP Flags Select the VoIP inter operability settings you want to activate EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 18 VoIP Table 79 VoIP gt SIP gt SIP Service Provider continued LABEL DESCRIPTION RTP Port Range Start Port Enter the listening port number s for RTP traffic if your VolP service provider gave you this information Otherwise keep the default values End Port To enter one port number enter the port number in the Start Port and End Port fields To enter a range of
282. it accessible from an outside network It is used by the Device to communicate with other devices in other networks It can be Static fixed or dynamically assigned by the ISP each time the Device tries to access the Internet If your ISP assigns you a static WAN IP address they should also assign you the subnet mask and DNS server IP address es ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode ATM is a WAN networking technology that provides high speed data transfer ATM uses fixed size packets of information called cells With ATM a high QoS Quality of Service can be guaranteed ATM uses a connection oriented model and establishes a virtual circuit VC between Finding Out More PTM Packet Transfer Mode PTM is packet oriented and supported by the VDSL2 standard In PTM packets are encapsulated directly in the High level Data Link Control HDLC frames It is designed to provide a low overhead transparent way of transporting packets over DSL links as an alternative to ATM 3G 3G Third Generation is a digital packet switched wireless technology Bandwidth usage is optimized as multiple users share the same channel and bandwidth is only allocated to users when they send data It allows fast transfer of voice and non voice data and provides broadband Internet access to mobile devices 82 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 5 Broadband IPv6 Introduction IPv6 Internet Protocol version 6 is designed to enhance IP address size and feat
283. kground traffic such as bulk transfers that are allowed but that should not affect other applications and users Typically used for best effort traffic 9 6 2 IP Precedence Similar to IEEE 802 1 prioritization at layer 2 you can use IP precedence to prioritize packets in a layer 3 network IP precedence uses three bits of the eight bit ToS Type of Service field in the IP header There are eight classes of services ranging from zero to seven in IP precedence Zero is the lowest priority level and seven is the highest 9 6 3 DiffServ QoS is used to prioritize source to destination traffic flows All packets in the flow are given the Same priority You can use CoS class of service to give different priorities to different packet types DiffServ Differentiated Services is a class of service CoS model that marks packets so that they receive specific per hop treatment at DiffServ compliant network devices along the route based on the application types and traffic flow Packets are marked with DiffServ Code Points DSCPs indicating the level of service desired This allows the intermediary DiffServ compliant network devices to handle the packets differently depending on the code points without the need to negotiate paths or remember state information for every flow In addition applications do not have to request a particular service or give advanced notice of where the traffic is going DSCP and Per Hop Behavior DiffServ defines a
284. l Stack DNS Server VLAN Obtain DNS info Automatically Enable VLAN C Use the following Static DNS IP Address Enter 802 1P Priority 0 7 Primary DNS Server Enter 802 1Q VLAN ID 1 4094 3900 3905 are reserved Secondary DNS Server PPP Infomation IPv6 Address PPPUserName Obtain IPv6 Address Prefix Automatically PPPPassword Enable Non temporary Addresses E PPPoEServiceName Enable Prefix Delegation a Authentication Method MS CHAP Static IPv6 Address Use Static IP Address Iv IP Address 0 0 0 0 IPv6 DNS Server Dial on demand with idle timeout timer M C Obtain IPv6 DNS info Automatically Inactivity Timeout minutes 1 4320 Use the following Static DNS IPv6 Address Primary IPv6 DNS Server MTU Secondary IPv6 DNS Server E J EMG5324 D10A Users Guide Chapter 5 Broadband The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 6 Broadband Add Edit Routing The Device transmits data over the Ethernet WAN port Mode Select Routing default from the drop down list box if your ISP give you one IP address only and you want multiple computers to share an Internet account WAN Service This field is available only when you select Routing in the Mode field Select the method of Type encapsulation used by your ISP e PPP over Ethernet PPPoE PPPoE Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet provides access control and billing functionality in a manner simila
285. l and wait for Windows Media Player to connect to the Device IO Windows Media Player File View Play Tools Help COU gt Maac F Alimisic Organize Stream vy Create playlist v Albun E Library l Playlists Ja Music H Artist lt i Contacting the remote media library Album p A Cancel Genre ij Videos VU Pictures Recorded TV P Other Libraries P JI Music E Videos Pictures m Recorded TV 3 Inthe right panel you should see a list of files available in the USB storage device O Windows Media Player File View Play Tools Help OU k Videos All Videos Organize Stream Create playlist Length Release year Genre Actors Rating Eh Library E e Playlists x m be f S dJa Music Boek pi i p GH Artist H TA ZyXEL Celebration ES U FEN Ji Album oe Video a WT 4 minutes ie Sa Genre HUrnbkramisa e ODR s Play all i l Pictures d l a 4 A h i i Ei A hv mm Recorded TV Play next ZYXEL Connecting the Future 33 minutes Unknown Add to f Other Libraries a FP Edit gt da Music Rate fd Videos jel Pictures Recorded TV Properties 3 6 3 Using a Digital Media Adapter This section shows you how you can use the Device with a ZyXEL DMA 2500 to play media files stored in the USB storage device in your TV screen Note For this tutorial your DMA 2500 should already be set up wit
286. le to any wireless networking device that is within range Figure 21 Wireless gt General No Security Security Level No Security The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 11 Wireless gt General No Security LABEL DESCRIPTION Security Level Choose No Security from the sliding bar 6 2 2 Basic Static WEP Shared WEP Encryption WEP encryption scrambles the data transmitted between the wireless stations and the access points AP to keep network communications private Both the wireless stations and the access points must use the same WEP key There are two types of WEP authentication namely Open System Static WEP and Shared Key Shared WEP Open system is implemented for ease of use and when security is not an issue The wireless station and the AP or peer computer do not share a secret key Thus the wireless stations can associate with any AP or peer computer and listen to any transmitted data that is not encrypted Shared key mode involves a shared secret key to authenticate the wireless station to the AP or peer computer This requires you to enable the wireless LAN security and use same settings on both the wireless station and the AP or peer computer EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 99 Chapter 6 Wireless In order to configure and enable WEP encryption click Network Settings gt Wireless to display the General screen Select Basic as the security level Then select Static WEP or Shar
287. led a priority frame meaning that only the priority level is significant and the default VID of the ingress port is given as the VID of the frame Of the 4096 possible VIDs a VID of O is used to identify priority frames and value 4095 FFF is reserved so the maximum possible VLAN configurations are 4 094 TPID User Priority CFI VLAN ID 2 Bytes 3 Bits 1 Bit 12 Bits Multicast IP packets are transmitted in either one of two ways Unicast 1 sender 1 recipient or Broadcast 1 sender everybody on the network Multicast delivers IP packets to a group of hosts on the network not everybody and not just 1 Internet Group Multicast Protocol IGMP is a network layer protocol used to establish membership in a Multicast group it is not used to carry user data IGMP version 2 RFC 2236 is an improvement over version 1 RFC 1112 but IGMP version 1 is still in wide use If you would like to read more detailed information about interoperability between IGMP version 2 and version 1 please see sections 4 and 5 of RFC 2236 The class D IP address is used to identify host groups and can be in the range 224 0 0 0 to 239 255 255 255 The address 224 0 0 0 is not assigned to any group and is used by IP multicast computers The address 224 0 0 1 is used for query messages and is assigned to the permanent group of all IP hosts including gateways All hosts must join the 224 0 0 1 group in order to participate in IGMP The address 224 0 0 2 is assigned t
288. less LAN This shows whether or not the SSID is enabled on on This displays the type of security the Device is using in the wireless LAN Mode Interface Status This column displays each interface the Device has Status This field indicates whether or not the Device is using the interface For the EtherWAN interface this field displays Up when the Device is using the interface and Down when the Device is not using the interface For the LAN interfaces this field displays Up when the Device is using the interface and Down when the Device is not using the interface For the WLAN interface it displays Active when WLAN is enabled or InActive when WLAN is disabled For the 3G interface it displays Enabled when 3G is enabled or Disabled when 3G is disabled Rate For the LAN interfaces this displays the port speed and duplex setting For the WAN interface this displays the port speed and duplex setting For the WLAN interface it displays the maximum transmission rate when WLAN is enabled or N A when WLAN is disabled For the 3G interface it displays the maximum transmission rate when 3G is enabled or N A when 3G is disabled System Status System Up Time This field displays how long the Device has been running since it last started up The Device starts up when you plug it in when you restart it Maintenance gt Reboot or when you reset it see Section 1 7 on page 22 Current Date Time This fiel
289. lick the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can set up a static route on the Device Click the Delete icon to remove a static route from the Device EMG5324 D10A Users Guide Chapter 8 Routing 8 2 1 Add Edit Static Route Click add new Static Route in the Routing screen or click the Edit icon next to a rule The following screen appears Use this screen to configure the required information for a static route Figure 64 Routing Add Edit Active Route Name Destination IP Address IP Subnet Mask Gateway IP Address Bound Interface M EtherWAN1 Note The Destination IP Address and IP Subnet Mask fields must be matched e g host255 255 255 255 or subnet 55 255 255 0 son se The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 32 Routing Add Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Click this to activate this static route Route Name Enter the name of the IP static route Leave this field blank to delete this static route Destination IP This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination Routing is always Address based on network number If you need to specify a route to a single host use a subnet mask of 255 255 255 255 in the subnet mask field to force the network number to be identical to the host ID IP Subnet Mask Enter the IP subnet mask here Gateway IP You can decide if you want to forward packets to a gateway IP address or a bound interface Address If
290. lowing section contains additional technical information about the Device features described in this chapter Encapsulation Be sure to use the encapsulation method required by your ISP The Device can work in bridge mode or routing mode When the Device is in routing mode it supports the following methods IP over Ethernet IP over Ethernet 1PoE is an alternative to PPPoE IP packets are being delivered across an Ethernet network without using PPP encapsulation They are routed between the Ethernet interface and the WAN interface and then formatted so that they can be understood in a bridged environment For instance it encapsulates routed Ethernet frames into bridged Ethernet cells PPP over Ethernet PPPoE Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet PPPoE provides access control and billing functionality in a manner similar to dial up services using PPP PPPoE is an IETF standard RFC 2516 specifying how a personal computer PC interacts with a broadband modem DSL cable wireless etc connection For the service provider PPPoE offers an access and authentication method that works with existing access control systems for example RADIUS One of the benefits of PPPoE is the ability to let you access one of multiple network services a function known as dynamic service selection This enables the service provider to easily create and offer new IP services for individuals Operationally PPPoE saves significant effort for both you
291. lume levels for the phones connected to the ZyXEL Device Section 18 3 on page 226 e Use the Phone Device screen to control which SIP accounts the phones connected to the Device use Section 18 5 on page 230 e Use the Region screen to change settings that depend on the country you are in Section 18 6 on page 231 e Use the Call Rule screen to set up shortcuts for dialing frequently used VoIP phone numbers Section 18 7 on page 232 You don t necessarily need to use all these screens to set up your account In fact if your service provider did not supply information on a particular field in a screen it is usually best to leave it at its default setting 18 1 2 What You Need to Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter VoIP VoIP stands for Voice over IP IP is the Internet Protocol which is the message carrying standard the Internet runs on So Voice over IP is the sending of voice signals Speech over the Internet or another network that uses the Internet Protocol EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 22 Chapter 18 VoIP SIP SIP stands for Session Initiation Protocol SIP is a signalling standard that lets one network device like a computer or the Device send messages to another In VoIP these messages are about phone calls over the network For example when you dial a number on your Device it sends a SIP message over the network asking the other device the number you dialed to take
292. ly search for free IP and then assign it statically select rs eroconf To use ka Cancel 6 Select Dynamic Address DHCP if you have a dynamic IP address Select Statically assigned IP Address if you have a static IP address Fill in the I P address Subnet mask and Hostname fields 7 Click Next to save the changes and close the Network Card Setup window EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 8 Ifyou know your DNS server IP address es click the Hostname DNS tab in Network Settings and then enter the DNS server information in the fields provided Figure 204 openSUSE 10 3 Network Settings GO vosi2elnwetieos Enter the name for E Network Settings this computer and the DNS domain that it CO N SSE _ belongs to Global Options Overview Hostname DNS J Routing Optionally enter the Hostname and Domain Name name server list and Hostname Domain Name domain search list limuh2oz2 i tsti i i SO O OC S ste et s SY Note that the C Change Hostname via DHCP hostname ge obal tt C Write Hostname to fetc hosts applies to all interfaces not just X Change etc resolv conf manual this one x Change etc y Name Servers and Domain Search List The domain is Name Server 1 Domain Search especially important if 10023 this computer is a mail pu S server Name Server 2 If you are using DHCP to get an IP
293. ly establish an IPSec SA through which EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 201 Chapter 17 VPN the Device and remote IPSec router can send data between computers on the local network and remote network The following figure illustrates this Figure 104 VPN IKE SA and IPSec SA IPSec SA E E E E E E E E h w m m e e e e e m In this example a computer in network A is exchanging data with a computer in network B Inside networks A and B the data is transmitted the same way data is normally transmitted in the networks Between routers X and Y the data is protected by tunneling encryption authentication and other security features of the IPSec SA The IPSec SA is established securely using the IKE SA that routers X and Y established first My IP Address My IP Address is the WAN IP address of the Device The Device has to rebuild the VPN tunnel if My I P Address changes after setup The following applies if this field is configured as 0 0 0 0 e The Device uses the current Device WAN IP address static or dynamic to set up the VPN tunnel Secure Gateway Address Secure Gateway Address is the WAN IP address or domain name of the remote IPSec router secure gateway If the remote secure gateway has a static WAN IP address enter it in the Secure Gateway Address field You may alternatively enter the remote secure gateway s domain name if it has one in the Secure Gateway Address field You can also enter a rem
294. m Line number Warm Line Enter a number of seconds that the Device waits before dialing the warm line number if you Timer pick up the telephone and do not press any keys on the keypad Active Select this if you want the Device to bloack anonymous calls Anonymous Call Block Apply Click Apply to save your changes Click Back to return to the previous screen without saving 18 4 Multiple SIP Accounts You can set up two SIP accounts on your Device and your Device is equipped with two phone ports By default SIP1 of the Device maps to phone port 1 for incoming and outgoing and SIP2 maps to phone port 2 for incoming and outgoing EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 18 VoIP 18 5 Phone Screen Use this screen to control which SIP accounts and PSTN line each phone uses Click Vol P gt Phone to access the Phone Device screen Figure 120 VolP gt Phone gt Phone Device Analog Phone Outgoing SIP Number Analog Phone 1 ChangeMe Analog Phone 2 ChangeMe The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 82 VoIP gt Phone gt Phone Device LABEL DESCRIPTION This is the index number of the entry Phone ID This is the phone device number Outgoing SIP This is the outgoing SIP number of the phone device Number 18 5 1 Edit Phone Device You can decide which SIP accounts the phones connected to the Device use by clicking the Edit icon next to a Phone ID The following screen displays You
295. me field and enter it as the Device System Name Click Maintenance gt System to open the following screen Figure 140 Maintenance gt System Host Name router Domain Name home Administrator Inactivity Timer m minutes 0 means no timeout EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 259 Chapter 24 System The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 100 Maintenance gt System LABEL DESCRIPTION Host Name Choose a descriptive name for identification purposes It is recommended you enter your computer s Computer name in this field This name can be up to 30 alphanumeric characters long Spaces are not allowed but dashes and underscores _ are accepted Domain Name Enter the domain name if you know it here If you leave this field blank the ISP may assign a domain name via DHCP The domain name entered by you is given priority over the ISP assigned domain name Administrator Type how many minutes a management session either via the web configurator can be left Inactivity Timer idle before the session times out The default is 5 minutes After it times out you have to log in with your password again Very long idle timeouts may have security risks A value of 0 means a management session never times out no matter how long it has been left idle not recommended Apply Click this to save your changes back to the Device Click this to begin configuring this screen afresh EMG532
296. me of the wireless network This is the type of wireless security employed by the network Apply Click Apply to save your changes 6 5 The WMM Screen Use this screen to enable or disable Wi Fi MultiMedia WMM wireless networks for multimedia applications Click Network Setting gt Wireless gt WMM The following screen displays Figure 28 Network Setting gt Wireless gt WMM WMM WiFi MultiMedia M Enable WMM of SSID M Enable WMM of SSID2 I Enable WMM of SSID3 M Enable WMM of SSID4 l Enable WMM Automatic Power Save Delive n APSD EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 1 07 Chapter 6 Wireless The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 18 Network Setting gt Wireless gt WMM LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable WMM of This enables the Device to automatically give a service a priority level according to the ToS SSID1 4 value in the IP header of packets it sends WMM QoS Wifi MultiMedia Quality of Service gives high priority to voice and video which makes them run more smoothly Enable WMM Click this to increase battery life for battery powered wireless clients APSD uses a longer Automatic beacon interval when transmitting traffic that does not require a short packet exchange Power Save interval Deliver APSD Apply Click Apply to save your changes Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings 6 6 Scheduling Screen Click Network Setting gt Wireless gt Scheduling to open
297. minimum and maximum packet length from 46 to 1504 in the fields provided DSCP This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field Select this option and specify a DSCP DiffServ Code Point number between 0 and 63 in the field provided EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 1 57 Chapter 9 Quality of Service QoS Table 37 Class Setup Add Edit continued LABEL DESCRIPTION TCP ACK This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field If you select this option the matched TCP packets must contain the ACK Acknowledge flag DHCP This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field and UDP in the IP Protocol field Select this option and select a DHCP option If you select Vendor Class ID DHCP Option 60 enter the Class ID of the matched traffic such as the type of the hardware or firmware If you select Client D DHCP Option 61 enter the Type of the matched traffic and Client I D of the DHCP client If you select User Class ID DHCP Option 77 enter the User Class Data which is a string that identifies the user s category or application type in the matched DHCP packets If you select VendorSpecificl ntro DHCP Option 125 enter the Enterprise Number of the software of the matched traffic and Vendor Class Data used by all the DHCP clients 9 5 The QoS Monitor Screen To view the Device s QoS packet statistics click Network Setting gt QoS gt Monitor
298. much time surfing the web and downloading media files He decided to prevent J osephine from accessing the Internet so that she can concentrate on preparing for her final exams J osephine s computer connects wirelessly to the Internet through the Device Thomas decides to use the Security gt MAC Filter screen to grant wireless network access to his computer but not to J osephine s computer Thomas 1 Click Security gt MAC Filter to open the MAC Filter screen Select the Enable check box to activate MAC filter function 2 Find the MAC address of Thomas computer in this screen Select Allow Click Apply f MAC Address Filter Enable Disable 1 Iv 2 C O 3 FO 4 E PO 5 PO OOo O O OO YP 31 E 32 0 Note Only devices listed here are granted access to the network Apply Cancel Thomas can also grant access to the computers of other members of his family and friends However Josephine and others not listed in this screen will no longer be able to access the Internet through the Device EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 65 Chapter 3 Tutorials 3 9 Configuring Static Route for Routing to Another Network In order to extend your Intranet and control traffic flowing directions you may connect a router to the Device s LAN The router may be used to separate two department networks This tutorial Shows how to configure a static routing rule for two network routings In the following fi
299. n 1 1 Overview The Device is an Ethernet integrated access device IAD which provides Voice over IP VolP communication capabilities to allow you to use a traditional analog telephone to make Internet calls By integrating all of these features you are provided with ease of installation and high speed Shared Internet access The Device is also a complete security solution with a robust firewall based on Stateful Packet Inspection SPI technology and Denial of Service DoS When the Device does not have power only the phone connected to the PHONE port 1 can be used for making calls Ensure you know which phone this is so that in case of emergency you can make outgoing calls 1 2 Applications for the Device Here are some example uses for which the Device is well suited 1 2 1 Internet Access If you have another broadband modem or router available you can connect the WAN port to the it This way you can access the Internet via an Ethernet connection and still use the QoS Firewall and VoIP functions on the Device Computers can connect to the Device s LAN ports or wirelessly Figure 1 Device s Internet Access Application Ethernet EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 1 Introduction 1 2 2 VoIP Features You can register 1 SIP Session Initiation Protocol profile 2 accounts for that profile and use the Device to make and receive VolP telephone calls Figure 2 Device s VoIP Application The Device send
300. n Username Ch angele Password PrTTTITiITiiiti 3 4 1 2 SIP Account Registration Follow the steps below to register and activate your SIP account 1 Click Connection Status gt System I nfo to check if your SIP account has been registered successfully If the status is Not Registered check your Internet connection and click Register to register your SIP account Account Account Status URI SIP 1 Register Not Registered 12345678 sip example com SIP 2 egiste In Active ChangeMe sip example com EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 3 4 1 3 Analog Phone Configuration 1 Click VolP gt Phone to open the Phone Device screen Click the Edit icon next to Analog Phone 1 to configure the first phone port Analog Phone Analog Phone 1 12345678 Analog Phone 2 ChangeMe 2 Select SIP 1 from the SIP Account in the SIP Account to Make Outgoing Call section to have the phone connected to the first phone port use the registered SIP 1 account to make outgoing calls 3 Select the SIP 1 check box in the SIP Account s to Receive Incoming Call section to have the phone connected to the first phone port receive phone calls for the SIP 3 account 4 Click Apply to save your changes SIF Account to Make Outgoing Call SIP 4 12345678 ChangeMe h SIP Account s to Receive Incoming Call F SIP 12345678 ChangeMe FXO Interface to Receive Incoming Call M Enable appi Bok 3 4 1 4 Making a
301. n E EE 195 Be PO O A PEP E E AE I scene PE EA eerie 195 poe ge E a E E A eect nent rrers 196 o PA T E 197 joe em O a T E E 198 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Table of Contents Chapter 17 AU UU KOT PEEP EE EO E sid connie idan neni ulus eas andes soared nea enemas cit seta essen 201 ee Sg ee eee ee eee ce ene rer enen Meer e eee E eee ae Ae neT tee ae re mae Wenr et Seem 201 17 1 1 What You Can Do in the VPN IS icccrcscscmirwteiisacvasnernezendandannmsatnmbanenaenebanaaeaneaninecnenand 201 17 1 2 What You Need to Know About IPSec VPN aassoessosnsssnosnnsennonnnsnnesnnrnrrenrrsernnrrnnrrenrrerrrererenne 201 Ee E a S treat Mach ae Neen Teo nie trea eee ere 203 UF T Rapachbceretci dina cerst rs eavtrmctoie aixearv in aeiens irnanensiaiiaebapid iameaieiiatinennneeraeeauiainnnd 203 1S ge ME FNEL OOO ien eet ae 205 174 OT Advanced SSNS cc nsiceieensionintrareimnseecerardouinereasirenmeiwrioenncsimniiens 208 Dee I SA IO soseen i ir ia iare r a a e R 210 17 6 IPSec VPN Technical Reference wcisicsrdsasiasasnersssacsrsermiieievenracisnsivediiaciahxersrduishnermiscidssiabrcatsneressnisnen 210 ToT eaae TEE U a a 211 T E N T aaa AT Eara 211 17 6 3 VPN NAT and NAT Traversal ccs cisesetic ei ne ecnecsecndccerandastdca ye ntinstnpensitnditesiartiaapsiacmiimrenckeccen 212 FA ected cenit E cere EE PE AE ana ANE PEN E AE E E EY 213 o RET I A A A E ecneneteenes 214 TOG Regola NODE sirsenis A RE EAE EEE E ee 215 TG PRAMS DNG SOINE scree aea 215 17 6 8 ID Type an
302. n channels each wireless network uses a specific channel or frequency to send and receive information e Every device in the same wireless network must use security compatible with the AP e Security stops unauthorized devices from using the wireless network It can also protect the information that is sent in the wireless network Radio Channels In the radio spectrum there are certain frequency bands allocated for unlicensed civilian use For the purposes of wireless networking these bands are divided into numerous channels This allows a variety of networks to exist in the same place without interfering with one another When you create a network you must select a channel to use Since the available unlicensed spectrum varies from one country to another the number of available channels also varies 96 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 6 Wireless 6 1 3 Before You Begin Before you start using these screens ask yourself the following questions See Section 6 8 on page 109 if some of the terms used here do not make sense to you e What wireless standards do the other wireless devices support IEEE 802 11g for example What is the most appropriate standard to use e What security options do the other wireless devices support WPA PSK for example What is the best one to use e Do the other wireless devices support WPS Wi Fi Protected Setup If so you can set up a well secured network very easily Even if some of
303. n use the prefix to generate their Pv6 addresses EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 361 Appendix F IPv6 ICMPv6 Internet Control Message Protocol for Pv6 ICMPv6 or ICMP for IPv6 is defined in RFC 4443 ICMPv6 has a preceding Next Header value of 58 which is different from the value used to identify ICMP for Pv4 CMPv 6 is an integral part of Pv6 Pv6 nodes use CMPv6 to report errors encountered in packet processing and perform other diagnostic functions such as ping Neighbor Discovery Protocol NDP The Neighbor Discovery Protocol NDP is a protocol used to discover other Pv6 devices and track neighbor s reachability in a network An IPv6 device uses the following CMPv6 messages types e Neighbor solicitation A request from a host to determine a neighbor s link layer address MAC address and detect if the neighbor ts still reachable A neighbor being reachable means it responds to a neighbor solicitation message from the host with a neighbor advertisement message e Neighbor advertisement A response from a node to announce its link layer address e Router solicitation A request from a host to locate a router that can act as the default router and forward packets e Router advertisement A response to a router solicitation or a periodical multicast advertisement from a router to advertise its presence and other parameters IPv6 Cache An IPv6 host is required to have a neighbor cache destination
304. nd bridges e A wireless client is a radio connected to a user s computer e An access point is a radio with a wired connection to a network which can connect with numerous wireless clients and let them access the network e A bridge is a radio that relays communications between access points and wireless clients extending a network s range Traditionally a wireless network operates in one of two ways e An infrastructure type of network has one or more access points and one or more wireless clients The wireless clients connect to the access points e An ad hoc type of network is one in which there is no access point Wireless clients connect to EMG5324 D10A User s Guide one another in order to exchange information Chapter 6 Wireless The following figure provides an example of a wireless network Figure 19 Example of a Wireless Network oc as The wireless network is the part in the blue circle In this wireless network devices A and B use the access point AP to interact with the other devices such as the printer or with the Internet Your Device is the AP Every wireless network must follow these basic guidelines e Every device in the same wireless network must use the same SSID The SSID is the name of the wireless network It stands for Service Set Dentifier e If two wireless networks overlap they should use a different channel Like radio stations or televisio
305. ndicator See CFI certificate factory default 194 Certificate Authority see CA certificates 191 CA 191 replacing 194 storage space 194 thumbprint algorithms 193 thumbprints 193 trusted CAs 195 verifying fingerprints 193 Certification Authority see CA certifications 369 notices 371 viewing 371 CFI 92 channel 335 interference 335 channel scan 98 channel wireless LAN 96 Class of Service 238 Class of Service see CoS client list 125 373 Index client server protocol 234 comfort noise generation 222 configuration 132 backup 267 firewalls 178 reset 269 restoring 268 copyright 369 CoS 160 238 CTS Clear to Send 336 CTS threshold 110 D data fragment threshold 110 default LAN IP address 23 default server address 165 Denials of Service see DoS DH 217 DHCP 78 122 132 133 DHCPv6 83 diagnostic 271 differentiated services 238 Differentiated Services see DiffServ Diffie Hellman key groups 217 DiffServ Differentiated Services 238 code points 238 marking rule 160 238 disclaimer 369 DLNA 130 DMZ 165 DNS 122 171 DNS Server for VPN host 215 DNS server address assignment 93 documentation related 2 domain name system see DNS Domain Name System See DNS DoS 178 DS Differentiated Services 160 DS field 160 238 DSCP 160 238 374 DTMF 237 Dual Tone MultiFrequency see DTMF DUID 83 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol see DHCP dynamic secure gateway address 202 dynamic WEP k
306. ndix See the product specifications for more information about which operating systems are supported This appendix shows you how to configure the IP settings on your computer in order for it to be able to communicate with the other devices on your network Windows Vista XP 2000 Mac OS 9 OS X and all versions of UNIX LINUX include the software components you need to use TCP IP on your computer If you manually assign IP information instead of using a dynamic IP make sure that your network s computers have IP addresses that place them in the same subnet In this appendix you can set up an IP address for e Windows XP NT 2000 on page 293 e Windows Vista on page 297 e Windows 7 on page 301 e Mac OS X 10 3 and 10 4 on page 305 e Mac OS X 10 5 on page 308 e Linux Ubuntu 8 GNOME on page 312 e Linux openSUSE 10 3 KDE on page 316 Windows XP NT 2000 The following example uses the default Windows XP display theme but can also apply to Windows 2000 and Windows NT EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 293 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 1 Click Start gt Control Panel Figure 162 Windows XP Start Menu F Internet Explorer e My Documents e Outlook Express Paint W Files and Settings Transfer W A EJ Command Prompt oy My Music Acrobat Reader 4 0 i 2 My Recent Documents a My Pictures My Computer 9 Tour Windows P RE Windows Movie Maker E Control Panel bA Frinter
307. ndns org 1 to 255 characters UserName UserN ame 1 to 255 characters Password RAT 1 to 63 characters Click Apply 3 11 3 Testing the DDNS Setting Now you should be able to access the Device from the Internet To test this Open a web browser on the computer using the IP address a b c d that is connected to the Internet Type http zyxelrouter dyndns org and press Enter The Device s login page should appear You can then log into the Device and manage it EMG5324 D10A User s Guide PART Il Technical Reference The appendices provide general information Some details may not apply to your Device Connection Status and System Info 4 1 Overview After you log into the web configurator the Connection Status screen appears This shows the network connection status of the Device and clients connected to it Use the System Info screen to look at the current status of the device system resources interfaces LAN WAN and WLAN and SIP accounts You can also register and unregister SIP accounts If you click Virtual Device on the System Info screen a visual graphic appears showing the connection status of the Device s ports See Section 2 2 2 on page 26 for more information 4 2 The Connection Status Screen Use this screen to view the network connection status of the device and its clients A warning message appears if there is a connection problem EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 4 Conn
308. net Local intranet Trusted sites Restricted sites Internet cah This zone contains all web sites you Jae havent placed in other zones Security level for this zone Move the slider to set the security level for this zone E Medium Safe browsing and still functional Prompts before downloading potentially unsate content Unsigned Actives controls will not be downloaded Appropriate for most Internet sites d Custom Level gt Default evel OF Cancel Apply 2 Click the Custom Level button 3 Scroll down to Scripting 4 Under Active scripting make sure that Enable is selected the default 5 Under Scripting of Java applets make sure that Enable is selected the default EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 32 Appendix C Pop up Windows JavaScript and Java Permissions 6 Click OK to close the window Figure 212 Security Settings Java Scripting Security Settings E i Settings Scripting Ei Active scripting J Disan Ei Allow paste operations via script O Disable Enable Prompt Ei Scripting of Jawa applets O Disable Prompt y Liene Sockbhaeki kinm Reset custom settings Reset to Medium Reset ma Java Permissions 1 From Internet Explorer click Tools I nternet Options and then the Security tab 2 Click the Custom Level button 3 Scroll down to Microsoft VM 4 Under Java permissions make sure that a safety level is selected 328 EMG5324 D10A Users Guide
309. nfiguration interface has an area for entering another device s PIN you can either enter the client s PIN in the AP or enter the AP s PIN in the client it does not matter which 6 Start WPS on both devices within two minutes 7 Use the configuration utility to activate WPS not the push button on the device itself 8 On a computer connected to the wireless client try to connect to the Internet If you can connect WPS was successful If you cannot connect check the list of associated wireless clients in the AP s configuration utility If you see the wireless client in the list WPS was successful The following figure shows a WPS enabled wireless client installed in a notebook computer connecting to the WPS enabled AP via the PIN method Figure 32 Example WPS Process PIN Method ENROLLEE REGISTRAR WITHIN 2 MINUTES SECURE EAP TUNNEL a 4 al SSID WPA 2 PSK COMMUNICATION S IJ J EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 5 Chapter 6 Wireless 6 8 5 3 How WPS Works When two WPS enabled devices connect each device must assume a Specific role One device acts as the registrar the device that supplies network and security settings and the other device acts as the enrollee the device that receives network and security settings The registrar creates a secure EAP Extensible Authentication Protocol tunnel and sends the network name SSID and the WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK pre shared key to the enrollee Whether
310. ng Settings 1 Click Start gt All Programs gt Accessories gt Command Prompt 2 Inthe Command Prompt window type ipconfig and then press ENTER You can also go to Start gt Control Panel gt Network Connections right click a network connection click Status and then click the Support tab to view your IP address and connection information 296 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Windows Vista This section shows screens from Windows Vista 1 Click Start gt Control Panel Figure 167 Windows Vista Start Menu Dy eve 7 0 Professional Media Player Classic Connect To Default Programs gt All Programs Help and Support f SS r a er k O ish iorn Search Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address Professional 2 Inthe Control Panel click the Network and Internet icon Figure 168 Windows Vista Control Panel File Edit View Tools Help Control Panel Home Sa OM Get started with Windows Back up your computer Security Check for updates Allow a program through Windows ie Firewall Network and Internet onnect to the Internet View network status and tasks Set up file sharing 3 Click the Network and Sharing Center icon System and Maintenance Figure 169 Windows Vista Network And Internet User Accounts Yip W Change account type Appearance and Personalization Change desktop background Change the color scheme Adjust screen resolution Clock Language and
311. nsure network security the access point and the RADIUS server use a shared secret key which is a password they both know The key is not sent over the network In addition to the Shared key password information exchanged is also encrypted to protect the network from unauthorized access Types of EAP Authentication This section discusses some popular authentication types EAP MD5 EAP TLS EAP TTLS PEAP and LEAP Your wireless LAN device may not support all authentication types EAP Extensible Authentication Protocol is an authentication protocol that runs on top of the IEEE 802 1x transport mechanism in order to Support multiple types of user authentication By using EAP to interact with an EAP compatible RADIUS server an access point helps a wireless station and a RADIUS server perform authentication The type of authentication you use depends on the RADIUS server and an intermediary AP s that Supports IEEE 802 1x For EAP TLS authentication type you must first have a wired connection to the network and obtain the certificate s from a certificate authority CA A certificate also called digital IDs can be used to authenticate users and a CA issues certificates and guarantees the identity of each certificate owner EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 339 Appendix D Wireless LANs EAP MD5 Message Digest Algorithm 5 MD5 authentication is the simplest one way authentication method The authentication server sends a challenge to
312. nt to add as a Share in the Device This field is read only when you are editing the share Share Path Manually enter the file path for the share or click the Browse button and select the folder that you want to add as a share This field is read only when you are editing the share Description You can either enter a short description of the share or leave this field blank Apply Click Apply to save your changes Back Click Back to return to the previous screen EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 129 Chapter 7 Home Networking 7 6 The Media Server Screen The media server feature lets anyone on your network play video music and photos from the USB storage device connected to your Device without having to copy them to another computer The Device can function as a DLNA compliant media server The Device streams files to DLNA compliant media clients like Windows Media Player The Digital Living Network Alliance DLNA is a group of personal computer and electronics companies that works to make products compatible in a home network The Device media server enables you to e Publish all shares for everyone to play media files in the USB storage device connected to the Device e Use hardware based media clients like the DMA 2500 to play the files Note Anyone on your network can play the media files in the published shares No user name and password or other form of security is used The media server is enabled by default with th
313. o Me ey cel gle Ba 61 lt een cee a enneee nee ieee ed eee eer eters weenie sar rene ener ar tyler meee erin men neer ttn freer enter 108 sw a SCION E A tena eet een 109 C S Tomea ee osian er a EE R E E E E ONNES 109 6 8 1 Additional Wireless Terms ccccccccssecccceeseececcaeeceeecseeeeesseeeeeeesseeceesseaeeeesaaeeeeseasseeessaaeeeeseas 110 CE I serseniodiesii R A 110 De S ORE riaa a EEEE 112 Re 2g E A E E A ome ee eee ee nrrr nn cee eee eee eee nee renee eee 113 ie re arinnar AT Ta EErEE AA EEE 113 Chapter 7 aean aea a aces N AATE DATAE E AE A AA A N PE AA A E ATE T E 121 FT N dii ERA 121 eTA TO Can Dom PE eh srnka E E E AERE 121 Ae Re a NEA E A A NE E E A E 121 Ta I N U SCE eaa n 124 C a E E ETA 125 TIES E E a a sd eden dae nat dead se eed eee eed ena 125 TAE UFF RAIN aap E E ase eniatans 127 Ta The Fie Snoring GOOG airone rrara E EER E E A praneoicoueomsemee 127 9 1 Blore YoU Begini osram ten eelocenseciae te cianseatereimiaavernonnsshancieesiserevietaverreceimeulenanerte 128 EPEE EE a E sameness eens ereeees 129 Fe Ue ee Serer eE sierran anara ar erences 130 1 Tne Fimer Solver SCTE eiren E aia Ea E a RE a 131 Pe ee ee E EEE EEEE AEE 131 R a S E E LE R A VAEA IN A EA A E TI E AE AEE E E A TE 132 7 9 INSTA OP imn Windows EXamDIS persisiran ara ARTEVE EEEE EEE i 136 T10 Using UPA in Windows AF INS cette cass trete cucrctfond ices saioeectos de seaatsintieysanicieiiectobioienecdeans 139 Chapter 8 LEa evince ASE A E E A OE E E
314. o add a customized service rule that you can use in the firewall s ACL rule configuration Click Add New Service Entry or the edit icon next to an existing service rule in the Service screen to display the following screen Figure 88 Service Add Edit Name i Type TCP r Protocol Number o5 Source Port Single ee Destination Port Single ee so a The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 54 Service Add Edit Name Enter nomere oS Choose the IP protocol TCP UDP ICMP or Other that defines your customized port from the drop down list box Select Other to be able to enter a protocol number 1800 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 13 Firewall Table 54 Service Add Edit continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Protocol This field is displayed if you select Other as the protocol Number Enter the protocol number of your customized port Source These fields are displayed if you select TCP or UDP as the IP port Destination Port Select Single to specify one port only or Range to specify a span of ports that define your customized service If you select Any the service is applied to all ports Type a single port number or the range of port numbers that define your customized service Apply Click Apply to save your changes Click Back to exit this screen without saving 13 4 The Access Control Screen Click Security gt Firewall gt Access Control to display the followin
315. o do computers on a LAN share one common network number This is known as an Internet Protocol address EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 2 Chapter 7 Home Networking Subnet Mask The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address Your Device will compute the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address that you entered You don t need to change the subnet mask computed by the Device unless you are instructed to do otherwise DHCP DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol allows clients to obtain TCP IP configuration at start up from a server This Device has a built in DHCP server capability that assigns IP addresses and DNS servers to systems that support DHCP client capability DNS DNS Domain Name System maps a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa The DNS server is extremely important because without it you must know the IP address of a computer before you can access it The DNS server addresses you enter when you set up DHCP are passed to the client machines along with the assigned IP address and subnet mask 7 1 2 2 About UPnP How do I know if I m using UPnP UPnP hardware is identified as an icon in the Network Connections folder Windows XP Each UPnP compatible device installed on your network will appear as a separate icon Selecting the icon of a UPnP device will allow you to access the information and properties of that device Cautions with UPnP The automated nature of N
316. o enable PFS DH2 refers to Diffie Hellman Group 2 a 1024 bit random number DH5 refers to Diffie Hellman Group5 a 1536 bit random number and DH14 refers to Diffie Hellman Group 14 providing 2048 bits of key strength DPD Active Select DPD Dead Peer Protection if you want the Device to make sure the remote IPSec router is there before it transmits data The remote IPSec router must support DPD If there has been no traffic for at least 15 seconds the Device sends a message to the remote IPSec router If the remote IPSec router responds the Device transmits the data If the remote IPSec router does not respond the Device shuts down the SA Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Device and return to the VPN screen Click Back to return to the previous screen EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 17 VPN 17 5 Viewing SA Monitor Click Security gt VPN gt Monitor to open the screen as shown Use this screen to display and manage active VPN connections A Security Association SA is the group of security settings related to a specific VPN tunnel This screen displays active VPN connections Use Refresh to display active VPN connections This screen is read only The following table describes the fields in this tab When there is outbound traffic but no inbound traffic the SA times out automatically after two minutes A tunnel with no outbound or inbound traffic is idle and does not timeout until the SA lifet
317. o erase all the speed dial entries Click this to set every field in this screen to its last saved value 18 8 Technical Reference This section contains background material relevant to the Vol P screens 18 8 1 VoIP VoIP is the sending of voice signals over Internet Protocol This allows you to make phone calls and send faxes over the Internet at a fraction of the cost of using the traditional circuit switched telephone network You can also use servers to run telephone service applications like PBX services and voice mail Internet Telephony Service Provider ITSP companies provide VolP service Circuit switched telephone networks require 64 kilobits per second Kbps in each direction to handle a telephone call VolP can use advanced voice coding techniques with compression to reduce the required bandwidth 18 8 2 SIP The Session Initiation Protocol SIP is an application layer control signaling protocol that handles the setting up altering and tearing down of voice and multimedia sessions over the Internet SIP signaling is separate from the media for which it handles sessions The media that is exchanged during the session can use a different path from that of the signaling SIP handles telephone calls and can interface with traditional circuit switched telephone networks SIP Identities A SIP account uses an identity Sometimes referred to as a SIP address A complete SIP identity is called a SIP URI Uniform Resource Iden
318. o set up a profile and connect the wireless client to an AP configured for WPA PSK security In this example the SSID is SSID_Example3 the profile name is PN _Example3 and the pre shared key is You have chosen the profile name PN_Example3 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 1 Open the ZyXEL utility and click the Profile tab to open the screen shown next Click Add to configure a new profile Li Profile info Profile Name l SSID Network Type Infrastructure Le DEFAULT Network Mode 802 1ib g Channel Auto Security DISABLE Connect 2 The Add New Profile screen appears The wireless client automatically searches for available wireless networks and displays them in the Scan Info box Click Scan if you want to search again You can also configure your profile for a wireless network that is not in the list Scan Info Profile Name PN_Example3 si S510 A CPE_5257_00 SSID SS1D_Example3 ti es CPE 5546 AP i c Network Type 5510 Examples f Infrastructure Connect to an Access point ihi zld_zyxel Ad Hoc Connect directly to other computers fi ZyXEL Scan Select 3 Give the profile a descriptive name of up to 32 printable ASCII characters Select Infrastructure and either manually enter or select the AP s SSID in the Scan I nfo table and click Select 4 Choose the same encryption method as the AP to which you want to connect In this example WPA PSK
319. o the multicast routers group At start up the Device queries all directly connected networks to gather group membership After that the Device periodically updates this information 92 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 5 Broadband DNS Server Address Assignment Use Domain Name System DNS to map a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa for instance the IP address of www zyxel com is 204 217 0 2 The DNS server is extremely important because without it you must know the IP address of a computer before you can access it The Device can get the DNS server addresses in the following ways 1 The ISP tells you the DNS server addresses usually in the form of an information sheet when you sign up If your ISP gives you DNS server addresses manually enter them in the DNS server fields 2 If your ISP dynamically assigns the DNS server IP addresses along with the Device s WAN IP address set the DNS server fields to get the DNS server address from the ISP EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 93 Chapter 5 Broadband 3G Comparison Table See the following table for a comparison between 2G 2 5G 2 75G and 3G wireless technologies Table9 2G 2 5G 2 75G 3G and 3 5G Wireless Technologies MOBILE PHONE AND DATA STANDARDS DATA NAME TYPE GSM BASED CDMA BASED SPEED Circuit GSM Global System for Mobile Interim Standard 95 IS 95 the first CDMA Slow switched Communications Personal Handy phone bas
320. of obstructions In point to point application position both antennas at the same height and in a direct line of sight to each other to attain the best performance For omni directional antennas mounted on a table desk and so on point the antenna up For omni directional antennas mounted on a wall or ceiling point the antenna down For a single AP application place omni directional antennas as close to the center of the coverage area as possible For directional antennas point the antenna in the direction of the desired coverage area EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 345 Appendix D Wireless LANs WiFi Protected Setup Your Device supports WiFi Protected Setup WPS which is an easy way to set up a secure wireless network WPS is an industry standard specification defined by the WiFi Alliance WPS allows you to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security without having to configure security settings manually Each WPS connection works between two devices Both devices must support WPS check each device s documentation to make Sure Depending on the devices you have you can either press a button on the device itself or in its configuration utility or enter a PIN a unique Personal Identification Number that allows one device to authenticate the other in each of the two devices When WPS is activated on a device it has two minutes to find another device that also has WPS activated Then the two devices connect and
321. of the wireless station and LAN devices that are allowed access to the Device in these address fields Enter the MAC addresses in a valid MAC address format EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Parental Control 15 1 Overview Parental control allows you to block web sites with the specific URL You can also define time periods and days during which the Device performs parental control on a specific user 15 2 The Parental Control Screen Use this screen to enable parental control view the parental control rules and schedules Click Security gt Parental Control to open the following screen Figure 93 Security gt Parental Control General Parental Contral Enable Disable settings are invalid when disabled Add new PCP ee ee 1 30 23 59 configured None Apply Cancel The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 59 Parental Control gt Parental Control LABEL DESCRIPTION Parental Select Enable to activate parental control Control Add new PCP Click this if you want to configure a new parental control rule This shows the index number of the rule Status This indicates whether the rule is active or not A yellow bulb signifies that this rule is active A gray bulb signifies that this rule is not active PCP Name This shows the name of the rule Home Network This shows the MAC address of the LAN user s computer to which this rule applies User MAC Internet Access This
322. om the drop down list box 8 Inthe Printer s Address field type the IP address of your Device 9 Deselect the Use default queue on server check box 10 Type LP1 in the Queue Name field EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 63 Chapter 3 Tutorials 11 Select your Printer Model from the drop down list box If the printer s model is not listed select Generic Printer List IP Printing Printers Address 192 168 1 1 internet address or DNS name Use default queue on server Complete and valid address Queue Name LP1 Printer Model Generic Printer List IP Printing Printer s Address 192 168 1 1 Internet address or DNS name Complete and valid address Use default queue on server Queue Name LP1 Printer Model ESP Model Name EPSON 24 Pin Series CUPS v1 1 EPSON New Stylus Color Series CUPS v1 1 EPSON New Stylus Photo Series CUPS v1 1 EPSON Stylus Color Series CUPS v1 1 Se lt E Cancel 13 The Name LP1 on 192 168 1 1 displays in the Printer List field The default printer Name displays in bold type Printer List Make Default Add Delete rere alias LP1 on 192 168 1 1 ears Stylus C43 Stopped Your Macintosh print server driver setup is complete You can now use the Device s print server to print from a Macintosh computer EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 3 8 Configuring the MAC Address Filter Thomas noticed that his daughter J osephine spends too
323. on Configuration PBC is initiated by pressing a button on each WPS enabled device and allowing them to connect automatically You do not need to enter any information Not every WPS enabled device has a physical WPS button Some may have a WPS PBC button in their configuration utilities instead of or in addition to the physical button Take the following steps to set up WPS using the button 1 Ensure that the two devices you want to set up are within wireless range of one another 2 Look for a WPS button on each device If the device does not have one log into its configuration utility and locate the button see the device s User s Guide for how to do this for the Device see Section 6 4 on page 105 3 Press the button on one of the devices it doesn t matter which For the Device you must press the WPS button for more than three seconds 4 Within two minutes press the button on the other device The registrar sends the network name SSID and security key through an secure connection to the enrollee If you need to make sure that WPS worked check the list of associated wireless clients in the AP s configuration utility If you see the wireless client in the list WPS was successful 6 8 5 2 PIN Configuration Each WPS enabled device has its own PIN Personal Identification Number This may either be Static it cannot be changed or dynamic in some devices you can generate a new PIN by clicking on a button in the configur
324. one WAN connection make sure you turn off the DHCP feature in the Home Networking screen to have the clients get WAN IP addresses directly from your ISP s DHCP server cannot create multiple connections of the same type Your WAN interface must enable VLAN and fill each WAN connection with different VLAN IDs cannot access the Internet anymore had access to the Internet with the Device but my Internet connection is not available anymore 1 Check the hardware connections and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected See the Quick Start Guide and Section 1 6 on page 20 2 Turn the Device off and on 2 6 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 30 Troubleshooting 3 If the problem continues contact your ISP The Internet connection is slow or intermittent 1 There might be a lot of traffic on the network Look at the LEDs and check Section 1 6 on page 20 If the Device is sending or receiving a lot of information try closing some programs that use the Internet especially peer to peer applications 2 Turn the Device off and on 3 Ifthe problem continues contact the network administrator or vendor or try one of the advanced suggestions Advanced Suggestions e Check the settings for QoS If it is disabled you might consider activating it If it is enabled you might consider raising or lowering the priority for some applications 30 5 Wireless Internet Access What factors may cause intermi
325. one receiver while you talk Use this screen to maintain basic information about each SIP account You can also enable and disable each SIP account configure the volume echo cancellation and VAD Voice Activity Detection settings for each individual phone port on the Device How to Find Out More See Chapter 3 on page 31 for a tutorial showing how to set up these screens in an example scenario See Section on page 232 for advanced technical information on SIP 18 1 3 Before You Begin e Before you can use these screens you need to have a VolP account already set up If you don t have one yet you can sign up with a VolP service provider over the Internet 222 EMG5324 D10A Users Guide Chapter 18 VoIP e You should have the information your VoIP service provider gave you ready before you start to configure the Device 18 2 The SIP Service Provider Screen Use this screen to configure the SIP server information QoS for VoIP calls the numbers for certain phone functions and dialing plan Click Vol P gt SIP to open the SIP Service Provider screen Note Click more to see all the fields in the screen You don t necessarily need to use all these fields to set up your account Click hide more to see and configure only the fields needed for this feature Figure 117 VolP gt SIP gt SIP Service Provider SIP Service Provider Selection Service Provider Selection General SIP Service Provider SIP Service Provid
326. opriate IP settings 5 Use the Following IP address Obtain ONS server address automatically Use the Following DNS server addresses Advanced OK Cancel 8 Select Obtain an IP address automatically if your network administrator or ISP assigns your IP address dynamically Select Use the following IP Address and fill in the IP address Subnet mask and Default gateway fields if you have a static IP address that was assigned to you by your network administrator or ISP You may also have to enter a Preferred DNS server and an Alternate DNS server if that information was provided Click Advanced 9 Click OK to close the Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties window 10 Click OK to close the Local Area Connection Properties window Verifying Settings 1 Click Start gt All Programs gt Accessories gt Command Prompt 2 Inthe Command Prompt window type ipconfig and then press ENTER You can also go to Start gt Control Panel gt Network Connections right click a network connection click Status and then click the Support tab to view your IP address and connection information 300 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address Windows 7 1 2 3 This section shows screens from Windows 7 Enterprise Click Start gt Control Panel Figure 174 Windows 7 Start Menu HA Snipping Tool y Computer Calculator Control Panel p XPS Viewe
327. or the bit s of the matched traffic s MAC address which can be of any hexadecimal character s For example if you set the MAC address to 00 13 49 00 00 00 and the mask to ff ff ff 00 00 00 a packet with a MAC address of 00 13 49 12 34 56 matches this criteria EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 9 Quality of Service QoS Table 37 Class Setup Add Edit continued LABEL DESCRIPTION IP Address If you select IP in the Ether Type field select the check box and enter the source IP address in dotted decimal notation A blank source IP address means any source IP address IP Subnet Mas IPv6 Address Enter the source subnet mask If you select I Pv6 in the Ether Type field enter the source s IPv6 address Prefix length Enter the source prefix length Port Range If you select TCP or UDP in the IP Protocol field select the check box and enter the port number s of the source Exclude Select this option to exclude the packets that match the specified criteria from this classifier Destination Select the check box and enter the destination MAC address of the packet Address MAC Mask Type the mask for the specified MAC address to determine which bits a packet s MAC address should match Enter f for each bit of the specified source MAC address that the traffic s MAC address Should match Enter 0 for the bit s of the matched traffic s MAC address which can be of any hexadecim
328. ork uses WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK depends on the device You can check the configuration interface of the registrar device to discover the key the network is using if the device supports this feature Then you can enter the key into the non WPS device and join the network as normal the non WPS device must also support WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK EMG5324 D10A Users Guide 35 Appendix D Wireless LANs e When you use the PBC method there is a short period from the moment you press the button on one device to the moment you press the button on the other device when any WPS enabled device could join the network This is because the registrar has no way of identifying the correct enrollee and cannot differentiate between your enrollee and a rogue device This is a possible way for a hacker to gain access to a network You can easily check to see if this has happened WPS works between only two devices simultaneously so if another device has enrolled your device will be unable to enroll and will not have access to the network If this happens open the access point s configuration interface and look at the list of associated clients usually displayed by MAC address It does not matter if the access point is the WPS registrar the enrollee or was not involved in the WPS handshake a rogue device must still associate with the access point to gain access to the network Check the MAC addresses of your wireless clients usually printed on a label on t
329. ormation letting it know where to send the REGISTER message as well as the relevant user and authorization data A SIP registration has a limited lifespan The User Agent Client must renew its registration within this lifespan If it does not do so the registration data will be deleted from the SIP registrar s database and the connection broken The Device attempts to register all enabled subscriber ports when it is switched on When you enable a subscriber port that was previously disabled the Device attempts to register the port immediately Authorization Requirements SIP registrations and subsequent SIP requests require a username and password for authorization These credentials are validated via a challenge response system using the HTTP digest mechanism as detailed in RFC3261 SIP Session Initiation Protocol SIP Servers SIP is a client server protocol A SIP client is an application program or device that sends SIP requests A SIP server responds to the SIP requests When you use SIP to make a VoIP call it originates at a client and terminates at a server A SIP client could be a computer or a SIP phone One device can act as both a SIP client and a SIP server SIP User Agent A SIP user agent can make and receive VoIP telephone calls This means that SIP can be used for peer to peer communications even though it is a client server protocol In the following figure 234 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 18 Vo
330. ote secure gateway s domain name in the Secure Gateway Address field if the remote secure gateway has a dynamic WAN IP address and is using DDNS The Device has to rebuild the VPN tunnel each time the remote secure gateway s WAN IP address changes there may be a delay until the DDNS servers are updated with the remote gateway s new WAN IP address Dynamic Secure Gateway Address If the remote secure gateway has a dynamic WAN IP address and does not use DDNS enter 0 0 0 0 as the secure gateway s address In this case only the remote secure gateway can initiate SAs This may be useful for telecommuters initiating a VPN tunnel to the company network see Section 17 6 11 on page 217 for configuration examples 202 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 17 VPN The Secure Gateway IP Address may be configured as 0 0 0 0 only when using IKE key management and not Manual key management Finding Out More See Section 17 6 on page 210 for advanced technical information on IPSec VPN 17 1 3 Before You Begin If a VPN tunnel uses Telnet FTP WWW then you should configure remote management Remote MGMT to allow access for that service 17 2 VPN Setup Screen The following figure helps explain the main fields in the web configurator Figure 105 IPSec Summary Fields e e e e e N Remote Network ee I l Remote i IPSec Router l gt VPN Tunnel C ji 5 My IP Addre
331. ou may also have to enter a Preferred DNS server and an Alternate DNS server if that information was provided Click Advanced if you want to configure advanced settings for IP DNS and WINS 8 Click OK to close the Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties window 9 Click OK to close the Local Area Connection Properties window Verifying Settings 1 Click Start gt All Programs gt Accessories gt Command Prompt 2 Inthe Command Prompt window type ipconfig and then press ENTER 304 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 3 The IP settings are displayed as follows Figure 180 Windows 7 Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 Properties al tieipconfig Vindows 2000 IP Configuration thernet adapter Local Area Connection Connection specific DNS Suffix P 2612HN IP Address es A sia A T E 192 18 Sibel Wak woe Gongs das Mos ee a e Default Gateway oro mororo onou Mac OS X 10 3 and 10 4 The screens in this section are from Mac OS X 10 4 but can also apply to 10 3 1 Click Apple gt System Preferences Figure 181 Mac OS X 10 4 Apple Menu J WO Finder File Edit Vie About This Mac Software Update Mac OS X Software Location Recent Items Force Quit Sleep Restart Shut Down EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 305 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 2 Inthe System Preferences window click the Network icon Figure 182
332. ou need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so with additional information Shared Enter a password up to 128 alphanumeric characters as the key to be shared between the Secret external authentication server and the Device The key must be the same on the external authentication server and your Device The key is not sent over the network more hide Click more to show more fields in this section Click hide more to hide them more WPA This field is only available for WPA2 Select this if you want the Device to support WPA and Compatible WPA2 simultaneously Group Key The Group Key Update Timer is the rate at which the RADIUS server sends a new group Update Timer key out to all clients If the value is set to 0 the update timer function is disabled Encryption If the security mode is WPA the encryption mode is set to TKIP to enable Temporal Key Integrity Protocol TKIP security on your wireless network If the security mode is WPA2 the encryption mode is set to AES to enable Advanced Encryption System AES security on your wireless network AES provides superior security to TKIP 6 3 The More AP Screen The Device can broadcast up to four wireless network names at the same time This means that users can connect to the Device using different SSIDs You can secure the connection on each SSID profile so that wireless clients connecting to the Device using different SSIDs cannot
333. ough an ISP the ISP can provide you with the Internet addresses for your local networks On the other hand if you are part of a much larger organization you should consult your network administrator for the appropriate IP addresses Regardless of your particular situation do not create an arbitrary IP address always follow the guidelines above For more information on address assignment please refer to RFC 1597 Address Allocation for Private Internets and RFC 1466 Guidelines for Management of IP Address Space 290 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting IP Address Conflicts Each device on a network must have a unique IP address Devices with duplicate IP addresses on the same network will not be able to access the Internet or other resources The devices may also be unreachable through the network Conflicting Computer IP Addresses Example More than one device can not use the same IP address In the following example computer A has a Static or fixed IP address that is the same as the IP address that a DHCP server assigns to computer B which is a DHCP client Neither can access the Internet This problem can be solved by assigning a different static IP address to computer A or setting computer A to obtain an IP address automatically Figure 159 Conflicting Computer IP Addresses Example t t i 4 1 lj IA ll g ENS E I i FE 192 168 1 33 gt a C Internet g ra g i
334. ough faster while traffic in lower priority queues is dropped if the network is congested Weight Select the weight from 1 to 15 of this queue If two queues have the same priority level the Device divides the bandwidth across the queues according to their weights Queues with larger weights get more bandwidth than queues with smaller weights Rate Limit Specify the maximum transmission rate in Kbps allowed for traffic on this queue Apply Click Apply to save your changes Click Back to return to the previous screen without saving 9 4 The Class Setup Screen Use this screen to add edit or delete QoS classifiers A classifier groups traffic into data flows according to specific criteria such as the source address destination address source port number destination port number or incoming interface For example you can configure a classifier to select traffic from the same protocol port such as Telnet to form a flow You can give different priorities to traffic that the Device forwards out through the WAN interface Give high priority to voice and video to make them run more smoothly Similarly give low priority to many large file downloads so that they do not reduce the quality of other applications Click Network Setting gt QoS gt Class Setup to open the following screen Figure 68 Network Setting gt QoS gt Class Setup Add new Classifier EMG5324 D10A User s Guide From device ICMP HTTP HTTP Proxy
335. ove the slider to select a privacy setting for the Internet zone Medium Blocks third party cookies that do not have a compact privacy policy Blocks third party cookies that use personally identifiable Information without your implicit consent Restricts first party cookies that ute personally identifiable Information without implicit consent Sies Import Advanced Pop up Blocker Prevent most pop up windows from appearing Black pop ups ok J came i Aae 3 Click Apply to save this setting Enable Pop up Blockers with Exceptions Alternatively if you only want to allow pop up windows from your device see the following steps 1 In Internet Explorer select Tools I nternet Options and then the Privacy tab EMG5324 D10A Users Guide Appendix C Pop up Windows JavaScript and Java Permissions 2 Select Settings to open the Pop up Blocker Settings screen Figure 209 Internet Options Privacy Internet Options General security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Settings fi Move the slider to select a privacy setting for the Internet zone Medium Blocks third party cookies that do not have a compact privacy policy Blocks third party cookies that use personally identifiable Information without your implicit consent Restricts first party cookies that use personally identifiable Information without implicit consent Cae Cea eke Pop up
336. ow access to the Device from the WAN Port You may change the server port number for a service if needed however you must use the Same port number in order to use that service for remote management Apply Click Apply to save your changes Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings EMG5324 D10A User s Guide The SNMP Screen Simple Network Management Protocol is a protocol used for exchanging management information between network devices Your Device supports SNMP agent functionality which allows a manager station to manage and monitor the Device through the network The Device supports SNMP version one SNMPv1 and version two SNMPv2c The next figure illustrates an SNMP management operation Figure 138 SNMP Management Model MANAGER Managed Device Managed Device Managed Device An SNMP managed network consists of two main types of component agents and a manager An agent is a management software module that resides in a managed device the Device An agent translates the local management information from the managed device into a form compatible with SNMP The manager is the console through which network administrators perform network management functions It executes applications that control and monitor managed devices The managed devices contain object variables managed objects that define each piece of information to be collected about a device Examples of variables include such as number of
337. ows the number of bytes received and sent through the WAN interface of the Device Refresh Interval Select how often you want the Device to update this screen from the drop down list box EMG5324 D10A Users Guide 247 Chapter 20 Traffic Status Table 92 System Monitor gt Traffic Status gt WAN continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Connected This shows the name of the WAN interface that is currently connected Interface Packets Sent This indicates the number of transmitted packets on this interface This indicates the number of frames with errors transmitted on this interface Packets Received 20 3 The LAN Status Screen Click System Monitor gt Traffic Status gt LAN to open the following screen You can view the LAN traffic statistics in this screen Figure 132 System Monitor gt Traffic Status gt LAN Refresh interval 5 seconds we amaaauaaaaauaai i i i Bytes Sent a02 614 ofr Bytes Received 1159174 4322 C Data 11290 Sent Packet Error 0 Drop Data Received Packet Error Drop The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 93 System Monitor gt Traffic Status gt LAN LABEL DESCRIPTION Refresh Interval Select how often you want the Device to update this screen from the drop down list box This shows the LAN or WLAN interface Bytes Sent This indicates the number of bytes transmitted on this interface Bytes Received This indicates the number of bytes received on thi
338. packets received node port status etc A Management Information Base MIB is a collection of managed objects SNMP allows a manager and agents to communicate for the purpose of accessing these objects SNMP itself is a simple request response protocol based on the manager agent model The manager issues a request and the agent returns responses using the following protocol operations e Get Allows the manager to retrieve an object variable from the agent EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 25 Chapter 23 The SNMP Screen e GetNext Allows the manager to retrieve the next object variable from a table or list within an agent In SNMPv1 when a manager wants to retrieve all elements of a table from an agent it initiates a Get operation followed by a series of GetNext operations e Set Allows the manager to set values for object variables within an agent e Trap Used by the agent to inform the manager of some events To change your Device s SNMP settings click Maintenance gt SNMP to display the screen as Shown Figure 139 Maintenance gt SNMP Get Community public Set Community Ip rivate Trap Community Trap Destination The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 99 Configuration gt Management gt Remote MGMT gt SNMP LABEL DESCRIPTION Get Community Enter the password for the incoming Get and GetNext requests from the management Station The default is public and allows all reque
339. phone port To access the following screen click VoIP gt SIP gt SIP Account Figure 118 VolP gt SIP gt SIP Account Add new SIP account ChangeMe ChangeMe ChangeMe ChangeMe The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 80 VoIP gt SIP gt SIP Account LABEL DESCRIPTION Active This shows whether the SIP account is activated or not A yellow bulb signifies that this SIP account is activated A gray bulb signifies that this SIP account is activated SIP Account This shows the name of the SIP account SIP Service This shows the name of the SIP service provider Provider This shows the SIP number Modify Click the Edit icon to configure the SIP account Click the Delete icon to delete this SIP account from the Device 226 EMG5324 D10A Users Guide 18 3 1 Add Edit SIP Account Chapter 18 VoIP You can configure a new SIP account or edit one To access this screen click Add new SIP Account in the SIP Account screen or Edit icon next to an existing account Figure 119 SIP Account Add Edit SIP Service Provider Selection Service Provider Selection General SIP Account SIP Account Number Authenticaton Username Password URL Type URL Type Voice Features Primary Compression Type Second Compression Type Third Compression Type Speaking Volume Control Listening Volume Control IV Active G 168 Echo Cancellation MV Active VAD Voice Active De
340. ports authentication authorization and accounting The access point is the client and the server is the RADIUS server The RADIUS server handles the following tasks e Authentication Determines the identity of the users e Authorization Determines the network services available to authenticated users once they are connected to the network e Accounting Keeps track of the client s network activity 338 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs RADIUS is a simple package exchange in which your AP acts as a message relay between the wireless client and the network RADIUS server Types of RADIUS Messages The following types of RADIUS messages are exchanged between the access point and the RADIUS server for user authentication e Access Request Sent by an access point requesting authentication e Access Reject Sent by a RADIUS server rejecting access e Access Accept Sent by a RADIUS server allowing access e Access Challenge Sent by a RADIUS server requesting more information in order to allow access The access point sends a proper response from the user and then sends another Access Request message The following types of RADIUS messages are exchanged between the access point and the RADIUS server for user accounting e Accounting Request Sent by the access point requesting accounting e Accounting Response Sent by the RADIUS server to indicate that it has started or stopped accounting In order to e
341. ppOrE EPSON Support Create Shortcut Windows 2000 Support Delete Rename 4 Select the Ports tab and click Add Port gf EPSON Stylus C45 Series Properties F a x Color Management S eects ersion Information General Sharing Advanced TES EPSON Stylus C45 Series Print to the following portis Documents will print to the first free checked port Pot Description Printer da Printer Fort WebWorks Rastenzer Cano Printer Fort Printer Fort Serial Port Serial Port Serial Port Serial Port Add Fort J Delete Fort Configure Port V Enable bidirectional support I Enable printer pooling Chapter 3 Tutorials 5 A Printer Ports window appears Select Standard TCP IP Port and click New Port Printer Ports Available port types Adobe POF Port Local Port Microsoft Document Imaging Writer Monitor Network Print Pork an Standard TCPVIIP Port New Pork Type Cancel EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 6 Add Standard TCP IP Printer Port Wizard window opens up Click Next to start configuring the printer port Add Standard TCP IP Printer Port Wizard Welcome to the Add Standard TCP IP Printer Port Wizard fou use this wizard to add a port for a network printer Before continuing be sure that 1 The device is turned on 2 The network is connected and configured To continue click Next i Cancel 7 Enter the IP addres
342. r wi Link Layer Topology Discovery Mapper 10 Driver wi ink Layer Topology Discovers Responder Description Transmission Control Protocol Intemet Protocol The default wide area network protocol that provides communication across diverse interconnected networks EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 303 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 6 The Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP I Pv4 Properties window opens Figure 179 Windows 7 Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 Properties Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP TPw4 Properties a mE General You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IF settings 3 Obtain an IP address automatically IF address 192 168 1 7 Subnet mask 255 255 255 U Default gateway my f p pm a a _ lj m eg mn r iF m i or oo a go i rrr i a LI Ean LA 5E T m m L L BSS CLI GUL Y Use the following DNS server addresses Preferred DNS server Alternate DNS server Validate settings upon exit _Advanced 7 Select Obtain an IP address automatically if your network administrator or ISP assigns your IP address dynamically Select Use the following IP Address and fill in the IP address Subnet mask and Default gateway fields if you have a static IP address that was assigned to you by your network administrator or ISP Y
343. r iii Devices and Printers ai y m oy Windows Fax and Scan Default Programs i ey Magnifier Help and Support gt All Programs In the Control Panel click View network status and tasks under the Network and I nternet category Figure 175 Windows 7 Control Panel E Control Panel 4 Search Con Adjust your computer s settings View by Category System and Security i User Accounts and Family Safety Review your computer s status Add or remove user accounts Back up your computer i Set up parental controls for any user Find and fix problems p Appearance and Personalization Change the theme JIEW network Status and Tasks Change desktop background _Lhoose homegroup and sharing options Adjust screen resolution Hardware and Sound aa Clock Language and Region View devices and printers Change keyboards or other input methods Add a device a Change display language Programs Mw Ease of Access Uninstall a program Let Windows suggest settings i Optimize visual display Click Change adapter settings Figure 176 Windows 7 Network And Sharing Center g9 uE Control Panel Network and Internet Network and Sharing Center Control Panel Home View your basic network information and set up connections F iele nee See full map anage wireless networks M ly ip td Change advanced sharing This computer settings s View your active networks Connect or disconnect Le ZyAEL com
344. r to dial up services using PPP Select this if you have a username and password for Internet access IP over Ethernet In this type of Internet connection IP packets are routed between the Ethernet interface and the WAN interface and then formatted so that they can be understood in a bridged environment PPPoE Passthrough This field is available when you select PPPoE encapsulation In addition to the Device s built in PPPoE client you can enable PPPoE pass through to allow up to ten hosts on the LAN to use PPPoE client software on their computers to connect to the ISP via the Device Each host can have a separate account and a public WAN IP address PPPoE pass through is an alternative to NAT for application where NAT is not appropriate Disable PPPoE pass through if you do not need to allow hosts on the LAN to use PPPoE client software on their computers to connect to the ISP Pv6 1Pv4 Mode If you select IPv4 the Device only runs IPv4 If you select IPv6 the Device only runs Pv6 Select I Pv6 I Pv4 DualStack to allow the Device to run IPv4 and IPv6 at the same time VLAN Enable VLAN Select this to add the VLAN tag specified below to the outgoing traffic through this connection Enter 802 1P IEEE 802 1p defines up to 8 separate traffic types by inserting a tag into a MAC layer frame Priority that contains bits to define class of service Type the IEEE 802 1p priority level from O to 7 to add to traffic through t
345. r use of any products or software described herein Neither does it convey any license under its patent rights nor the patent rights of others ZyXEL further reserves the right to make changes in any products described herein without notice This publication is subject to change without notice Your use of the Device is subject to the terms and conditions of any related service providers Use with products that have NAT and or 3G Do not use the Device for illegal purposes Illegal downloading or sharing of files can result in severe civil and criminal penalties You are subject to the restrictions of copyright laws and any other applicable laws and will bear the consequences of any infringements thereof ZyXEL bears NO responsibility or liability for your use of the download service feature Use for products that have a download service Make sure all data and programs on the Device are also stored elsewhere ZyXEL is not responsible for any loss of or damage to any data programs or storage media resulting from the use misuse or disuse of this or any other ZyXEL product Use for storage backup devices Trademarks This item incorporates copy protection technology that is protected by U S patents and other intellectual property rights of Rovi Corporation Reverse engineering and disassembly are prohibited Use for STBs that need Rovi certification Certifications Class B Federal Communications Commission FCC Interference Statement
346. re 148 Network Temporarily Disconnected a Local Area Connection Network cable unplugged If you restore the default configuration you may need to change the IP address of your computer to be in the same subnet as that of the default device IP address 192 168 1 1 See Appendix B on page 293 for details on how to set up your computer s IP address If the upload was not successful an error screen will appear Click OK to go back to the Configuration screen 268 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 28 Backup Restore Reset to Factory Defaults Click the Reset button to clear all user entered configuration information and return the Device to its factory defaults The following warning screen appears Figure 149 Reset Warning Message Are you sure you want to reset to factory default Figure 150 Reset In Process Message WE Router is restarting now Please wait As there willbe no indication of when the process is complete please wait for one minute before attempting ta access the router again You can also press the RESET button on the back panel to reset the factory defaults of your Device Refer to Section 1 7 on page 22 for more information on the RESET button 28 3 The Reboot Screen System restart allows you to reboot the Device remotely without turning the power off You may need to do this if the Device hangs for example Click Maintenance gt Reboot Click the Reboot button to have the Device r
347. re 186 Mac OS X 10 4 Network Utility eoe Network Utility l info Netstat AppleTalk Ping Lookup Traceroute Whois Finger Port Scan erface for information Network Interface en0 p nte Transfer Statistics Hardware Address 00 16 cb 8b 50 2e Sent Packets 20607 IP Address es 118 169 44 203 Send Errors 0 Link Speed 100 Mb Recv Packets 22626 Link Status Active Recv Errors 0 Vendor Marvell Collisions 0 Model Yukon Gigabit Adapter 88E8053 Mac OS X 10 5 The screens in this section are from Mac OS X 10 5 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 1 Click Apple gt System Preferences Figure 187 Mac OS X 10 5 Apple Menu i Finder File Edit Vie About This Mac Software Update Mac OS X Software System Preferences E AJOUR Recent Items Force Quit Sleep Restart Shut Down 2 In System Preferences click the Network icon Figure 188 Mac OS X 10 5 Systems Preferences System Preferences Personal Appearance Desktop amp Dock Expos amp international Security Spotlight Screen Saver Spaces Hardware CDs amp DVDs Displays Energy Keyboard amp Print amp Fax Sound Saver Mouse Internet amp Ne Q QuickTime Sharing System u G E l t biri Accounts Date amp Time Parental Software Speech Startup Disk Time Machine Universal Controls Update Access EMG5324 D10A User s
348. red to Single this field is N A When the Local Address Type field is configured to Subnet enter the subnet of the LAN behind your Device Remote Specify the IP addresses of the devices behind the remote IPSec router that can use the VPN tunnel The remote IP addresses must correspond to the remote IPSec router s configured local IP addresses Two active SAs cannot have the local and remote IP address es both the same Two active SAs can have the same local or remote IP address but not both You can configure multiple SAs between the same local and remote IP addresses as long as only one is active at any time Remote Address Use the drop down menu to choose Single or Subnet Select Single for a single IP Type address Select Subnet to specify IP addresses based on the subnet mask IP Address Start When the Remote Address Type field is configured to Single enter a static IP address on the network behind the remote IPSec router When the Remote Address Type field is configured to Subnet enter an IP Address on the LAN behind the IPSec router End Subnet Mask When the Remote Address Type field is configured to Single this field is N A When the Remote Address Type field is configured to Subnet enter the subnet of the LAN behind the IPSec router WAN WAN Interface The interface used to connect to the internet interface used to connect to the internet My IP O o My IP E a o o ce ee een remit only shows the IP of the selected
349. refore they are considered hidden from each other Figure 220 RTS CTS RTS Range di mpm FP EE a e e eae J a mina Staton AP gT Emman lan e a i ae i ie l th pe aii a k i i J H Fi ral Data f nd f ACK kam gea Station A _ S3 hear each other They a er can hear the AP When station A sends data to the AP it might not know that the station B is already using the channel If these two stations send data at the same time collisions may occur when both sets of data arrive at the AP at the same time resulting in a loss of messages for both stations RTS CTS is designed to prevent collisions due to hidden nodes An RTS CTS defines the biggest size data frame you can send before an RTS Request To Send CTS Clear to Send handshake is invoked When a data frame exceeds the RTS CTS value you set between 0 to 2432 bytes the station that wants to transmit this frame must first send an RTS Request To Send message to the AP for permission to send it The AP then responds with a CTS Clear to Send message to all other Stations within its range to notify them to defer their transmission It also reserves and confirms with the requesting station the time frame for the requested transmission Stations can send frames smaller than the specified RTS CTS directly to the AP without the RTS Request To Send CTS Clear to Send handshake You should only configure RTS CTS if the possibility of hid
350. rk Follow your printer manufacturers instructions on how to install the printer software on your computer Note Your printer s installation instructions may ask that you connect the printer to your computer Connect your printer to the Device instead Use this screen to enable or disable sharing of a USB printer via your Device To access this screen click Network Setting gt Home Networking gt Printer Server Figure 46 Network Setting gt Home Networking gt Printer Server Print Server Configuration Print Server Enable Disable EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 3 Chapter 7 Home Networking The following table describes the labels in this menu Table 29 Network Setting gt Home Networking gt Print Server LABEL DESCRIPTION Select Enable to have the Device share a USB printer Apply Click Apply to save your changes Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings 7 8 Technical Reference This section provides some technical background information about the topics covered in this chapter LANs WANs and the Device The actual physical connection determines whether the Device ports are LAN or WAN ports There are two separate IP networks one inside the LAN network and the other outside the WAN network as shown next Figure 47 LAN and WAN IP Addresses ee ee ee mmm DHCP Setup DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol RFC 2131 and RFC 2132 allows individual clients to obtain
351. rol screen The following screen displays Figure 90 Access Control Add Edit Filter Name Source Address Type Single Source IP Address Start i tti C OCSC zSOY Source IP Address End oO Destination Address Type Single Destination IP Address Start i Destination IP Address End S Select Protocol Select Service Y Protocol TCP E Protocol Number 0 255 Source Port Single C 6dl F Destination Port Single id E Policy PERMIT Direction The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 56 Access Control Add Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Name Enter a a name of up to 16 alphanumeric characters not including spaces underscores and dashes Source Address Select the type of source address Type Source IP When the Source Address Type field is configured as Single enter the IP address of the Address Start source When the Source Address Type field is configured as Range enter the range of End source IP address Destination Select the type of destination address Address Type Source IP When the Destination Address Type field is configured as Single enter the IP address of Address Start the source When the Destination Address Type field is configured as Range enter the End range of source IP address Select Protocol Select the transport layer protocol that defines your customized port from the drop down list box The specific protocol rule sets you add in th
352. ry 11000000 10101000 00000001 00000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 287 Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting Table 110 Subnet 1 continued IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER Arner ca BIT Subnet Address Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 1 192 168 1 0 Broadcast Address Highest Host ID 192 168 1 62 192 168 1 63 Table 111 Subnet 2 IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER it POIRI BIT IP Address 192 168 1 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 o Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 Subnet Address Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 65 192 168 1 64 Broadcast Address Highest Host ID 192 168 1 126 192 168 1 127 Table 112 Subnet 3 IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER TNT a BIT IP Address 192 168 1 128 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 10000000 Subnet Mask Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 a Address Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 129 192 168 1 128 Broadcast Address Highest Host ID 192 168 1 190 192 168 1 191 Table 113 Subnet 4 IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER Thi aa BIT IP Address 192 168 1 192 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 11000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 Subnet Address Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 193 192 168 1 192 Broadcast Address Highest Host ID 192 168 1 254 192 168 1 255 Example Eight Subnets Similarly use a 27 bit mask to create e
353. s A file system is a way of storing and organizing files on your hard drive and storage device Often different operating systems such as Windows or Linux have different file systems The file sharing feature on your Device supports File Allocation Table FAT and FAT32 Common Internet File System The Device uses Common Internet File System CIFS protocol for its file sharing functions CIFS compatible computers can access the USB file storage devices connected to the Device CIFS protocol is supported on Microsoft Windows Linux Samba and other operating systems refer to your systems specifications for CIFS compatibility 7 1 2 4 About Printer Server Print Server This is a computer or other device which manages one or more printers and which sends print jobs to each printer from the computer itself or other devices Operating System An operating system OS is the interface which helps you manage a computer Common examples are Microsoft Windows Mac OS or Linux TCP IP TCP IP Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol is a set of communications protocols that most of the Internet runs on Port A port maps a network service such as http to a process running on your computer such as a process run by your web browser When traffic from the Internet is received on your computer the port number is used to identify which process running on your computer it is intended for EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 123 Chapter 7
354. s Global Options Overview Hostname DNS Routing Additionally edit their configuration IP Address AMD PCnet Fast 79C971 DHCP Adding a Network Card Press Add to configure a new network card manually Configuring or Deleting Choose a network card to change or remove Then press Configure or Delete as desired AMD PCnet Fast 79C971 MAC 08 00 27 96 ed 3d Device Name eth etho Started automatically at boot IP address assigned using DHCP Ag Configure Delete Abort EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 5 When the Network Card Setup window opens click the Address tab Figure 203 openSUSE 10 3 Network Card Setup Yast2 linux h20z Address Setup 4 Network Card Setup Select No Address Setup if you do not General want any IP address for this device This is particularly useful for iene bonding ethernet devices O No IP Address for Bonding Devices Select Dynamic O Dynamic Address DHCP I address if you do not Statically assigned IP Address have a static IP address assigned by IP Address subnet Mask Hostname the system administrator or your Beet cable or DSL provider You can choose one of the dynamic address assignment method Select DHCP if you have a DHCP server running on your local network Network addresses are then obtained automatically from the server To automatical
355. s and Faxes Help and Support ra Search All Programs gt 77 Run MP Log OFF IO Turn OFF Computer z 7 start ig untitled Paint 2 Inthe Control Panel click the Network Connections icon Figure 163 Windows XP Control Panel E Control Panel File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Q Bacl Bi p Search Me Folders Hab Address gt Control Panel H Control Panel Network E Switch to Category view Connections See Also E name windows Update Controllers EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 3 Right click Local Area Connection and then select Properties Figure 164 Windows XP Control Panel gt Network Connections gt Properties ocal Area Connection d i nabled Ls Standard PLI Fast Ethernet Adapte Disable Status Repair Bridge Connections Create Shortcut Rename 4 On the General tab select Internet Protocol TCP IP and then click Properties Figure 165 Windows XP Local Area Connection Properties Local Area Connection Properties General Authentication Advanced Connect using Eg Accton EN1207D TX FCI Fait Eihemet dante 1 This connection uses the following tems Be El Client for Microsoft Networks W a File and Printer Sharing for Microsott Networks Install Jninetall Description Transmission Control Proto
356. s devices might not have MAC addresses 2 Hexadecimal characters are 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E and F EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 6 Wireless 6 8 2 4 Encryption Wireless networks can use encryption to protect the information that is sent in the wireless network Encryption is like a secret code If you do not know the secret code you cannot understand the message The types of encryption you can choose depend on the type of authentication See Section 6 8 2 3 on page 111 for information about this Table 21 Types of Encryption for Each Type of Authentication NO AUTHENTICATION AUTHENTICATION RADIUSSERVER SERVER Weakest E Security Static WEP t WPA a Strongest en PSK WPA2 For example if the wireless network has a RADIUS server you can choose WPA or WPA2 If users do not log in to the wireless network you can choose no encryption Static WEP WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK Usually you should set up the strongest encryption that every device in the wireless network Supports For example suppose you have a wireless network with the Device and you do not have a RADIUS server Therefore there is no authentication Suppose the wireless network has two devices Device A only supports WEP and device B supports WEP and WPA Therefore you should set up Static WEP in the wireless network Note It is recommended that wireless networks use WPA PSK WPA or stronger encryption The other types of encrypt
357. s interface This shows the LAN or WLAN interface Sent Packet This indicates the number of transmitted packets on this interface 248 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 20 Traffic Status Table 93 System Monitor gt Traffic Status gt LAN continued LABEL DESCRIPTION This indicates the number of frames with errors transmitted on this interface This indicates the number of outgoing packets dropped on this interface 20 4 The NAT Status Screen Click System Monitor gt Traffic Status gt NAT to open the following screen You can view the NAT status of the Device s client s in this screen Figure 133 System Monitor gt Traffic Status gt NAT Refresh interval 5 seconds Device Name twpci37 4 02 19 168 1 58 00 24 21 7e 20 96 Total 142 The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 94 System Monitor gt Traffic Status gt NAT LABEL DESCRIPTION Refresh Interval Select how often you want the Device to update this screen from the drop down list box This shows the name of the client IP Address This shows the IP address of the client MAC Address This shows the MAC address of the client No of Open This shows the number of NAT sessions used by the client Session EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 249 Chapter 20 Traffic Status 20 5 The 3G Backup Status Screen Click System Monitor gt Traffic Status gt 3G Backup to open the following screen You can view th
358. s of the Device to which the printer is connected in the Printer Name or IP Address field In our example we use the default IP address of the Device 192 168 1 1 The Port Name field updates automatically to reflect the IP address of the port Click Next Note The computer from which you are configuring the TCP IP printer port must be on the same LAN in order to use the printer sharing function Add Standard TCP IP Printer Port Wizard Add Port For which device do you want to add a port Enter the Printer Mame or lP address and a port name for the desired device Printer Name or IP Address 132 168 1 1 Fort Name IP_1 92 166 1 1 i Cancel EMG5324 D10A Users Guide 8 Select Custom under Device Type and click Settings Add Standard TCP IP Printer Port Wizard Additional Port Information Required The device could not be identified The device is not foundon the network Be sure that 1 The device is turned on 2 The network is connected 3 The device is properly configured 4 The address on the previous page i correct IF you think the address i not corect click Back to return to the previous page Then correct the address and perfom another search on the network f you are sure the address is correct select the device type below Device Type Standard Generic Network Card lt Back Cancel 9 Confirm the IP address of the Device in the IP Address field 10 Select Raw under Protocol 1
359. s your call to a VoIP service provider s SIP server which forwards your calls to either VoIP or PSTN phones 1 2 3 Wireless Connection By default the wireless LAN WLAN is enabled on the Device Once Wireless is enabled IEEE 802 11b g n compliant clients can wirelessly connect to the Device to access network resources You can set up a wireless network with WPS WiFi Protected Setup or manually add a client to your wireless network Figure 3 Wireless Connection Application 1 3 The WLAN Button You can use the WLAN ON OFF button on top of the device to turn the wireless LAN on or off You can also use it to activate WPS in order to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security 18 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 1 Introduction Turn the Wireless LAN On or Off 1 Make sure the POWER LED is on not blinking 2 Press the WLAN ON OFF button for one second and release it The WLAN WPS LED should change from on to off or vice versa Activate WPS 1 Make sure the POWER LED is on not blinking 2 Press the WLAN ON OFF button for more than five seconds and release it Press the WPS button on another WPS enabled device within range of the Device The WLAN WPS LED should flash while the Device sets up a WPS connection with the wireless device Note You must activate WPS in the Device and in another wireless device within two minutes of each other See Chapter 6 on page 113 for more information EMG5324 D10A Us
360. screen Table 41 Port Forwarding Add Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable This is available only in the Edit screen Clear the check box to disable the rule Select the check box to enable it Enter a name to identify this rule using keyboard characters A Z a z 1 2 and so on WAN Interface Select the WAN interface through which the service is forwarded You must have already configured a WAN connection with NAT enabled Start Port Enter the original destination port for the packets To forward only one port enter the port number again in the External End Port field To forward a series of ports enter the start port number here and the end port number in the External End Port field End Port Enter the last port of the original destination port range To forward only one port enter the port number in the External Start Port field above and then enter it again in this field To forward a series of ports enter the last port number in a series that begins with the port number in the External Start Port field above Translation This shows the port number to which you want the Device to translate the incoming port Start Port For a range of ports enter the first number of the range to which you want the incoming ports translated Translation End This shows the last port of the translated port range Port Server IP Enter the inside IP address of the virtual server here Address Protocol Type Select the protocol supported by
361. se If you are having problems with wireless interference changing the channel may help Try to use a channel that is as many channels away from any channels used by neighboring APs as possible The channel number which the Device is currently using then displays in the Operating Channel field Click this button to have the Device immediately scan for and select a channel which is not used by another device whenever the device reboots or the wireless setting is changed Operating This is the channel currently being used by your AP Channel Security Level Security Mode Select Basic or More Secure to add security on this wireless network The wireless clients which want to associate to this network must have same wireless security settings as the Device When you select to use a security additional options appears in this screen Or you can select No Security to allow any client to associate this network without any data encryption or authentication See the following sections for more details about wireless security modes Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Device Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings 6 2 1 No Security Select No Security to allow wireless stations to communicate with the access points without any data encryption or authentication EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 6 Wireless Note If you do not enable any wireless security on your Device your network is accessib
362. ser s Guide 145 Chapter 8 Routing 8 2 Configuring Static Route Use this screen to view and configure IP static routes on the Device Click Network Setting gt Static Route to open the following screen Figure 63 Network Setting gt Static Route Add Hew Static Route 4 Fi test 192 168 0 0 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 31 Network Setting gt Static Route LABEL DESCRIPTION S New Static 2 this to set up a new static route on the Device Route This is the number of an individual static route Active This indicates whether the rule is active or not A yellow bulb signifies that this static route is active A gray bulb signifies that this static route is not active Status This shows whether the static route is currently in use or not A yellow bulb signifies that this static route is in use A gray bulb signifies that this static route is not in use Name o This is the name that describes or identifies this route is the name that describes or identifies this route C IP This parameter O CE a e the IP network address of the final destination Routing is always based on network number Gateway This is the IP address of the gateway The gateway is a router or switch on the same network segment as the device s LAN or WAN port The gateway helps forward packets to their destinations Subnet Mask This parameter specifies the IP network subnet mask of the final destination C
363. session remain idle without traffic before it automatically disconnects the session When two SIP devices start a SIP session they must agree on an expiration time for idle sessions This field is the shortest expiration time that the Device accepts EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 18 VoIP Table 79 VoIP gt SIP gt SIP Service Provider continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Dialing Interval Selection Dialing Interval Enter the number of seconds the Device should wait after you stop dialing numbers before it Selection makes the phone call The value depends on how quickly you dial phone numbers Phone Key Specify the key combinations for certain functions of the SIP phone Config PSTN Fail Over Select this check box if you want to redirect the outgoing calls to the PSTN line that do not use the Internet when your SIP account is unregistered or SIP call has failed Apply Click Apply to save your changes Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings 18 3 The SIP Account Screen The Device uses a SIP account to make outgoing VoIP calls and check if an incoming call s destination number matches your SIP account s SIP number In order to make or receive a VoIP call you need to enable and configure a SIP account and map it to a phone port The SIP account contains information that allows your Device to connect to your VoIP service provider See Section 18 3 on page 226 for how to map a SIP account to a
364. set up a secure network by themselves Push Button Configuration WPS Push Button Configuration PBC is initiated by pressing a button on each WPS enabled device and allowing them to connect automatically You do not need to enter any information Not every WPS enabled device has a physical WPS button Some may have a WPS PBC button in their configuration utilities instead of or in addition to the physical button Take the following steps to set up WPS using the button 1 Ensure that the two devices you want to set up are within wireless range of one another 2 Look for a WPS button on each device If the device does not have one log into its configuration utility and locate the button see the device s User s Guide for how to do this for the Device see Section 6 4 on page 105 3 Press the button on one of the devices it doesn t matter which 4 Within two minutes press the button on the other device The registrar sends the network name SSID and security key through an secure connection to the enrollee If you need to make sure that WPS worked check the list of associated wireless clients in the AP s configuration utility If you see the wireless client in the list WPS was successful PIN Configuration Each WPS enabled device has its own PIN Personal Identification Number This may either be Static it cannot be changed or dynamic you can change it to a new random number by clicking on a button in the configura
365. ss Secure Gateway IP Address Local and remote IP addresses must be static Click Security gt VPN to open the VPN Setup screen This is a menu of your IPSec rules tunnels The IPSec summary menu is read only Edit a VPN by selecting an index number and then configuring its associated submenus Figure 106 Security gt VPN gt Setup Summary Add Hew Tunnel scr co EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 203 Chapter 17 VPN The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 67 Security gt VPN gt Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Add New Tunnel Click this button to set up VPN policies for a new tunnel This is the VPN policy index number Click a number to edit VPN policies Active This field displays whether the VPN policy is active or not A Yes signifies that this VPN policy is active No signifies that this VPN policy is not active Tunnel Name This field displays the identification name for this VPN policy Local Address This field will display the IP address used by the Device Remote Address This field will display the Secure Gateway Address of the IPSec router with which you re making the VPN connection IPSec Algorithm This field displays the encryption algorithm used for an SA Both AH and ESP increase Device processing requirements and communications latency delay Modify Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the VPN configuration Click the Remove icon to remove
366. ss assigned by the ISP IPv6 DNS Server Secondary Enter the second IPv6 DNS server address assigned by the ISP IPv6 DNS Server Apply Click Apply to save your changes Back Click Back to return to the previous screen 5 2 1 2 Bridge Mode 88 Click the Add new WAN Interface in the Network Setting gt Broadband screen or the Edit icon next to the connection you want to configure Select Bridge as the encapsulation mode Figure 17 Broadband Add Edit Bridge General Name o Type EtherwAN Mode Bridge VLAN Enable VLAN L Enter 802 1FP Priority 0 7 Enter 802 10 VLAN ID 1 4094 3900 3905 are reserved Apply Back The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 7 Broadband Add Edit Bridge LABEL DESCRIPTION General Name Enter a service name of the connection Type The Device transmits data over the Ethernet WAN port Mode Select Bridge when your ISP provides you more than one IP address and you want the connected computers to get individual IP address from ISP s DHCP server directly If you select Bridge you cannot use routing functions such as QoS Firewall DHCP server and NAT on traffic from the selected LAN port s EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 5 Broadband Table 7 Broadband Add Edit Bridge continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable VLAN Select this to add the VLAN Tag specified below to the outgoing traffic through this connection Enter 802 1P
367. sses which are reserved and can not be assigned to a multicast group Table 124 Reserved Multicast Address MULTICAST ADDRESS Subnet Masking Both an IPv6 address and IPv6 subnet mask compose of 128 bit binary digits which are divided into eight 16 bit blocks and written in hexadecimal notation Hexadecimal uses four bits for each character 1 10 A F Each block s 16 bits are then represented by four hexadecimal characters For example FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FCO0O 0000 0000 0000 Interface ID In IPv6 an interface ID is a 64 bit identifier It identifies a physical interface for example an Ethernet port or a virtual interface for example the management IP address for a VLAN One interface should have a unique interface ID EUI 64 The EUI 64 Extended Unique Identifier defined by the IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers is an interface ID format designed to adapt with IPv6 It is derived from the 48 bit 6 byte Ethernet MAC address as shown next EUI 64 inserts the hex digits fffe between the third and fourth bytes of the EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 359 Appendix F IPv6 MAC address and complements the seventh bit of the first byte of the MAC address See the following example MAC 00 13 49 12 34 56 EUI 64 02 13 49 12 34 56 Stateless Autoconfiguration With stateless autoconfiguration in IPv6 addresses can be uniquely and automatically generated Unlike DHCPv
368. st added Add New Static Route eee Destination IP Gateway Subnet Mask interface Modify _ To_N2 192 168 10 0 192 168 1 253 255 255 255 0 LAN bro a Ww Now B should be able to receive traffic from A You may need to additionally configure B s firewall settings to allow specific traffic to pass through 3 10 Configuring QoS Queue and Class Setup This section contains tutorials on how you can configure the QoS screen Note Voice traffic will not be affected by the user defined QoS settings on the Device It always gets the highest priority Let s say you are a team leader of a small sales branch office You want to prioritize e mail traffic because your task includes sending urgent updates to clients at least twice every hour You also upload data files Such as logs and e mail archives to the FTP server throughout the day Your colleagues use the Internet for research as well as chat applications for communicating with other branch offices In the following figure your Internet connection has an upstream transmission bandwidth of 10 000 kbps For this example you want to configure QoS so that e mail traffic gets the highest priority with at least 5 000 kbps You can do the following e Configure a queue to assign the highest priority queue 7 to e mail traffic from the LAN interface so that e mail traffic would not get delayed when there is network congestion e Note the IP address 192 168 1 23 for example and or MAC ad
369. sts Set Community Enter the password for incoming Set requests from the management station The default is public and allows all requests Trap Type the trap community which is the password sent with each trap to the SNMP manager Community The default is public and allows all requests Trap Type the IP address of the station to send your SNMP traps to Destination Apply Click Apply to save your customized settings and exit this screen Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh 258 EMG5324 D10A Users Guide system 24 1 Overview You can configure system settings including the host name domain name and the inactivity time out interval in the System screen 24 1 1 What You Need to Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter Domain Name This is a network address that identifies the owner of a network connection For example in the network address www zyxel com support files the domain name is www zyxel com 24 2 The System Screen Use the System screen to configure the system s host name domain name and inactivity time out interval The Host Name is for identification purposes However because some ISPs check this name you Should enter your computer s Computer Name Find the system name of your Windows computer In Windows XP click start My Computer View system information and then click the Computer Name tab Note the entry in the Full computer na
370. t User Account UserName Old Password New Password Retype to Confirm The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 97 Maintenance gt User Account LABEL DESCRIPTION User Name You can configure the password for the Admin and User accounts Old Password Type the default password or the existing password you use to access the system in this field New Password Type your new system password up to 30 characters Note that as you type a password the screen displays a for each character you type After you change the password use the new password to access the Device Retype to Type the new password again for confirmation Confirm Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 21 User Account 254 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Remote MGMT 22 1 Overview Remote MGMT allows you to manage your Device from a remote location through the following interfaces e LAN and WLAN e WAN only Note The Device is managed using the web configurator 22 1 1 What You Need to Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter TR 064 TR 064 is a LAN Side DSL CPE Configuration protocol defined by the DSL Forum TR 064 is built on top of UPnP It allows the users to use a TR 064 compliant CPE management application on their computers from the LAN to discover the CPE and
371. t of the network number If a bit in the subnet mask is 0 then the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the host ID The following example shows a subnet mask identifying the network number in bold text and host ID of an IP address 192 168 1 2 in decimal Table 106 P Address Network Number and Host ID Example _ 2ND 3RD 1ST OCTET 200 aS 4TH OCTET 192 168 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 00000010 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 ate 00000000 Network Number 11000000 10101000 00000001 a By convention subnet masks always consist of a continuous sequence of ones beginning from the leftmost bit of the mask followed by a continuous sequence of zeros for a total number of 32 bits 284 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting Subnet masks can be referred to by the size of the network number part the bits with a 1 value For example an 8 bit mask means that the first 8 bits of the mask are ones and the remaining 24 bits are zeroes Subnet masks are expressed in dotted decimal notation just like IP addresses The following examples show the binary and decimal notation for 8 bit 16 bit 24 bit and 29 bit subnet masks Table 107 Subnet Masks BINARY 1ST OCTET 2ND OCTET 3RD OCTET 4TH OCTET 8 bitmask 11111111 00000000 00000000 00000000 255 0 0 0 DECIMAL 16 bit mask 11111111 11111111 00000000 00000000 255 255 0 0 24 bit mask 111111
372. t services 2 WAN to LAN Allow access from other computers on the Internet 3 When the security level is setto High access to the following Internet services is allowed Telnet FTP HTTP HTTPS DNS POPS and SMTP Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 52 Security gt Firewall gt General LABEL DESCRIPTION 13 3 The Services Screen You can configure customized services and port numbers in the Service screen For a comprehensive list of port numbers and services visit the IANA Internet Assigned Number Authority website See Appendix E on page 353 for some examples EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 1 19 Chapter 13 Firewall Click Security gt Firewall gt Service to display the following screen Figure 87 Security gt Firewall gt Services Add New Service Entry example Any Port gt Any Port B Note Ifa service rule is removed related ACL rules will also be removed Each field is described in the following table Table 53 Security gt Firewall gt Services LABEL DESCRIPTION New Ca this to add a new service Service Entry Name This is the name of your customized service This shows the IP protocol typr Port Number This is the port number or range of ports that defines your customized service Modify Click the Edit icon to edit the entry Click the Delete icon to remove this entry 13 3 1 Add Edit a Service Use this screen t
373. t the link layer address and sends the packet when the neighbor is reachable If the Device cannot find an entry in the neighbor cache or the state for the neighbor is not reachable it starts the address resolution process This helps reduce the number of IPv6 solicitation and advertisement messages Multicast Listener Discovery The Multicast Listener Discovery MLD protocol defined in RFC 2710 is derived from IPv4 s Internet Group Management Protocol version 2 IGMPv2 MLD uses ICMPv6 message types rather than IGMP message types MLDv1 is equivalent to IGMPv2 and MLDv2 is equivalent to GMPv3 MLD allows an IPv6 switch or router to discover the presence of MLD listeners who wish to receive multicast packets and the IP addresses of multicast groups the hosts want to join on its network MLD snooping and MLD proxy are analogous to IGMP snooping and IGMP proxy in Pv4 MLD filtering controls which multicast groups a port can join MLD Messages A multicast router or switch periodically sends general queries to MLD hosts to update the multicast forwarding table When an MLD host wants to join a multicast group it sends an MLD Report message for that address An MLD Done message is equivalent to an IGMP Leave message When an MLD host wants to leave a multicast group it can send a Done message to the router or switch The router or switch then sends a group specific query to the port on which the Done message is received to determin
374. tector B Note ChangeMe 7 Active SIP Account ChangeMe ChangeMe BITIT SIP e723 I middie Z Midde Z VAD will not be active while G 722 is used Call Features M Send Caller ID M Active Call Transfer M Active Call Waiting Active Call Waiting Reject Time Active Unconditional Forward Active Busy Forward Active No Answer Forward No Answer Ring Time Hot Line Warm Line Enable Warm Line Hot Line Warm Line number Warm Line Timer sec I Active Anonymous Call Block 24 10 60 second To Number To Number To Number fio 10 180 Second HotLine CN j 5 300 Second Each field is described in the following table Table 81 SIP Account Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION SIP Service Provider Selection Service Select the SIP service provider profile you want to use for the SIP account you configure in Provider this screen Selection This field is view only if you are editing the SIP account SIP Account Selection EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 22 Chapter 18 VoIP Table 81 SIP Account Edit continued LABEL DESCRIPTION SIP Account This shows the SIP account you are configuring Selection General SIP Account Select the Active SIP Account check box if you want to use this account Clear it if you do not want to use this account SIP Account Enter your SIP number In the full SIP URI this is the part before the symbol You can
375. tem 1 Click Start gt Settings then right click on Printers and select Open ee New Office Document dr Open Office Document E T Set Program Access and Defaults E Windows Update winzip Programs Favorites Documents Settings Search Help Run Shut Gown Start a Add Printer S Acrobat Distiller a HP LaserJet 5000 Series PLL 6 ca WebWorks Rasterizer a Canon iR S000 6000 PELE Gf Adobe PDF E canan iR S000 6000 PCLoe Gf Microsoft Office Document Image Writer Control Panel Eo a gt a PRT403 on zytiwptOd zyxel com iH Network and Dial up Connections PRT402 on zytwptOl zyxel com J Printers wf oven Thai Stylus C45 Series Taskbar amp Start Menu eaters The Printers folder opens up First you need to open up the properties windows for the printer you want to configure a TCP IP port 2 Locate your printer EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 3 Right click on your printer and select Properties E Printers File Edit View Favorites Tools Help bak fey ijsearch Pyrolders Gh WG GE x uy Ea Address 2 Printers a Add Printer gf Acrobat Distiller Printers gf Adobe PDF 38 Canon iR5000 6000 PCL5e EPSON Stylus C45 Series EPSON Stylus C45 Series Documents 0 Set as Default Printer Status Ready Printing Preferences Model EPSON Stylus C45 Series Pause Printing Waiting Time 0 Cancel All Documents Sharing Use Printer Offline EF SN DU
376. tes 3 Tabie of ir renee cain estes Sarena eee asa ee eee diane 5 oe ga i de C70 ene ee ee ne eee enna eee eer reer errr 15 Chapter 1 Be Oe stearate cea eenetian sas ina vaneees ane es esse etc nen en ease a AA 17 Tigh Ne eiesig rece reopens E AEE ae ee 17 Ta Pe IO Mo LOVCE aati rach ata ea paces pionticanse twins ienna ne aeria aiana PTA rA enone 17 T a ee a ee cere mere ener cere amie en erent ee eeer erento merr tne meee ase rree i Ue ee E E E aga tienen E 18 By We ee a NS ce pea zosentd peat dtieaca sea E pun ct etersaceeiais ecdadeieas 18 Tee Bee ee Be OP sirara nde ee tsi eee 18 1TA Ways to Manage Me Ce hase tis treated sararaahuiatdaiaiavichacienstiaenaaetidenastateretiwlatmantciemaasies 20 1 5 Good Habits for Managing the Device ou ccecccccccsseseceeeceaeeeeceeeesaeeeeceeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeesseeeeeeeeessaaaes 20 ps LELE L neers mien en E E re ee ee eee PCr er ee rte ee er eee 20 LFI FRE ETE esis gatce can egnes eicann sani TET 22 Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator cccsssceccesseeccesseeeeeneeeseeseeeceaseeceaeesenaseeseaaseeseaseesonnseesonneeseaes 23 He oa ne en Nee ee eee eee re ee eer reece rer eee ee eee ee ee eee ee eer rere ee oer e 23 2 1 1 Accessing the Web Configurator opis rece icoavencetmsasesnctnseecnactadesoepoiadiesaveatacdiasaieeteleseacectaloemacies 23 ve e eaa aea E e E A E EAA I IEA EE AA A T AATE EN OA E A A ORE 25 et E aE tt ec ee 25 OE Ne asec E cet eemgieieici
377. th and so many resources that Internet access becomes unavailable Use the DoS screen to activate protection against DoS attacks Click Security gt Firewall gt DoS to display the following screen Figure 91 Security gt Firewall gt DoS DoS Protection Blocking Enable Disable The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 57 Security gt Firewall gt DoS LABEL DESCRIPTION DoS Protection Select Enable to enable protection against DoS attacks Blocking Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving 13 6 Firewall Technical Reference This section provides some technical background information about the topics covered in this chapter EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 183 Chapter 13 Firewall 13 6 1 Guidelines For Enhancing Security With Your Firewall 1 Change the default password via web configurator 2 Think about access control before you connect to the network in any way 3 Limit who can access your Device 4 Don t enable any local service such as Telnet or FTP that you don t use Any enabled service could present a potential security risk A determined hacker might be able to find creative ways to misuse the enabled services to access the firewall or the network 5 For local services that are enabled protect against misuse Protect by configuring the services to communicate only with specific peers and protect by configuring rules to
378. the Local Start IP address and 255 255 255 255 as the Local End IP address This field is blank for One to One mapping types Global Start IP This is the starting Inside Global IP Address IGA Enter 0 0 0 0 here if you have a dynamic IP address from your ISP You can only do this for the Many to One mapping type Global End IP This is the ending Inside Global IP Address IGA This field is blank for One to One and Many to One mapping types 166 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 10 Network Address Translation NAT Table 44 Network Setting gt NAT gt Address Mapping continued DESCRIPTION This is the address mapping type One to One This mode maps one local IP address to one global IP address Note that port numbers do not change for the One to one NAT mapping type Many to One This mode maps multiple local IP addresses to one global IP address This is equivalent to SUA i e PAT port address translation the Device s Single User Account feature that previous routers supported only Many to Many This mode maps multiple local IP addresses to shared global IP addresses Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the address mapping rule Click the Delete icon to delete an existing address mapping rule Note that subsequent address mapping rules move up by one when you take this action 10 5 1 Add Edit Address Mapping Rule To add or edit an address mapping rule click Add new rule or the rule
379. the index number of this entry Status This indicates whether the queue is active or not A yellow bulb signifies that this queue is active A gray bulb signifies that this queue is not active This shows the descriptive name of this queue This shows the name of the Device s interface through which traffic in this queue passes This shows the weight of this queue Buffer This shows the queue management algorithm used by the Device Management Rate Limit This shows the maximum transmission rate allowed for traffic on this queue kbps Modify Click the Edit icon to edit the queue Click the Delete icon to delete an existing queue Note that subsequent rules move up by one when you take this action 9 3 1 Add Edit a QoS Queue This shows the priority of this queue Use this screen to configure a queue Click Add new queue in the Queue Setup screen or the Edit icon next to an existing queue Figure 67 Queue Setup Add Edit Active Name Interface WAN E Priority 4 Low gt Weight 1 Rate Limit D kbps Apply The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 35 Queue Setup Add Edit EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 9 Quality of Service QoS Table 35 Queue Setup Add Edit continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Priority Select the priority level from 1 to 7 of this queue The larger the number the higher the priority level Traffic assigned to higher priority queues gets thr
380. this classifier Modify Click the Edit icon to edit the classifier Click the Delete icon to delete an existing classifier Note that subsequent rules move up by one when you take this action 154 EMG5324 D10A Users Guide Chapter 9 Quality of Service QoS 9 4 1 Add Edit QoS Class Click Add new Classifier in the Class Setup screen or the Edit icon next to an existing classifier to configure it Figure 69 Class Setup Add Edit Class Configuration Active Class Name Classification Order Forward To Interface DSCP Mark 83 802 1P Mark VLAN ID Unchange To Queue Fast k 1 4095 Criteria Configuration Use the configurations below to specify the characteristics of a data flow need to be managed by this QoS rule Local r l Ether Type IP 0x0800 Basic From Interface Source IP Subnet Mask 1 65535 L MAC Address MAC Mask M IP Address P IPv6 Address Prefix length i i R Port Range Destination 7 MAC Address Do MAC Mask i Exclude IPSubnetMask OO Prefix length M Oooo z 1 6 5535 I IP Address Exclude Pv6 Address Exclude HHO M Port Range Exclude a Others mM 8021P M VLAN ID F IP Protocol T IP Packet Length M DSCFP O s TCP EE a as xclude lude Exclude lude lude M TCP ACK lude HHHHEHEH amp M DHCP VendorClassID DHCP Option 60 bal Class ID String M Service FT
381. this virtual server Choices are TCP UDP or TCP UDP Apply Click Apply to save your changes Back Click Back to return to the previous screen without saving EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 10 Network Address Translation NAT 10 3 The DMZ Screen In addition to the servers for specified services NAT supports a default server IP address A default server receives packets from ports that are not specified in the NAT Port Forwarding Setup screen Figure 74 Network Setting gt NAT gt DMZ Default Server Setup IM Default Server Address B Note Enter IF Address and click Apply to activate the DMZ host Clear the IF address filed and click Apply to deactivate the DMZ host The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 42 Network Setting gt NAT gt DMZ LABEL DESCRIPTION Default Server Enter the IP address of the default server which receives packets from ports that are not Address specified in the NAT Port Forwarding screen Note If you do not assign a Default Server Address the Device discards all packets received for ports that are not specified in the NAT Port Forwarding screen Apply Click Apply to save your changes Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings 10 4 The Sessions Screen Use the Sessions screen to limit the number of concurrent NAT sessions each client can use Click Network Setting gt NAT gt Sessions to display the following screen Fig
382. tication that uses certificates for only the server side authentications to establish a secure connection Client authentication is then done by sending username and password through the secure connection thus client identity is protected For client authentication EAP TTLS supports EAP methods and legacy authentication methods such as PAP CHAP MS CHAP and MS CHAP v2 PEAP Protected EAP Like EAP TTLS server side certificate authentication is used to establish a secure connection then use simple username and password methods through the secured connection to authenticate the clients thus hiding client identity However PEAP only supports EAP methods such as EAP MD5 EAP MSCHAPv2 and EAP GTC EAP Generic Token Card for client authentication EAP GTC is implemented only by Cisco LEAP LEAP Lightweight Extensible Authentication Protocol is a Cisco implementation of IEEE 802 1x Dynamic WEP Key Exchange The AP maps a unique key that is generated with the RADIUS server This key expires when the wireless connection times out disconnects or reauthentication times out A new WEP key is generated each time reauthentication is performed 340 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs If this feature is enabled it is not necessary to configure a default encryption key in the wireless security configuration screen You may still configure and store keys but they will not be used while dynamic WEP is enabled Note
383. tifier A SIP account s URI identifies the SIP account in a way similar to the way an e mail address identifies an e mail account The format of a SIP identity is SIP Number SIP Service Domain SIP Number The SIP number is the part of the SIP URI that comes before the symbol A SIP number can use letters like in an e mail address johndoe your ITSP com for example or numbers like a telephone number 1122334455 VolP provider com for example EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 18 VoIP SIP Service Domain The SIP service domain of the VoIP service provider is the domain name in a SIP URI For example if the SIP address is 1122334455 VolP provider com then Vol P provider com is the SIP service domain SIP Registration Each Device is an individual SIP User Agent UA To provide voice service it has a public IP address for SIP and RTP protocols to communicate with other servers A SIP user agent has to register with the SIP registrar and must provide information about the users it represents as well as its current IP address for the routing of incoming SIP requests After successful registration the SIP server knows that the users identified by their dedicated SIP URIS are represented by the UA and knows the IP address to which the SIP requests and responses should be sent Registration is initiated by the User Agent Client UAC running in the VoIP gateway the Device The gateway must be configured with inf
384. tifies a communicating party during a phase 1 IKE negotiation It is called pre shared because you have to share it with another party before you can communicate with them over a secure connection Type from 8 to 31 case sensitive ASCII characters or from 16 to 62 hexadecimal 0 9 A F characters You must precede a hexadecimal key with a Ox zero x which is not counted as part of the 16 to 62 character range for the key For example in 0x0123456789ABCDEF Ox denotes that the key is hexadecimal and 0123456789ABCDEF is the key itself Both ends of the VPN tunnel must use the same pre shared key You will receive a PYLD_ MALFORMED payload malformed packet if the same pre shared key is not used on both ends Certificate Click the button to use a certificate for authentication Select the certificate you want to use from the list You can create import and configure certificates in the Security gt Certificates screens EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 207 Chapter 17 VPN Table 68 Security gt VPN gt Setup gt Edit continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Advanced Setup Click Advanced Setup to configure more detailed settings of your IKE key management Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Device Click Back to return to the previous screen 17 4 Configuring Advanced Settings Click Advanced Setup in the VPN Setup Edit screen to open this screen Figure 108 Security gt VP
385. tings _ox Cancel EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 3 Inthe Library screen check the left panel The Windows Media Player should detect the Device Windows Media Player Ph Now Pl aying brany O tame Ta Music E e Playlists Title E Create Playlist E Jo Library GO Artist A LS A j ie 2 Album T r a a A P Primary Views dt Songs Artist Album Rating Playlists W Genre E Year wots Additional Views cl Artist a ji j 2 Album r a Td d Songs Contributing Composer Parental Online Stores i Genre Artist Rating E Year ar Rating lej Playlists The Device displays as a playlist Clicking on the category icons in the right panel shows you the media files in the USB storage device attached to your Device Windows 7 1 Open Windows Media Player It should automatically detect the Device O Windows Media Player File View Play Tools Help GO Organize Stream Create playlist Title Eh Library a F le Playlists j B L gt dJa Music Music Videos Pictures Recorded TV Playlists A Artist Album Genre a Videos Pictures Recorded TV Other Libraries gt Jd Music f Videos jel Pictures Recorded TV If you cannot see the Device in the left panel as shown above right click Other Libraries gt Refresh Other Libraries EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 47 Chapter 3 Tutorials 2 Select a category in the left pane
386. tion Network Type Infrastructure Network Mode 502 114 FyeEL ZU Channel 6 ZyXEL best Security WPA PSK MAC Address 00 40 05 CD 1F 64 Surveyed at 11 46 38 CPE 525 00 ot vo dlink4300 Sov Connect 2 The wireless client automatically searches for available wireless networks Click Scan if you want to search again If no entry displays in the Available Network List that means there is no wireless network available within range Make sure the AP or peer computer is turned on or move the wireless client closer to the AP or peer computer 3 When you try to connect to an AP with security configured a window will pop up prompting you to specify the security settings Enter the pre shared key and leave the encryption type at the default setting Use the Next button to move on to the next screen You can use the Back button at any time to return to the previous screen or the Exit button to return to the Site Survey screen Encryption Type TKIP Pre Shared Key T2MWwWPAPSKpresharedkeys4 34 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 4 The Confirm Save window appears Check your settings and click Save to continue Network Name SSID SSID Examples Network Type Infrastructure Network Mode 802 11 bsg Channel Auto Security wWPA PSK 5 The ZyXEL utility returns to the Link I nfo screen while it connects to the wireless network using your settings When the wireless link is establishe
387. tion interface When you use the PIN method you must enter the enrollee s PIN into the registrar Then when WPS is activated on the enrollee it presents its PIN to the registrar If the PIN matches the registrar sends the network and security information to the enrollee allowing it to join the network The advantage of using the PIN method rather than the PBC method is that you can ensure that the connection is established between the devices you specify not just the first two devices to activate WPS in the area However you need to log into the configuration interfaces of both devices Take the following steps to set up WPS using the PIN method 346 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs 1 Decide which device you want to be the registrar usually the AP and which you want to be the enrollee usually the client 2 Look for the enrollee s WPS PIN it may be displayed on the device If you don t see it log into the enrollee s configuration interface and locate the PIN Select the PIN connection mode not PBC connection mode See the device s User s Guide for how to do this for the Device see Section 6 4 on page 105 3 Log into the configuration utility of the registrar Select the PIN connection mode not the PBC connection mode Locate the place where you can enter the enrollee s PIN if you are using the Device see Section 6 4 on page 105 Enter the PIN from the enrollee device 4 Activate WP
388. ttent or unstabled wireless connection How can solve this problem The following factors may cause interference e Obstacles walls ceilings furniture and so on e Building Materials metal doors aluminum studs e Electrical devices microwaves monitors electric motors cordless phones and other wireless devices To optimize the speed and quality of your wireless connection you can e Move your wireless device closer to the AP if the signal strength is low e Reduce wireless interference that may be caused by other wireless networks or surrounding wireless electronics such as cordless phones e Place the AP where there are minimum obstacles such as walls and ceilings between the AP and the wireless client e Reduce the number of wireless clients connecting to the same AP simultaneously or add additional APs if necessary e Try closing some programs that use the Internet especially peer to peer applications If the wireless client is sending or receiving a lot of information it may have too many programs open that use the Internet EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 2 1 Chapter 30 Troubleshooting What wireless security modes does my Device support Wireless security is vital to your network It protects communications between wireless stations access points and the wired network The available security modes in your ZyXEL device are as follows WPA2 PSK recommended This uses a pre shared key with th
389. tting The following table shows some possible subnet masks using both notations Table 109 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation ALTERNATIVE LASTOCTET LAST OCTET SUBNET MASK NOTATION BINARY DECIMAL 255 255 255 0 24 255 255 255 128 25 1000 0000 128 255 255 255 192 26 1100 0000 192 Subnetting You can use subnetting to divide one network into multiple sub networks In the following example a network administrator creates two sub networks to isolate a group of servers from the rest of the company network for security reasons In this example the company network address is 192 168 1 0 The first three octets of the address 192 168 1 are the network number and the remaining octet is the host ID allowing a maximum of 28 2 or 254 possible hosts The following figure shows the company network before subnetting Figure 157 Subnetting Example Before Subnetting GmaEHEHHEHEHHEHEHE HEHEHE amp F i l i it Px I ll i Internet q q A g i fi E i g g il Mi 4 192 168 1 0 24 2 4 CEEE en oe ee en en Ea You can borrow one of the host ID bits to divide the network 192 168 1 0 into two separate sub networks The subnet mask is now 25 bits 255 255 255 128 or 25 The borrowed host ID bit can have a value of either 0 or 1 allowing two subnets 192 168 1 0 25 and 192 168 1 128 25 286 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting The following figure
390. unications For an indoor site each 1 dB increase in antenna gain results in a range increase of approximately 2 5 For an unobstructed outdoor site each 1dB increase in gain results in a range increase of approximately 5 Actual results may vary depending on the network environment Antenna gain is sometimes specified in dBi which is how much the antenna increases the signal power compared to using an isotropic antenna An isotropic antenna is a theoretical perfect antenna that sends out radio signals equally well in all directions dBi represents the true gain that the antenna provides Types of Antennas for WLAN There are two types of antennas used for wireless LAN applications e Omni directional antennas send the RF signal out in all directions on a horizontal plane The coverage area is torus shaped like a donut which makes these antennas ideal for a room environment With a wide coverage area it is possible to make circular overlapping coverage areas with multiple access points e Directional antennas concentrate the RF signal in a beam like a flashlight does with the light from its bulb The angle of the beam determines the width of the coverage pattern Angles typically range from 20 degrees very directional to 120 degrees less directional Directional antennas are ideal for hallways and outdoor point to point applications Positioning Antennas In general antennas should be mounted as high as practically possible and free
391. up to 64 service levels The following figure illustrates the DS field DSCP is backward compatible with the three precedence bits in the ToS octet so that non DiffServ compliant ToS enabled network device will not conflict with the DSCP mapping Figure 127 DiffServ Differentiated Service Field DSCP Unused 6 bit 2 bit The DSCP value determines the forwarding behavior the PHB Per Hop Behavior that each packet gets across the DiffServ network Based on the marking rule different kinds of traffic can be marked for different priorities of forwarding Resources can then be allocated according to the DSCP values and the configured policies 4 The Device does not support DiffServ at the time of writing 238 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 18 VoIP VLAN Tagging Virtual Local Area Network VLAN allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple logical networks Only stations within the same group can communicate with each other Your Device can add IEEE 802 1Q VLAN ID tags to voice frames that it sends to the network This allows the Device to communicate with a SIP server that is a member of the same VLAN group Some ISPs use the VLAN tag to identify voice traffic and give it priority over other traffic 18 8 4 Phone Services Overview Supplementary services such as call hold call waiting and call transfer are generally available from your VoIP service provider The Device supports the following services
392. urce address is the outbound address of the sending VPN gateway and its destination address is the inbound address of the VPN device at the receiving end When using ESP protocol with authentication the packet contents in this case the entire original packet are encrypted The encrypted contents but not the new headers are signed with a hash value appended to the packet Tunnel mode ESP with authentication is compatible with NAT because integrity checks are performed over the combination of the original header plus original payload which is unchanged by a NAT device Transport mode ESP with authentication is not compatible with NAT Table 71 VPN and NAT SECURITY PROTOCOL MODE NAT _ a aso fn et eri rp 17 6 3 VPN NAT and NAT Traversal NAT is incompatible with the AH protocol in both transport and tunnel mode An IPSec VPN using the AH protocol digitally signs the outbound packet both data payload and headers with a hash value appended to the packet but a NAT device between the IPSec endpoints rewrites the source or destination address As a result the VPN device at the receiving end finds a mismatch between the hash value and the data and assumes that the data has been maliciously altered NAT is not normally compatible with ESP in transport mode either but the Device s NAT Traversal feature provides a way to handle this NAT traversal allows you to set up an IKE SA when there are NAT routers between the two IPSec
393. ure 75 Network Setting gt NAT gt Sessions MAX NAT Sessions Per Host 2048 512 20480 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 165 Chapter 10 Network Address Translation NAT The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 43 Network Setting gt NAT gt Sessions LABEL DESCRIPTION MAX NAT Use this field to set a common limit to the number of concurrent NAT sessions each client Session computer can have If only a few clients use peer to peer applications you can raise this number to improve their performance With heavy peer to peer application use lower this number to ensure no single client uses too many of the available NAT sessions Apply Click Apply to save your changes Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings 10 5 The Address Mapping Screen Ordering your rules is important because the Device applies the rules in the order that you specify When a rule matches the current packet the Device takes the corresponding action and the remaining rules are ignored Click Network Setting gt NAT gt Address Mapping to display the following screen Figure 76 Network Setting gt NAT gt Address Mapping Add mew rule One to One The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 44 Network Setting gt NAT gt Address Mapping Local End IP This is the ending Inside Local IP Address ILA If the rule is for all local IP addresses then this field displays 0 0 0 0 as
394. ures The increase in IPv6 address size to 128 bits from the 32 bit Pv4 address allows up to 3 4 x 103 IP addresses The Device can use Pv4 IPv6 dual stack to connect to IPv4 and IPv6 networks and supports IPv6 rapid deployment 6RD IPv6 Addressing The 128 bit Pv6 address is written as eight 16 bit hexadecimal blocks separated by colons This is an example IPv6 address 2001 0db8 1a2b 0015 0000 0000 1a2 0000 Pv6 addresses can be abbreviated in two ways e Leading zeros in a block can be omitted So 2001 0db8 1a2b 0015 0000 0000 1a2 0000 can be written as ZOOS deo tla Ze ie Os 0s ae Fs e Any number of consecutive blocks of zeros can be replaced by a double colon A double colon can only appear once in an Pv6 address So 2001 0db8 0000 0000 1a2 0000 0000 0015 can be written as 2001 0db8 1a2 0000 0000 0015 2001 0db8 0000 0000 1la2f 0015 ZOOM ODS i rtazf 00 ILS Or 2ZUOsdbst O00 lant e415 IPv6 Prefix and Prefix Length Similar to an IPv4 subnet mask IPv6 uses an address prefix to represent the network address An IPv6 prefix length specifies how many most significant bits start from the left in the address compose the network address The prefix length is written as x where x is a number For example 2001 db8 1a2b 15 1a2 0 32 means that the first 32 bits 2001 db8 is the subnet prefix IPv6 Subnet Masking Both an IPv6 address and IPv6 subnet mask compose of 128 bit binary digits which are
395. uter dyndns org To use this feature you have to apply for DDNS service at www dyndns org This tutorial shows you how to e Registering a DDNS Account on www dyndns org e Configuring DDNS on Your Device e Testing the DDNS Setting Note If you have a private WAN IP address then you cannot use DDNS EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 3 11 1 Registering a DDNS Account on www dyndns org Open a browser and type http www dyndns org Apply for a user account This tutorial uses USerNamel and 12345 as the username and password Log into www dyndns org using your account Add a new DDNS host name This tutorial uses the following settings as an example e Hostname zyxelrouter dyndns org e Service Type Host with IP address e P Address Enter the WAN IP address that your Device is currently using You can find the IP address on the Device s web configurator Status page Then you will need to configure the same account and host name on the Device later 3 11 2 Configuring DDNS on Your Device Configure the following settings in the Network Setting gt Dynamic DNS screen e Select Active Dynamic DNS e Select Dynamic DNS for the DDNS type e Type zyxelrouter dyndns org in the Host Name field e Enter the user name UserNamel and password 12345 Dynamic DNS Configuration M Active Dynamic DNS Service Provider WWW DynDNS ORG Dynamic DNS Type Dynamic DNS Host Name Fyxelro uter dy
396. v6 client on your computer 1 Install Dibbler and select the DHCPv6 client option on your computer 2 After the installation is complete select Start gt All Programs gt Dibbler DHCPv6 gt Client I nstall as service 3 Select Start gt Control Panel gt Administrative Tools gt Services 364 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Appendix F IPv6 4 Double click Dibbler a DHCPv6 client 2 Services ile Action View Help m B 2 b b Services Local ta tota s Services Local Dibbler a DHCPv6 client ne Description Status Startup Type Log On 45 DCOM Server Process Launcher Provides la Started Automatic Local System ages moa Started Aubomatic Local System a DHCP Client Manag start the service Dibbler a DHCP y6 client Dibbler 4 Automatic Local Syste saa Distributed Link Tracking Client Maintains li Started Automatic Local System Siy Distributed Transaction Coordinator Coordinate Manual Network 5 Description fa DNS Client Resolves a Started Automatic Network 5 Dbbhler a portable DHCPv6 Sy Error Reporting Service Allows erro Started Automatic Local System e Sa Event Log Enables ey Started Automatic Local System This is DHCPv6 client oo Ss Extensible Authentication Protocol Provides wi Manual Local System 0 7 2 Sa Fast User Switching Compatibility Provides m Manual Local System fy FLEXNet Licensing Service This servic Manual Local System a Extended A Stand
397. ver an unsecured communications channel Diffie Hellman is used within IKE SA setup to establish session keys 768 bit Group 1 DH1 and 1024 bit Group 2 DH2 Diffie Hellman groups are supported Upon completion of the Diffie Hellman exchange the two peers have a shared secret but the IKE SA is not authenticated For authentication use pre shared keys Telecommuter VPN IPSec Examples The following examples show how multiple telecommuters can make VPN connections to a single Device at headquarters The telecommuters use IPSec routers with dynamic WAN IP addresses The Device at headquarters has a static public IP address Telecommuters Sharing One VPN Rule Example See the following figure and table for an example configuration that allows multiple telecommuters A B and C in the figure to use one VPN rule to simultaneously access a Device at headquarters HQ in the figure The telecommuters do not have domain names mapped to the WAN IP EMG5324 D10A Users Guide 217 Chapter 17 VPN addresses of their IPSec routers The telecommuters must all use the same IPSec parameters but the local IP addresses or ranges of addresses should not overlap Figure 115 Telecommuters Sharing One VPN Rule Example LAN 192 168 1 10 Table 77 Telecommuters Sharing One VPN Rule Example FIELDS TELECOMMUTERS HEADQUARTERS My IP Address 0 0 0 0 dynamic IP address Public static IP address assigned by the ISP Secure Gateway IP Public static
398. vice to your wireless network You can find the PIN either on the outside of the device or by checking the device s settings Note You must also activate WPS on that device within two minutes to have it present its PIN to the Device WPS Configuration Summary EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Chapter 6 Wireless Table 17 Network Setting gt Wireless gt WPS continued LABEL DESCRIPTION AP PIN The PIN of the Device is shown here Enter this PIN in the configuration utility of the device you want to connect to using WPS The PIN is not necessary when you use WPS push button method Click the Generate New PIN button to have the Device create a new PIN Status This displays Configured when the Device has connected to a wireless network using WPS or Enable WPS is selected and wireless or wireless security settings have been changed The current wireless and wireless security settings also appear in the screen This displays Not Configured when there is no wireless or wireless security changes on the Device or you click Release Configuration to remove the configured wireless and wireless security settings Release This button is available when the WPS status is Configured Configuratio n Click this button to remove all configured wireless and wireless security settings for WPS connections on the Device 802 11 This is the 802 11 mode used Only compliant WLAN devices can associate with the Device Mode SSID This is the na
399. view The web configurator allows you to choose which categories of events and or alerts to have the Device log and then display the logs or have the Device send them to an administrator as e mail or to a syslog server 19 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter e Use the System Log screen to see the system logs for the categories that you select Section 19 2 on page 244 e Use the Phone Log screen to view phone logs and alert messages Section 19 3 on page 245 e Use The VolP Call History screen to view the details of the calls performed on the Device Section 19 4 on page 245 19 1 2 What You Need To Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter Alerts and Logs An alert is a type of log that warrants more serious attention They include system errors attacks access control and attempted access to blocked web sites Some categories such as System Errors consist of both logs and alerts You may differentiate them by their color in the View Log screen Alerts display in red and logs display in black Syslog Overview The syslog protocol allows devices to send event notification messages across an IP network to syslog servers that collect the event messages A syslog enabled device can generate a syslog message and send it to a syslog server Syslog is defined in RFC 3164 The RFC defines the packet format content and system log related information of syslog messages Each syslog message has a facility and
400. xit the Local Area Connection Status screen 5 Select Start gt All Programs gt Accessories gt Command Prompt EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Appendix F IPv6 6 Use the ipconfig command to check your dynamic IPv6 address This example shows a global address 2001 b021 2d 1000 obtained from a DHCP server CAS peoent ig Windows IP Configuration Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection Connection specific DNS Suffix LPYO Addressa eos we SO dk 2 aa bee ZOO DUA de 1000 link local IPv6 Address i fe80 25d8 dcab c80a 5189 11 TPA CVO ES Sa ah oh SG aoa J a a ee wi BG LO LOO o Subnet Mask a 6 ao tae eae 2 FE 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway a amp S a gt ws a I fe80 213 49ff feaa 7125 11 L2 hos LOU 254 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 36 Appendix F IPv6 368 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide Legal Information Copyright Copyright 2012 by ZyXEL Communications Corporation The contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any part or as a whole transcribed stored in a retrieval system translated into any language or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic mechanical magnetic optical chemical photocopying manual or otherwise without the prior written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation Published by ZyXEL Communications Corporation All rights reserved Disclaimers ZyXEL does not assume any liability arising out of the application o
401. ystem DNS server in the order you specify in the Broadband screen to resolve domain names that do not match any DNS routing entry After the Device receives a DNS reply from a DNS server it creates a new entry for the resolved IP address in the routing table In the following example the DNS server 168 92 5 1 obtained from the WAN interface ptm0 100 is set to be the system DNS server The DNS server 10 10 23 7 is obtained from the WAN interface ppp1 123 You configure a DNS route for example com to have the Device forward DNS requests for the domain name mail example com through the WAN interface ppp1 123 to the DNS server 10 10 23 7 Figure 80 Example of DNS Routing Topology LAN WAN DNS 168 92 5 1 Default mail example com DNS 10 10 23 7 EMG5324 D10A User s Guide 171 Chapter 11 DNS Route 11 2 The DNS Route Screen The DNS Route screens let you view and configure DNS routes on the Device Click Network Setting gt DNS Route to open the DNS Route screen Figure 81 Network Setting gt DNS Route Add new DNS route O Status Domain Name WAN interface Modify 4 i example com EthenWAN Ei Ww B Note Amaxmium 20 entries can be configured The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 48 Network Setting gt DNS Route LABEL DESCRIPTION Add new DNS Click this to create a new entry route This is the number of an individual DNS route Status This shows whether th

Download Pdf Manuals

image

Related Search

Related Contents

FxCurrencyStrength Index User Manual  Samsung RSA1DTWP manual de utilizador  TANK-600 Embedded System  7407 Tri Lang IM.cdr - Taylor Precision Products  USER'S GUIDE - Sonics & Materials, Inc.  CARAT II-ita-191211-09.indd  Instruction manual  

Copyright © All rights reserved.
Failed to retrieve file